Class ^.n\^>4 

Book JfeB 

PRESENTED BY 



Scanned from the collections of 
The Library of Congress 



AUDIO-VISUAL CONSERVATION 
at Tht LIBRARY of CONGRESS 




* or 



Packard Campus 
for Audio Visual Conservation 
www.loc.gov/avconservation 

Motion Picture and Television Reading Room 
www.loc.gov/rr/mopic 

Recorded Sound Reference Center 
www.loc.gov/rr/record 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 

A LIST OF REFERENCES IN 
THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



COMPILED BY 



WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 

Chief of the Science and Technology Division 



WITH INTRODUCTION BY 



E. J. WALL 

Associate Editor of "American Photography'' 



NEW YORK 
1924 



/ 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 

A LIST OF REFERENCES IN 
THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



WILLIAM BURT GAMBLE 

Chief of the Science and Technology Division 



WITH INTRODUCTION BY 

E. J. WALL 

Associate Editor of "American Photography" 



NEW YORK 
1924 



NOTE 

This list includes books and periodical 
articles available in the Reference Depart- 
ment of The New York Public Library on 
June 1, 1924. They may be consulted in the 
Central Building at Fifth Avenue and Forty- 
second Street. No attempt has been made to 
cite references to patent records. 



REPRINTED OCTOBER 1924 
FROM THE 

BULLETIN OF THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 
JUNE. JULY, AUGUST AND SEPTEMBER. 1924 



PRINTED AT THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 

form plSS [x-29-24 3c] 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 

A LIST OF REFERENCES IN THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



INTRODUCTION 



IT is interesting to note that a print in the approximate colors of nature was 
obtained before photography, as we now understand it, had become an 
accomplished fact. J. T. Seebeck sent to the poet Goethe a note: "On the 
chemical action of light and colored illumination," in which he described the 
reproduction of a spectrum in colors on damp silver chloride. This was pub- 
lished by Goethe as an appendix to his "Zur Farbenlehre" (Tubingen, 1810, 
Bd. 2, p. 717). Descriptions of Daguerre's and Fox Talbot's processes of 
photography were published in 1839. 

The Seebeck process attracted some attention in the early days, notably 
from Sir John Herschel, E. Becquerel, Niepce de Saint Victor and Poitevin. 
But excellent as are the results thus obtainable this process has become more 
of a pretty laboratory experiment than a working method, because no means 
have been found of making such pictures permanent. The process is based 
on the fact that the "subchlorides" of silver, that is, the dark-colored products 
of the action of light on white silver chloride, assume the colors of the incident 
light. When silvered plates or homogeneous films of silver subchloride on 
reflective surfaces are used, the colors are partly due to the formation of silver 
in laminae, separated from one another by half the wave-length of the incident 
light. Using paper supports involving no regular reflection, the colors become 
the so-called "body colors," which may be looked upon as light-formed pig- 
ments. Fixation of such pictures destroys in the former case the ordered sep- 
aration of the laminae, and in the latter case the surface color and chemical 
nature of each body pigment are altered. 

J. Clerk Maxwell, the famous English physicist, was the first to suggest 
the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by splitting up the 
subject into its three component colors, red, green, and blue-violet, in accord- 
ance with the Young-Helmholtz theory of trichromatic. vision. He actually 
attempted (Proc. Roy. Soc. 1859, v. 60, p. 404, 484) to reproduce a subject in 
this manner by photographing it through liquid color filters of the above named 
hues and projecting transparencies from the negatives through similarly 
colored filters by means of three lanterns. The result was, of course, but an 
evanescent picture and by no means perfect, for at that time there was no known 
means for rendering the silver salts responsive to colors other than blue and 
violet. Maxwell seems to have confined his attention solely to a projected 
screen picture. 

[ 3 ] 



4 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



To Ducos du Hauron and Charles Cros, two Frenchmen, belongs the 
honor of having first outlined the possibility of producing prints in colors. 
Though working quite independently of one another, they practically laid the 
bases of modern practice, in two papers presented to the Societe Francaise de 
Photographie on the same day (Bull. Soc. frang. Phot. 1869, tome 15, p. 122, 
152). Du Hauron had, however, sent a paper to the Academie des Sciences as 
early as 1862, in which he outlined his theory, but unfortunately this was re- 
jected because no proofs of the correctness of his arguments were adduced. 

The basis of these processes was again the splitting up of the subject into 
the three fundamental colors and printing from the negatives in the comple- 
mentary colors. Of recent years all that has been done is the perfection of 
minor details of the process; the basic facts were determined once for all by 
the above experimenters, who seem to have been entirely ignorant of Clerk 
Maxwell's work. 

The sensitive surfaces of that time were very slow, initially sensitive only 
to blue, violet and the ultra-violet, and the means for color-sensitizing, which 
was mainly effected with chlorophyll, not very effective. It was not till H. W. 
Vogel's discovery of the theory of optical sensitizers (Berichte, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
p. 1305) that marked color-sensitivity was possible. Vogel discovered that 
the addition of certain anilin dyes to a photographic emulsion considerably 
enhanced its sensitiveness to the less refrangible spectral rays. Up to this time 
two collodion processes, either the wet or emulsion methods, were alone used, 
and their comparative insensitiveness was a serious handicap. The introduc- 
tion of the gelatine plate and the recent discovery of new and much more potent 
color sensitizers, the isocyanins, have placed all three-color processes on a prac- 
tical basis. 

The superposition of aerial colored images, as in the chromoscope, the 
principle of which was clearly outlined by du Hauron and Cros in their early 
papers, is by no means sufficient from a practical point of view. A print in 
colors is the great desideratum and although the many processes so far worked 
out are in most cases satisfactory, yet the fact that three negatives and three 
colored superposed pulls are required has undoubtedly militated against the 
more general adoption of these methods by the average worker, for obviously 
the chances of failure are increased sixfold. 

Du Hauron outlined a possible method by means of which the three ex- 
posures might be reduced to one. This was effected by the application of the 
three selective color filters in microscopic dimensions to one surface, so as to 
form a color mosaic of the subject, the color elements being of sufficient minute- 
ness as to present, when viewed at the distance of normal vision, a homogeneous 
grey. This is the principle of the screen-plate process, which was brought to 
perfection by MM. Lumiere in 1907, in their Autochrome plate. In this, potato 
starch grains, stained in accordance with the theoretical requirements, are dis- 
tributed over a glass surface, there being approximately 4,000,000 per square 
inch of surface. This color-mosaic is coated with an emulsion and the camera 
exposure made through the color grains. The primary negative image thus 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



5 



obtained, which appears in the complementary colors, is dissolved and a posi- 
tive is obtained in the colors of the original. Here again one meets with the 
great disadvantage that the results are on glass. Nor is there any really satis- 
factory method of making paper prints from Autochrome. If more than one 
result is required a separate exposure has to be made for each. It is true that 
it is possible to use the mosaic color filters on a separate surface and obtain an 
ordinary negative, broken up into minute areas of varying density according 
to the colors of the subject and from this to make any number of glass posi- 
tives and bind the latter in register with a color mosaic filter and thus obtain 
satisfactory reproductions; but they are still on glass. 

The ideal process of color photography would possibly be one which would 
give us a stable color image in the camera, from which any number of replicas 
could be made. The feasibility of some such process is proved by the fact that 
many inorganic and organic colors fade or bleach out under the action of their 
complementary colored rays. This is a fact known from the very earliest days 
and many attempts have been made to work out a practicable process, using the 
brilliant anilin colors as bases. Distinct and marked advances have been made. 
But even at its best the camera exposures are inordinately long, extending over 
many hours, and the fact that no means of completely 'fixing' the colors (that 
is, destroying the fading properties), has made the bleach-out process more of 
an interesting laboratory experiment than a work-a-day one. 

Wilhelm Zenker ("Lehrbuch der Photochromie," Berlin, 1868) outlined 
the possibility of obtaining photographs in natural colors by the regular reflec- 
tion from silver laminae, deposited in a film at a separation of half the wave- 
length of the incident light, whereby interference would be set up with color 
formation. Otto Wiener (Wiedemann's Annal. 1890, Bd. 40, p. 203) proved 
experimentally that the formation of "standing waves" in a silver emulsion film, 
by reflection of the incident light back on its own path from a mirror surface, 
was possible. But to Gabriel Lippmann, of Paris, belongs the honor of having 
first produced in a grainless film the laminary deposit of metallic silver 
(Comptes rendus, 1891, tome 112, p. 274), showing the brilliant interference 
colors that reproduced those of the original. The essentials for this process are 
an emulsion of a silver salt in which the latter is in such a finely divided state 
that the vehicle looks quite transparent. If such an emulsion on its glass sup- 
port be placed in contact with a reflecting surface, metallic mercury being gen- 
erally employed, the incident light is reflected back on the same path and gives 
rise to the stationary waves, in which the ether particles vibrate to and fro with- 
out any progressive movement. That is, the incident and reflected rays inter- 
fere with one another and where their phase motions coincide there is increase 
of ether vibration and consequent increase of light, while when they interfere 
regularly with one another the vibrations are annulled, consequently there is 
absence of light and no chemical action on the sensitive silver salt. 

When these interference heliochromes are examined under suitable con- 
ditions of lighting, they show an accuracy and brilliancy of coloring which is 
very remarkable. Unfortunately this, too, remains but a laboratory experi- 



6 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



ment, for the extreme slowness of the emulsion (about 2,000 times less than 
that of the normal slow plate) as well as the necessity of making the plates for 
oneself, have barred the process from general practice. 

The diffraction process, devised by Professor R. W. Wood, of Johns 
Hopkins University (U. S. Patent 755, 983, 1904), involving the splitting up 
of white light by diffraction gratings, although beautiful from a theoretical 
point of view, is again only a laboratory process. The results are on glass and 
must be viewed in a particular manner in order that the colors may be seen. 
These are superimposed spectral, not pigmentary, colors. To the same category 
belong the prismatic dispersion process of Drac (English Patent 1,008, 1904) 
which is actually based on a suggestion of Charles Cros (Les mondes, Feb., 
1869); the micro-spectra methods of Lanchester (English Patent, 16,548, 
1895); and Rheinberg (Photographic journal, 1912, v. 52, p. 162), and others. 

The future of color photography, from the amateur worker's point of 
view, lies on the laps of the Gods. There are, exclusive of the screen-plate 
process, excellent methods which will give practically correct reproductions 
of the colors of nature. But they are too tedious and call for more 
care than the average worker will expend. The extraordinary facility with 
which an ordinary black-and-white photograph can be obtained has completely 
jaundiced the outlook of the average worker as regards color methods. He 
must have one that will give him his color record with the same ease as in black 
and white. 

The future of color photography lies in two directions: the one, in its more 
widespread use in illustration; the other in the moving picture. The recent 
advances in photomechanical printing processes, as in rotary-gravure and off- 
set, should open up a still wider field for book illustration; for with these 
methods the mechanical grain is so much reduced as to give a much more pleas- 
ing and delicate reproduction than with the ordinary half-tone block, the grain 
or network of which becomes, unless extreme care be used, very offensive in 
three-color printing. 

It is no exaggeration to state that the photographic end of these processes 
is perfected — that there is practically no improvement to be made. The ad- 
vance which must be made lies with the printing ink makers. Exactly how 
improvement and perfection are to be attained is not easy to see. If perma- 
nency of the colors in the pictures were not a vital point the problem could be 
solved; but as it is demanded, and rightly too, that the inks shall be permanent 
(that is, stable to light) the ink maker is heavily handicapped from the start. 
The theoretical requirements for the three inks, red, yellow, and blue, are well 
established and it is known that by the use of the brilliant coal tar colors these 
requirements can be met. But though the advances of recent years in over- 
coming the fugitiveness of the anilin lakes have been great, the problem has 
not yet been solved and the ink maker has perforce to use more stable pigments, 
which will not fulfill the fundamental requirements. Hence, unless handwork 
or retouching, both expensive and tedious, are resorted to, the photographic 
work is unsatisfactory. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



7 



It is more than probable that many will not agree with the writer in his 
views as to motion pictures in colors. But that we shall have them in a few 
years is a foregone conclusion. Many attempts have been made and there are 
one or two methods which are theoretically perfect, but these are not commer- 
cially adaptable and their adoption would necessitate a revolution in the method 
of showing pictures in every theater. One or two processes are being tried out 
at the present time with more or less success; but they are two-color methods 
and are, therefore, so incomplete in color rendering as to seriously handicap 
advances in this direction. Many will be able to recall the old Kinemacolor 
process, a two-color process of projection in which the pictures were shown in 
red and green in rapid succession, the effect depending upon the fusion of the 
color in the brain of the observer. All the methods based on this persistence 
and fusion of vision are hopeless, as one soon becomes conscious of an eye- 
strain and retinal fatigue that is extremely trying. Those in which each pro- 
jected picture appears as a complete color composite are not commercial 
methods, because special apparatus is required for showing them. The future 
of the motion picture in colors lies in a process which will give each minute pic- 
ture complete in all the colors, and adaptable to any ordinary projector. 

Many have advanced as an argument against the use of color in motion 
pictures that it would detract from the picture — that is from the acting. This 
always seems to me a weak argument, or else it shows a poor standard of act- 
ing. Would it not be as legitimate to argue that the ordinary properties and 
stage settings militate against the acting and the lines of the legitimate or speak- 
ing drama? Yet one does not become conscious of these. If color is used, as 
it should be, merely as a subsidiary and not the essential in the motion picture, 
it should not detract from the silent drama. 

It is impossible to omit some few words as to the value of this compila- 
tion of references available in The New York Public Library. It is incalculable. 
It places in the hands of the student of the subject a ready means of knowing 
what has been done and said by others. And by its means it is possible to start 
out on a line of research primed with past efforts, past successes, past failures, 
so that months of useless and costly spade-work can be saved. — E. J. W. 



8 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



THE LIST 



1761 

1. Tiphaigne de la Roche, Charles Fran- 
cois. Giphantia; or, A view of what has 
passed, what is now passing, and, during 
the present century, what will pass, in the 
world. Translated from the original French 
[of C. F. Tiphaigne de la Roche], with ex- 
planatory notes. London: Robert Hors- 
field, 1760-61. 2 v. in 1. 12°. SB 

See [part 1], p. 95-98 for a fanciful account of a 
process suggesting Lippmann's. These passages also 
printed, with comments, in British journal of photog- 
raphy, May 29, 1891, v. 38, p. 342, MFA. 

"Thou knowest that the rays of light, reflected 
from different bodies, make a picture and paint 
the bodies upon all polished surfaces, on the retina 
of the eye, for instance, on water, on glass. The 
elementary spirits have studied to fix these transient 
images; they have composed a most subtile matter, 
very viscous, and proper to harden and dry, by the 
help of which a picture is made in the twinkle of an 
eye." 

1792 

2. Wuensch, Christian Ernst. Versuche 
und Beobachtungen iiber die Farben des 
Lichtes. . . Leipzig: J. G. I. Breitkopf und 
Comp, 1792. xii, 114 p. illus. 8°. PEX 

Wiinsch (born 1744, died 1828), a professor in 
the University of Leipzig, was probably the first to 
prove the theory of the three visual primary colors. 
An abstract of this section of the book may be found 
in J. C. Fischer's Geschichte der Physik, v. 7, 1806, 
p. 50, of which the Library has a copy, PAB. There 
is an abstract in English in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement , p. 34-36, MFA. 



1810 y 

3. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von. Zur 
Farbenlehre. Tubingen: J. G. Cotta, 1810. 
2 v. and atlas. 8° and 4°. PEX and f PEX 

"Goethe took great interest in the work of Seebeck 
and the best account of the experiments in question 
is preserved in Goethe's treatise on colour." — Bolas. 

4. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Von der 
chemischen Action des Lichts und der 
farbigen Beleuchtung. (In: J. W. von 
Goethe, Zur Farbenlehre. Tubingen, 1810. 
8°. Bd. 2, p. 716-720.) PEX 



1820 

5. Seebeck, Johann Thomas. Uber die un- 
gleiche Erregung der Warme im prisma- 
tischen Sonnenbilde. (Konigliche Akade- 
mie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen. 
Berlin, 1820. Jahren 1818-19, p. 305-350.) 

* EE 

Also in Journal fur Chemie und Physik, Halle, 
1824, Bd. 40, p. 129-176, PAA. 



y 

1833 

6. Brewster, Sir David. A treatise on op- 
tics. 1st American edition... Philadel- 
phia: Carey, Lea, & Blanchard, 1833. 323, 
95 p. illus. 12°. PEB 

Seebeck's and Wollaston's experiments on coloring 
power of the spectrum described on p. 83. 



1840 

7. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
A letter to the Rev. William Whewell... 
on the chemical action of the solar rays. 
(British Association for the Advancement 
of Science. Report of the 9th meeting, 
Birmingham, August, 1839. London, 1840. 
part 2, p. 9-11.) * EC 

"When a slip of sensitive paper is exposed to a 
highly concentrated spectrum, a picture of it is rapidly 
impressed on the paper, not merely in black, but in 

colours." 

8. On the chemical action of the rays 

of the solar spectrum on preparations of 
silver and other substances, both metallic 
and non-metallic, and on some photo- 
graphic processes, illus. (Royal Society 
of London. Philosophical transactions, 
London, 1840, part 1, p. 1-59.) * EC 

"The result was equally striking and unexpected. 
A very intense photographic impression of the spec- 
trum was rapidly formed, which, when withdrawn 
and viewed in moderate daylight, was found to be 
coloured with sombre, but unequivocal tints, imitating 
those of the spectrum itself... I have not succeeded 
in fixing these tints. They are, however, susceptible 
of half fixing by the mere action of water, and may 
be viewed at leisure in moderate daylight, or by 
candlelight." 



1841 

9. Herschel, Sir Tohn Frederick William. 
Letter. . .dated July 31, 1841. (British As- 
sociation for the Advancement of Science. 
Report of the 11th meeting, Plvmouth, 
July, 1841, London, 1842, part 2, p. 40.) 

*EC 

Submits a number of photographs tinted with vege- 
table coloring matters which have been eaten away 
by the luminous rays of the spectrum. "A circum- 
stance which, considering the great command of colour 
which this new variety of the photographic art affords, 
holds out no slight hope of a solution of the problem 
of a photographic representation of natural objects 
in their proper colours." 

10. Waller, Augustus. Experiments on the 
coloured films formed by iodine, bromine, 
and chlorine upon various metals. (Lon- 
don, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophical 
magazine, London, 1841, v. 21, p. 426-437.) 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



9 



1843 

11. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
On the action of the rays of the solar spec- 
trum on vegetable colours, and on some 
new photographic processes, illus. (Royal 
Society of London. Philosophical trans- 
actions, London, 1842, part 1, p. 181-214.) 

*EC 

Also printed in London, Edinburgh & Dublin philo- 
sophical magazine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 5—21, 107— 
115, 246-252, OA. 

12. Talbot, H. F. On the coloured rings 
produced by iodine on silver, with remarks 
on the history of photography. (London, 
Edinburgh, and Dublin philosophical maga- 
zine, London, 1843, v. 22, p. 94-97.) OA 

Also printed in Daguerreian journal, New York, 
May 1, 1851, v. 1, p. 357-359, MFA (Humphrey's). 



1848 

13. Becquerel, Edmond. De l'image photo- 
graphique coloree du spectre solaire. (An- 
nales de chimie et de physique, Paris, 1848, 
serie 3, tome 22, p. 451-459.) PAA 

German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 110, p. 25-30, 3-VA, and in 
Journal fur praktische Chemie, Jahrg. 1848, Bd. 2, 
p. 358-365, PKA. Abstracted in the Comptes rendus 
of the Academie des sciences, Paris, 1848, tome 26, 
p. 181-183, *EO. English translation in Photographic 
news, London, 1859, v. 2, p. 302-303; v. 3, p. 14-15, 
27-28, 62-63, MFA. 



1849 

14. Becquerel, Edmond. De l'image photo- 
chromatique du spectre solaire et des images 
colorees obtenues a la chambre obscure. 
(Annales de chimie et de physique. Paris, 
1849, serie 3, tome 25, p. 447-474.) PAA 

German translations in Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg. 1849, Bd. 114, p. 44-56, _ 118-122, 
3—VA, and in Journal fiir praktische Chemie, Jahrg. 
1849, Bd. 3, p. 154-175, PKA. 



1850 

15. Colors produced by photography. (Da- 
guerreian journal, New York, Dec. 2, 1850, 
v. 1, p. 77.) MFA (Humphrey's) 

Brief notes on the Becquerel process. 



1851 

16. The Daguerreian journal: devoted to 
the daguerreian and photogenic arts. Also, 
embracing the sciences, arts, and literature. 
S. D. Humphrey, editor and publisher, v. 
1-3, no. 3 (Nov. 1, 1850 -Dec. 15, 1851). 
New York, 1850-51. 8°. MFA (Humphrey) 

Reprints papers by famous experimenters. See 
articles on L. L. Hill. For a commentary on Hill 
see British journal of photography, March 6, 1903, 
p. 184-185, MFA. 



17. Hill, Levi L. The natural colors. 
(Photographic art journal, New York, 
Feb., 1851, v. 1, p. 116-118.) MFA 

18. Photographic researches and ma- 
nipulations; including the substance of the 
author's Treatise on daguerreotype. New 
York: Holman & Gray, 1851. 15 p. 8°. 

* C p.v.1036 

19. The Hillotype. (Photographic art 
journal, New York, Aug., 1851, v. 2, p. 76- 
81.) MFA 

20. Hunt, Robert. Heliochrome. (Hum- 
phrey's journal, New York, Nov. 15, 1851, 
v. 3, p. 21-25.) MFA 

From the London art journal. 

Also printed in Photographic art journal, New 
York, Nov., 1851, v. 2, p. 291-294, MFA. 

21. New and valuable discovery. Hillo- 
types. (Daguerreian journal, New York, 
1850-51, v. 1, p. 209-211, 241-242, 273-274, 
337; v. 2, p. 17-18, 20-23, 50-51, 113-114, 
145-147, 305, 312-314, 337-338.) MFA 

Titles of articles vary. 

22. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Felix 
Abel. The heliochromotype of M. Niepce 
de St. Victor. (Photographic art journal, 
New York, July, 1851, v. 2, p. 32-37.) 

MFA 

Translation from La Lumiere. 

23. Snelling, H. H. The Hillotype. _ [By 
H. H. Snelling.] (Photographic art jour- 
nal, New York, April, 1851, v. 1, p. 333- 
340.) MFA 

24. On taking daguerreotypes in the 

natural colors. [By H. H. Snelling.] 
(Photographic art journal, New York, 
April, 1851, v. 1, p. 208-211.) MFA 

Comments on Hill process. 



1852 

25. [La Chromo-photographie.] (Cosmos, 
Paris, 1852, tome 1, p. 372-373.) VA 

Briefly describes experiments of Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 

26. [La Fixation des couleurs.] (Cosmos, 
Paris, 1852, tome 2, p. 39-44, 89-91, 341- 
343.) VA 

Editorial discussion of the claims of Niepce de 
Saint Victor, Becquerel, Campbell, and Hill. 

27. The Hillotype. (Photographic art 
journal, New York,. Nov., 1852, v. 4, p. 293- 
296.) MFA 

28. [Hillotypes.] (Photographic art jour- 
nal, New York, Feb., 1852, v. 3, p. 131-132.) 

MFA 

Copy of defence published by the editor of the 
Prattsville Advocate. 

29. Hunt, Robert. On the possibility of 
producing photographs in their natural 
colours. (In his: Photography; a treatise 
on the chemical changes produced by the 
solar radiation... New York, 1852. 12°. 
p. 219-221.) MFC 



10 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1852, continued. 

30. Mercury, pseud. Communication on 
the Hillotype. (Photographic art journal, 
New York, Dec, 1852, v. 4, p. 377-380.) 

MFA 

31. Mr. Hill and his manifesto. (Photo- 
graphic art journal, New York, Oct., 1852, 
v. 4, p. 249.) MFA 

32. Morse, Samuel Finley Breese. Photo- 
graphic colors. (National Intelligencer, 
Washington, Oct. 8, 1852, v. 40, p. 2.) * A 

"First: Mr. Hill has made the discovery of a proc- 
ess for fixing the colors of the camera image, and, 
although not so perfected in all its complicated parts 
as to be equally true in the cojor of the various ob- 
jects, is sufficiently developed in its results to give 
assurance of its ultimate perfection... Fourth: Mr. 
Hill's process cannot be like M. Becquerel's, for it is 
stated that M. Becquerel 'was never able to fix the 
colors.' " 

For discussion see Scientific American, Oct. 23, 
1852, v. 8, p. 48, VA. 

Also printed in Humphrey's journal, New York, 
Nov. 1, 1832, v. 4, p. 217-219, MFA. 

33. A Practical Daguerre, pseud. The Hil- 
lotype; or, Daguerreotypes in the colors 
of nature. (Photographic art journal, 
New York, Jan., 1852, v. 3, p. 47-50.) MFA 



1853 

34. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. 
(Humphrey's journal, New York, 1853, v. 
4, p. 362-364, 378-380; v. 5, p. 11-12, 41-44, 
74-75, 96.) MFA 

aSt two instalments have the title: Hydrogen. 



35. Campbell, James. Heliochromy. (Sci- 
entific American, New York, Feb. 26, 1853, 
v. 8, p. 186.) VA 

Experiments with hydrogen and electricity to 
hasten the Becquerel and Niepce processes. For 
discussions see Cosmos, 1852-53, tome 2, p. 39-44, 
89-91, 341-343, VA, and Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Jahrg. 1853, Bd. 127, p. 143-145; 1853, 
Bd. 128, p. 49-51, 3-VA. 

36. United States. — Patents Committee 
(Senate, 32:2). Report. . . [On the memorial 
of Levi L. Hill, in reference to his alleged 
discovery in heliochrome, or sun-printing]. 
March 3, 1853. [Washington, 1853., 2 p. 
8°. (U. S. 32. cong., 2. sess. Senate re- 
port 427; serial 671.) * SBF 

"It is believed that most of the philosophers, both 
in Europe and America, long since gave up as hope- 
less the search after this branch of science, which 
has now been discovered by one of our citizens in 
one of the wild valleys of the Catskill mountains, far 
removed from the schools of art." 

Reprinted in National intelligencer, March 4, 1853, 
v. 4, p. 3. For discussions see Scientific American, 
1853, v. 8, p. 224, 226, 380, VA. 



miere (troisieme memoire). (Annales de 
chimie et de physique, Paris, 1854, serie 3, 
tome 42, p. 81-106.) PAA 

Author's abstract in Academie des sciences, 
Comptes rendus, Paris, 1854, tome 39, p. 63-67, *EO. 

38. Hunt, Robert. Researches on light in 
its chemical relations; embracing a con- 
sideration of all the photographic proc- 
esses. London: Longman, Brown, Green, 
& Longmans, 1854. xx, 396 p. 2. ed. illus. 
8°. MFC 

An excellent resume of early experiments on the 
effects of light upon chemicals. See especially chap- 
ter 13: On producing coloured pictures by the solar 
radiations. 



1855 

39. Henderson, Peter. On naturally- 
colored photographs. (Humphrey's jour- 
nal, New York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 23- 
25.) MFA 

^0. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Felix 
Abel. Recherches photographiques. Pho- 
tographic sur verre. Heliochromie. . . 
Avec une preface biographique et des 
notes par M. Ernest Lacan. Paris: Alexis 
Gaudin et frere, 1855. xxiv, 140 p., 1 port. 
8°. MFC 

Contains the first three of his memoirs on helio- 
chromes presented to the French Academy of Sciences. 

41. Ross, William. On naturally-colored 
photographs. (Humphrev's journal, New 
York, May 15, 1855, v. 7, p. 25-28.) MFA 

A reply to letter by Peter Henderson. 

42. On the probability of producing 

actino-polychrome pictures. (Humphrey's 
journal, New York, March 1, 1855, v. 6, 
p. 345-349.) MFA 

1856 

43. Hillotypes. (Humphrey's journal, New 
York, 1852, v. 4, p. 27, 219-224, 267-268, 285, 
298-301, 361-362; 1855, v. 6, p. 290, 313-319, 
321, 354; 1856, v. 8, p. 97.) MFA 

Various letters and opinions concerning this his- 
toric controversy. 

44. Testud de Beauregard. Colored photo- 
graphs obtained by simple exposure to 
light, and a method of printing positives 
without salts of silver. (Humphrey's jour- 
nal, New York, 1855, v. 7, p. 141-144, 172- 
174; 1857, v. 9, p. 192.) MFA 

Translated from the Bulletin of the Societe fran- 
chise de photographic 

Also printed in Journal of photography, London, 
1856, v. 2, p. 195-197, MFA. 



1854 

37. Becquerel, Edmond. Nouvelles re- 
cherches sur les impressions colorees pro- 
duces lors de Taction chimique de la lu- 



1857 

45. Antisell, Thomas. Hailotype. (Hum- 
phrey's journal, New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 
324-325, 339.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



11 



1857, continued. 

46. Hallotypes. (Humphrey's journal, 
New York, 1857, v. 8, p. 257-258, 289, 305, 
321-325, 337-339; v. 9, p. 1-2.) MFA 

47. Maxwell, James Clerk. Experiments 
on colour, as perceived by the eye, with 
remarks on colour-blindness, illus. (Royal 
Society of Edinburgh. Transactions, Ed- 
inburgh, 1857, v. 21, p. 275-298.) * EC 

See especially p. 284 for an early realization of 
three-color work. 



1859 

48. Barrett, Thomas. Photographs in nat- 
ural colours. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, 1859, v. 2, p. 56, 95.) MFA 

Gives formula for developer used. 

49. Garrod, Edward. Colour in photogra- 
phy. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
19, 1859, v. 2, p. 287.) MFA 

Secured colors on an ordinary plate. 

50. Photographs in natural colors. (Hum- 
phrey's journal, New York, 1859, v. 11, p. 
196-197, 286-287.) MFA 

Becquerel process. 

51. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, March 18, 1859, 
v. 2, p. 17.) MFA 

Fixing process claimed by a correspondent. 



1860 

52. Clarke, S. On the photogenic action 
of colour. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, Liverpool, Nov. 1, 1860, v. 7, p. 313— 
314.) MFA 

53. Dove, H. W. Das Dichrooscope. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1860, Serie 4, Bd. 20, p. 265-278.) PAA 

Studies in light interference. 

54. Gage, F. B. Vegetable and mineral 
photography. (Humphrey's journal, New 
York, May 15, 1860, p. 22-23.) MFA 

Prediction that photography in natural colors will 
be realized. 

\S 55. Martel, Charles. Colour in its relation 
to photography. illus. (Photographic 
news, London, 1860, v. 4, p. 49-50, 61-62, 
73_74, 97_98, 109-110, 121-122, 133-134, 144- 
146, 157-158, 169-170, 181-182.) MFA 



1862 

56. Maxwell, James Clerk. On the theory 
of three primary colours. (Royal Institu- 
tion of Great Britain. Proceedings, 1858— 
62, London, 1862, v. 3, p. 370-374.) * EC 

"The first idea of three-colour work has always 
been hitherto ascribed to Collen, but in the 1895 Jahr- 
buch published recently by Dr. Eder, he points out 
that really the idea is due to Clerk Maxwell, who read 
a paper on May 17, 1861, before the Royal Institu- 
tion, on the theory of the three primary colours." — 
British journal of photography, July 26, 1895, p. 475. 



57. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Felix 
Abel. On heliochromy. (Photographic 
news, London, Feb. 28, 1862, v. 6, p. 101— 
102.) MFA 

For brief account of private exhibition see above, 
Sept. 12, 1862, v. 6, p. 433-434. 



1863 

58. Pie, Charles. Les images photo- 
graphiques reproduisant les couleurs na- 
turelles des objets represented. (Academie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Sept. 
28, 1863, tome 57, p. 584.) * EO 

For comments see Humphrey's journal, New York, 
Dec. 1, 1863, v. 15, p. 230, MFA. 

59. Tillman, Samuel D. Heliochromy. 
(Photographic news, London, June 5, 1863, 
v. 7, p. 270-271.) MFA 

Points out obstacles. 



1864 

60. Photographs in natural colours at last. 
(Photographic news, London, July 1, 1864, 
v. 8, p. 319-320.) MFA 

"Oil of pinks" suggested in a spiritual seance. 



1865 

61. Calvert, F. Crace. On some of the 
most important chemical discoveries made 
within the last two years. Lecture i, de- 
livered on Tuesday, the 4th of April, 1865: 
On the discoveries in chemistry applied to 
arts and manufactures. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, Sept. 29, 1865, v. 13, p. 
689-693.) MFA 

Deals 'chiefly with the investigations of Niepce de 
Saint Victor. 

62. Chevreul, E. Heliochromie. Com- 
munication ... relative a. la note de M. 
Niepce de Saint-Victor sur les noirs pro- 
duits en photographic (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1865, 
tome 61, p. 701-705.) * EO 

63. Collen, Henry. Natural colour in pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 27, 1865, v. 12, p. 547.) 

MFA 

Suggests a three plate process. 

64. Photography in natural colours. 

illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 24, 1865, v. 12, p. 601.) MFA 

Further explains his suggestions published in the 
issue of Oct. 27, 1865. 

65. Fowler, R. J. [Photographing in nat- 
ural colours.] (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 10, 1865, v. 12, p. 575- 
576.) MFA 

Refers to experiments of Niepce de Saint Victor. 



12 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1865, continued. 

66. Henderson, Peter. Photography in 
natural colours. (Photographic news, 
London, Dec. 29, 1865, v. 9, p. 617-618.) 

MFA 

Account of author's experiments. 

67. Lacan, Ernest. Photography in col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, Dec. 
29, 1865, v. 9, p. 616-617.) MFA 

Poitevin process. 

68. Photographs in natural colours. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
10, 1865, v. 12, p. 573-574.) MFA 

Refers to investigations of Sir J. F. W. Herschel, 
Robert Hunt, Edmond Becquerel, and Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 

69. Poitevin, L. A. Action simultanee de 
la lumiere et des sels oxygenes sur le sous- 
chlorure d'argent violet; application a 
l'obtention par la photographie des cou- 
leurs naturelles sur papier. (Academie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Dec. 

/18, 1865, tome 61, p. 1111-1112.) * EO 

70. Reynolds, Emerson J. Heliochromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 8, 1865, v. 12, p. 616.) MFA 

Reference to the researches of Dr. Reade and 
Walter Crum. 

71. Strutt, J. W. Photography in natural 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
Nov. 24, 1865, v. 9, p. 564.) MFA 

Obstacles to success stated. 

72. Taylor, J. Trail. Historical notes on 
photography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, Dec. 22, 1865, v. 9, 
p. 604-606.) MFA 



75. [Les recherches photographiques.] 

(Cosmos, Paris, Oct. 3, 1866, serie 2, tome 
4, p. 389-391.) VA 

English translation in Photographic news, London, 
Oct. 19, 1866, v. 10, p. 497-498, MFA, under title: 
On obtaining black tones in heliochromic processes. 

76. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, Feb. 16, 1866, v. 
10, p. 73-74.) MFA 

Poitevin's process. 

Also printed in Humphrey's journal, New York, 
March 15, 1866, v. 17, p. 345-347, MFA. 

77. Photography in colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, 1865, v. 9, p. 48, 84; 
1866, v. 10, p. 555, 578.) MFA 

M. Chambay of Mauritius claims to have been 
successful in fixing colors. 

78. Photography in natural colors. (Hum- 
phrey's journal, New York, Nov. 1, 1866, 
v. 18, p. 201.) MFA 

Colors on ordinary plate observed after an eclipse. 



1867 

79. Becquerel, Edmond. La lumiere, ses 
causes et ses effets. Paris: Didot freres, 
fils et cie, 1867-68. 2 v. 8°. PEB 

See v. 2, p. 209—234: Reproduction des couleurs 
par Taction de la lumiere. 

80. Paage, A. Photographs in natural col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, Aug. 
16, 1867, v. 11, p. 398.) MFA 

Results of author's experiments. 

81. Van der Weyde, P. H. Coloured da- 
guerreotypes by the reversed action of 
light. (Photographic news, London, July 
19, 1867, v. 11, p. 345.) MFA 



1866 

73. Herschel, Sir John Frederick William. 
Photography in natural colours, etc. 
(Photographic news, London, Jan. 5, 1866, 
v. 10, p. 5-6.) MFA 

74. Niepce de Saint Victor, Claude Felix 
Abel. Memoires sur l'heliochromie. (Aca- 
demie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, 1852-66.) * EO 

Memoire 1: June 2, 1851, tome 32, p. 834-841. 
Memoire 2: Feb. 9, 1852, tome 34, p. 215-218. Me- 
moire 3: Nov. 8, 1852, tome 35, p. 694-697. Memoire 
4: Feb. 10, 1862, tome 54, p. 281-284. Memoire 5: 
Jan. 12, 1865, tome 56, p. 90-93. Memoire 6: Oct. 1, 
1866, tome 63, p. 567-569. 

Memoire 1 has the title: Extrait d'un memoire sur 
une relation existant entre la couleur de certaines 
flammes colorees, avec les images heliographiques 
colorees par la lumiere. 

An English translation of memoir 3 in Scientific 
American, Feb. 19, 1853, v. 8, p. 179, VA; of memoir 
5, in Photographic news, London, Jan. 30, 1863, v. 7, 
p. 51-52, MFA; of memoir 6, in Photographic news, 
London, Nov. 13, 1866, v. 10, p. 557-558, MFA. 

Translation of memoir 3 also in Photographic art 
journal, New York, Feb., 1853, v. 5, p. 110-112, 
MFA. 



1869 

82. Cros, Charles. M. Cros's solution of 
the problem of photography in colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Oct. 8, 1869, 
v. 13, p. 483-485.) MFA 

83. Ducos du Hauron, Louis. A new helio- 
chromic process. (Photographic news, 
London, July 2, 1869, v. 13, p. 319-320.) 

MFA 

Paper read before the Societe francaise de photog- 
raphie. 



1870 

84. Grune, Wilhelm. Experiences of an 
experimentalist. (Photographic news, 
London, Jan. 14, 1870, v. 14, p. 16.) MFA 

Collodion plates developed in camera. 

85. Thomas, R. W. Is it possible to obtain 
photographs in colours? (Photographic 
news, London, Dec. 23, 1870, v. 14, p. 606- 
607.) MFA 

The author thinks not. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



13 



1871 

86. Schultz-Sellack, Carl. Photography in 
colours. (Photographic news, London, 
June 23, 1871, v. 15, p. 291.) MFA 

Color phenomena with silver salts. 

87. — — Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 
der Silberhaloidsalze und den Zusammen- 
hang von optischer und chemischer Licht- 
absorption. (Annalen der Physik und 
Chemie, Leipzig, 1871, Bd. 143, p. 161-171.) 

PAA 

1872 

88. M. Niepce de St. Victor's photographs 
in colour. (Photographic news, London, 
Feb. 16, 1872, v. 16, p. 84.) MFA 

Brief account of pictures exhibited in London. 



1873 

89. Fowler, J. Bennett. Polychromatic 
printing. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 10, 1873, v. 20, p. 488-489.) 

MFA 

Reference to Vidal and Edwards processes. 

90. Sutton, Thomas. Photo-polychromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 26, 1873, v. 20, p. 464.) MFA 

Brief reference to the Vidal process. 

91. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber die 
Lichtempfindlichkeit des Bromsilbers fur 
die sogenannten chemisch unwirksamen 
Farben. (Deutsche chemische Gesell- 
schaft. Berichte, Berlin, 1873, Jahrg. 6, 
p. 1302-1306.) PKA 

92. W., A. J. Polychrome photography. 
(British iournal of photography, London, 

1873, v. 20, p. 385, 521.) MFA 

Comments on the Vidal and Laroche processes. 

1874 

93. Bow, R. H. Effects of sunlight on the 
colours of pigments. (Photographic news, 
London, 1874, v. 18, p. 183-184, 195-196.) 

MFA 

94. Saint Florent, E. de. Photographs in 
natural colours. (Photographic news, 
London, 1873, v. 17, p. 505-506; 1874, v. 18, 
p. 125, 175-176, 182-183.) MFA 

Chemical formulas for a direct process. From 
Bulletin of the Societe franchise de photographic 

95. Spiller, John. Remarks on the asserted 
influence of colouring matters on the re- 
duction of silver salts. (Photographic 
news, London, May 29, 1874, v. 18, p. 253- 
254.) MFA 

96. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. On the ac- 
tion of colours upon bromide on silver. 
(Photographic news, London, Sept. 18, 

1874, v. 18, p. 451-452.) MFA 



97. Ueber die chemische Wirkung 

des Sonnenspectrums auf Silberhaloid- 
salze. (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, 
Leipzig, 1874, Bd. 153, p. 218-250.) PAA 



1875 

98. Donisthorpe, Wordsworth. Producing 
colour photographs, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1875, 
v. 22, p. 479.) MFA 

A suggested three-color prism process. 



1876 

99. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. Dr. 
Vogel's colour theory. (Photographic 
news, London, 1876, v. 20, p. 307-308, 323.) 

MFA 



100. Photography of the red and 

ultra-red end of the spectrum. (Nature, 
London, March 30, 1876, v. 13, p. 432.) OA 

101. Cros, Charles. [La photographie des 
couleurs.i (Academie des sciences. Comptes 
rendus, Paris, 1876, tome 82, p. 1514-1515; 
1876, tome 83, p. 291.) * EO 

For criticisms of Edmond Becquerel see above, 
tome 83, p. 11, 291-292. 

102. Dumoulin, Eugene. Les couleurs re- 
produces en photographie. Historique, 
theorie et pratique. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
lars, 1876. 63 p., 1 table. 12°. (Actualites 
scientifiques.) MFFp.v.10 

103. Spiller, John. Photography in col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, July 
21, 1876, v. 20, p. 344.) MfA 

Protests against using the term color photography 
to cover color block printing. 

104. Waterhouse, James. On some facts 
in support of Dr. Vogel's colour theory. 
(Photographic news, London, June 30, 
1876, v. 20, p. 302-304.) MFA 



1877 

105. Albert, Josef. [Photography in nat- 
ural colors.] (Nature, London, Nov. 29, 
1877, v. 17, p. 92.) OA 

Abstract only. 

106. Vidal, Leon. Photochromy. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 
1877, v. 24, p. 6.) MFA 



1878 

107. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The acceleration of oxidation caused by 
the least refrangible end of the spectrum. 
(Royal Society of London. Proceedings. 
London, 1878, v. 27, p. 291-292.) * EC 



14 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1878, continued. 

108. Explanation of the action of 

dyes on films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, July 5, 1878, v. 22, p. 319-320.) MFA 

109. Husnik, Jaroslav. Photo-printing in 
natural colours. (Photographic news, 
London, 1878, v. 22, p. 123-125, 148-149.) 

MFA 



1879 

110. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the production of coloured spectra by 
light. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1879, v. 29, p. 190.) 

*EC 

111. Cros, Charles. Les couleurs, le chro- 
mometre et la photographie des couleurs. 
(Societe frangaise de physique. Seances, 
Paris, annee 1879, p. 35-39.) PAA 

112. Sur la classification des cou- 
leurs et sur les moyens de reproduire les 
apparences colorees par trois cliches 
photographiques speciaux. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1879, 
tome 88, p. 119-122.) * EO 

113. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, May 16, 
1879, v. 23, p. 229.) MFA 

Cros's experiments. 

114. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Aug. 29, 
1879, v. 23, p. 414-415.) MFA 

Comments on work of Abney and of Herr Albert. 

115. Versnaeyen, M. K. Photography in 
colours. (Photographic news, London. 
March 21, 1879, v. 23, p. 140.) MFA 

Bonnaud's process. 

116. Reproduction of colour by pho- 
tography. (Photographic news, London, 
May 30, 1879, v. 23, p. 254-255.) MFA 

Work of Charles Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 

117. Vidal, Leon. Lecture by M. Cros on 
colour in photography. (Photographic 
news, London, Aug. 1, 1879, v. 23, p. 367- 
368.) MFA 

118. The real state of the question of 

the reproduction of natural colours by 
means of photography. (Photographic 
news, London, June 6, 1879, v. 23, p. 271- 
272.) MFA 

1880 

119. Photographs in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, Feb. 27, 1880, v. 
23, p. 97.) MFA 

French "discovery" proved not to be genuine. 

120. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, Dec. 3, 1880, 
v. 23, p. 577.) MFA 

Process of Ducos du Hauron and of Herr Albert. 



1881 

121. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the effect of the spectrum on the ha- 
loid salts of silver, and on mixtures of the 
same. (Royal Society of London. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1881, v. 33, p. 164-186.) 

*EC 

122. On the spectrum impressed on 

silver chloride and its bearing on silver 
printing in photography. (Chemical news, 
London, Oct. 14, 1881, v. 44, p. 184-185.) 

PKA 

123. Cros, Charles, and J. Carpentier. Pho- 
tographie des couleurs, par teinture de 
couches d'albumine coagulee. (Academie 
des sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1881, 
tome 92, p. 1504-1505.) * EO 



1883 

124. Sawyer, J. R. Photography in rela- 
tion to colour. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, June 1, 1883, v. 27, p. 349-351.) MFA 

125. Swinton, A. A. Campbell. The past, 
present, and future of photography in nat- 
ural colours. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec, 1883, v. 30, p. 776, 
791-792.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1883, 
v. 27, p. 805-806, 823-824, MFA; Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 194-197, 
226-229, MFA. 



1884 

126. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Vogel's method of colour photography. 
(Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1884, 
v. 28, p. 500-501.) MFA 

127. Berkeley, Herbert B. A chapter in 
the history of coloured images. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 29, 
1884, p. 551-552.) MFA 

Controversial letter to Mr. W. E. Debenham in 
which the author states that he produced various col- 
ors on bromide plates as early as 1877. 

128. Captain Abney, F.R.S. port. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
15, 1884, v. 31, p. 100.) MFA 

129. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber das Verhal- 
ten der Haloidverbindungen des Silbers 
gegen das Sonnenspectrum und die Steige- 
rung der Empfindlichkeit derselben gegen 
einzelne Theile des Spectrums durch Farb- 
stoffe und andere Substanzen. illus. 
(Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math. — naturwis- 
senschaftliche Classe, Wien, 1885, Jahrg. 

1884, Bd. 90, Abt. 2, p. 1097-1143.) * EF 

English translation in Photographic news, London, 

1885, v. 29, p. 145-146, 162-165, 227-228, 355-357, 
420-421, 452-453, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



15 



1884, continued. 

130. The Eosine compound of silver, and 
isochromatic plates. (Photographic news, 
London, July 4, 1884, v. 28, p. 416-418.) 

MFA 

131. Leon Warnerke. port. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 1884, 
v. 31, p. 39.) MFA 

132. Pirn, Greenwood. [Color photogra- 
phy.] (Nature, London, March 31, 1884, 
v. 29, p. 470.) OA 

Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 

133. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Investiga- 
tions as to the action of eosine on photo- 
graphic films. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, May 23, 1884, v. 28, p. 325-326.) MFA 

134. Vogel's method of colour pho- 
tography. (Photographic news, London, 
Aug. 1, 1884, v. 28, p. 493-494.) MFA 

135. Woods, C. Ray. The spectroscope 
and its relation to photography, x. Pho- 
tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, June 27, 1884, v. 28, 
p. 405-406.) MFA 

Historical review. 



1885 

136. Color photography. (Anthony's pho- 
tographic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 16, 
P. 97-98.) MFA 

Reviews work of Becquerel and Niepce de Saint 
Victor. 

137. Mr. Carey Lea. port. (Anthony's 
photographic bulletin, New York, 1885, v. 
16, p. 513-514.) MFA 

138. Rood, Ogden N. Photography in 
color. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 353-355.) MFA 

Tells of colors produced by the collodion process. 

139. Stokes, G. G. On a remarkable phe- 
nomenon of crystalline reflection. (Royal 
Society of London. Proceedings, London, 
1885, v. 38, p. 174-185.) * EC 

140. Vogel, H ermann Wilhelm. A new 
heliochromic principle. (Photographic 
news, London, July 10, 1885, v. 29, p. 434.) 

MFA 

Suggestions for improving the Ducos du Hauron 

process. 

Also printed in Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1885, v. 16, p. 547-548, MFA. 

141. tiber den Zusammenhang zwischen 

Absorption der Farbstoffe und deren sen- 
sibilisirender Wirkung auf Bromsilber. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1885, N. F. Bd. 26, p. 527-530.) PAA 



1886 

142. Dawson, George. Photography in oil 
colours. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 12, 1886, v. 33, p. 714.) MFA 

Describes Pouncy's process. 

143. Eder, Josef Maria, tiber die Wirkung 
verschiedener Farbstoffe auf das Verhal- 
ten des Bromsilbers gegen das Sonnen- 
spectrum und spektroskopische Messungen 
iiber den Zusammenhang der Absorption 
und photographischer Sensibilisirung. illus. 
(Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten. Sitzungsberichte, Math.-naturwissen- 
schaftliche Classe, Wien, 1886, Jahrg. 1885, 
Bd. 92, Abt. 2, p. 1346-1372.) * EF 

144. Herschel, A. S. On processes of pho- 
tography in natural colours. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 30, 
1886, v. 33, p. 271-273.) MFA 

Traces early history with an account of the author's 
experiments on the effect of screens upon sensitive 
plates. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1886, 
v/30, p. 283-285, 326-327, MFA. 

v 145. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Color-sensi- 
tive photographic plates, illus. (Franklin 
Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, July, 1886, 
v. 122, p. 44-46.) VA 

146. Correct color-tone photography 

with ordinary gelatine bromide plates. 
(Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadel- 
phia, Aug., 1886, v. 122, p. 123-124.) VA 

147. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Ueber 
einige Farbenwahrnehmungen und iiber 
Photographie in natiirlichen Farben. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1886, N. F. Bd. 28, p. 130-135.) PAA 

Brief abstract in Nature, London, Aug. 12, 1886, 
v. 34, p. 354, OA. 

"Vogel proposed to sensitize plates specially for 
each spectrum region... and instead of projecting the 
pictures with colored lights he proposed to make as 
many pigment prints as negatives, each in a color 
complementary to the light which acted to produce 
the respective negative, and to superpose them as in 
the Collen method." — F. E. Ives. 



1887 

148. Debenham, W. E. Pretended photog- 
raphy in natural colours. (Photographic 
news, London, July 15, 1887, v. 31, p. 437- 
438.) MFA 

Cellerier process. 

Also printed in Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 493-495, MFA. 

149. Harrison, W. H. Colored chloride of 
silver. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 723-725.) MFA 

150. Harrison, William Jerome. History 
of photography in colors. (In his: A his- 
tory of photography. New York, 1887. 
8°. p. 117-125.) MFC 



16 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1887, continued. 

151. Lang, William, jr. Carey Lea's pho- 
tochloride of silver. (Anthony's photo- 
graphic journal, New York, 1887, v. 18, p. 
495-497.) MFA 

152. The Latest thing in photography in 
"natural colours." (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 10, 1887, v. 34, p. 
353-354.) MFA 

Editorial claims that the Cellerier process of back- 
ing a transparency with colored paper was originated 
in a large measure by Aston in 1866. 

153. Lea, Mathew Carey. Combinations 
of silver chloride with other metallic chlo- 
rides. (American journal of science, New 
Haven, 1887, series 3, v. 34, p. 384-387.) 

OA 

Abstracted in Nature, London, Nov. 24, 1887, v. 
37, p. 88, OA. 

154. On red and purple chloride, bro- 
mide and iodide of silver; on heliochromy 
and on the latent photographic image. 
(American journal of science, New Haven, 
1887, series 3, v. 33, p. 349-364.) OA 

Abstracted in Nature, London, May 19, 1887, 
v. 36, p. 64, OA. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 1, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 9-13, 
MFA; Photographic news, London, June 3, 1887, 
v. 31, p. 337-342, MFA. 

155. Pearce, Charles E. Photography in 
unnatural colours. A chapter from the 
history of the past. (Photographic news, 
London, June 10, 1887, v. 31, p. 355-356.) 

MFA 

Bitter attack on L. L. Hill. 

156. Professed photography in natural col- 
ours. (Photographic news, London, 1887, 
v. 31, p. 343, 353-354, 366, 381-382, 437-438.) 

MFA 

Discussions as to the merits of the Cellerier process. 

157. Staats, Georg. Zur Kenntniss der 
photochromatischen Eigenschaften des 
Chlorsilbers. (Deutsche chemische Ge- 
sellschaft. Berichte, 1887, Jahrg. 20, p. 
2322-2323.) PKA 

Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 9, 1887, MFA; Chemical Society. Journal, 
London, 1887, v. 52, Abstracts, p. 1071, PKA. 

"When a well polished plate of silver is dipped 
into a five per cent, solution of iron chloride it ac- 
quires a slate colour. The plate is taken out of the 
solution after ten seconds, dried quickly (without 
heating), and covered with red, emerald, orange, and 
cornflower-blue glass. In sunshine the colours ap- 
pear on the plate after a few minutes." 



159. Balfour, Graham. The coming pho- 
tography in color — for good or evil. 
(International annual of Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1888, v. 1, p. 
46-50.) MFA 

Relation of color photography to art. 

160. Harding - Warner, W. Photography 
in colors. (International annual of An- 
thony's photographic bulletin, New York, 
1888, v. 1, p. 592-595.) MFA 

Experiments of the author and Samuel Powel about 
1860. 

161. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Chlorophyl 
and gelatine-bromide plates, illus. (Frank- 
lin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, June, 
1888, v. 125, p. 479-482.) VA 

162. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
Strutt. On the remarkable phenomenon of 
crystalline reflexion described by Prof. 
Stokes. (London, Edinburgh, and Dublin 
philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
ence, London, Sept., 1888, series 5, v. 26, 
p. 256-265.) OA 



1889 

163. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Captain Ab- 
ney on heliochromy. (Franklin Institute. 
Journal, Philadelphia, Nov., 1889, v. 128, p. 
339-341.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 8, 1889, v. 36, p. 731-732, MFA. 

164. Heliochromy. (British journal 

of photography, London, Dec. 21, 1888, v. 
35, p. 806-807.) MFA 

For corrections see Photographic news, London, 
Dec. 21, 1888, v. 32, p. 802, MFA. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, Dec. 
14, 1888, v. 32, p. 789-790, MFA, and in Franklin 
Institute, Journal, Philadelphia, 1889, v. 97, p. 54-58, 
140, VA. 

165. Obernetter, E. Some considerations 
of photography with color plates, illus. 
(International annual of Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1889, v. 2, p. 
175-177.) MFA 

Experiments with coal-tar colors. 

166. Rayleigh (3d baron), John William 
Strutt. On achromatic interference-bands. 
(London, Edinburgh, & Dublin philosophi- 
cal magazine and journal of science, Lon- 
don, 1889, series 5, v. 28, p. 77-91, 189-206.) 

OA 



1888 

158. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Light and colour. (Society of Arts. Jour- 
nal, London, 1888, v. 37, p. 80-83, 90-93, 99- 
106, 113-123.) VA 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, 1889, 
v. 33, p. 9-10, 20-22, 69-71, 276-280, 348-350, 412- 
413, 429-430, MFA. 



1890 

167. Bedding, Thomas. Coloured au nat- 
urel. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1890, v. 37, p. 4.) MFA 

"The paths of science are traversed by innumer- 
able wild geese, whose pursuers appear incapable of 
perceiving the hopelessness of their case. The photo- 
graph in natural colours must, unfortunately, be 
classed with these evasive fowl." 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



17 



1890, continued. 

168. Eder, Josef Maria. Photography in 
natural colours as effected by Herr Franz 
Veress, of Klausenburg. (Photographic 
news, London, May 9, 1890, v. 34, p. 360.) 

MFA 

169. Gaedicke, J. Photography in colors. 
(Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1890, v. 21, p. 357-358.) MFA 

His experiments with Poitevin's process. 

170. Photography in natural colours. 

(Photographic news, London, Aug. 8, 1890, 
v. 34, p. 618.) MFA 

A review of early methods; also reference to 
Veress process. 

Also printed in Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1890, v. 21, p. 328-330, MFA. 

171. Gunther, Hermann E. Photography 
in Germany. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, 1890, v. 34, p. 357, 610-611.) MFA 

Experiments of Veress and Gaedicke. 

172. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 
in natural colours on silver plates. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, Feb. 21, 1890, v. 34, 
p. 153.) MFA 

Differences between his process and those of Cros 
and Ducos du Hauron. 

173. Photography in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, 1890, v. 34, p. 217, 
276-277, 448-450.) MFA 

Newspaper correspondence regarding the Veress 
process. 

174. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Photo- 
graphien in naturlichen Farben. (Physi- 
kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 
lungen, Berlin, June 13, 1890, Jahrg. 9, p. 
73-78.) PAA 

175. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Stehende 
Lichtwellen und die Schwingungsrichtung 
polarisirten Lichtes. illus. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1890, N. F. 
Bd. 40, p. 203-243.) PAA 

Investigations of the retention of colors by a sensi- 
tized plate. 



1891 

176. Becquerel, Edmond. Observations... 
sur la communication de M. Lippmann au 
sujet de la reproduction photographique 
des couleurs. (Academie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
112, p. 274-275.) * EO 

177. [Sur la reproduction photo- 
graphique des couleurs. i (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 9, 
1891, tome 112, p. 331.) * EO 

Shows several reproductions taken forty years be- 
fore. 

178. Befget, Alphonse. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 
1891, tome 48, p. 33-40.) OA 

Historical. Lippmann process. 



179. ■ Photographie des couleurs par 

la methode interferentielle de M. Lipp- 
mann. Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
1891. vi, 58 p. 12°. (Bibliotheque photo- 
graphique.) MFFp.v.5 

Bound with: G. Balagny, L'hydroquinone, Paris, 

1890. 12°. 

180. Cornu, A. Sur une experience recente, 
determinant la direction de la vibration 
dans la lumiere polarisee. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 26, 

1891, tome 112, p. 186-189.) * EO 

181-182. Sur les objections faites a In- 
terpretation des experiences de M. Wiener. 
(Academie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Feb. 16, 1891, tome 112, p. 365-370.) 

*EO 

183. Gothard, Eugen von. Ueber die 
neueren Fortschritte der Heliochromie. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, 
Jahrg. 5, p. 46-50.) MFA 

Veress process. 

184. Green, A. G., and others. Photogra- 
phy in aniline colours. By A. G. Green, 
C. F. Cross and E. J. Bevan. (Society of 
Arts. Journal, London, Jan. 23, 1891, v. 39, 
p. 150-155.) VA 

185. Harding - Warner, W. Pictures in 
natural colors. (International annual of 
Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 4, p. 205-207.) MFA 

Describes Wothly type process of 1863-64. 

186. Hatzfeld, Albert. La reproduction 
photographique des couleurs. (Revue sci- 
entifique, Paris, May 16, 1891, tome 47, p. 
609-613.) OA 

Historical. Lippmann process. 

187. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Photography 
in the colors of nature, illus. (Franklin 
Institute. Journal, Jan., 1891, v. 131, p. 1- 
21.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photoaraphy, 
London, 1891, v. 38, p. 56-57, 103-104, 118-120, 
137-138, MFA; and Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 115-118, 146-148, 207- 
210, 239-242, MFA. 

188. Photography in the colors of na- 
ture, illus. (Anthony's photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 745-747.) 

MFA 

Argument with H. W. Vogel as to priority of in- 
vention. 

189. Professor Lippmann's helio- 
chromy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, 
Philadelphia, Aug., 1891, v. 132, p. 141-144.) 

VA 

190. Labatut. L'absorption et la photog- 
raphie des couleurs. (Academie des sci- 
ences. Comptes rendus, Paris, July 20, 
1891, tome 113, p. 126-129.) * EO 



18 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1891, continued. 

191. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Academic des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Feb. 2, 1891, tome 
112, p. 274-275.) * EO 

Also printed in Revue scientifique, Paris, Feb. 7, 
1891, tome 47, p. 161-162, OA. 

For an English translation see British journal of 
photography, Feb. 20, 1891, v. 38, p. 121, MFA. 
This also includes account of interview with M. Lipp- 
mann by the representative of the London Daily News. 

192. Photographie des couleurs du 

spectre solaire. (L'Astronomie, Paris, 
1891, annee 10, p. 87-88.) OMA 

193. Mascart, fileuthere £lie Nicolas. Traite 
d'optique. Paris: Gauthier-Villars et fils, 
1889-93. 3 v. and atlas. 8° and 4°. 

PEB and ftt PEB 

See tome 2, p. 577-578 for discussion of color 
effects on photographic plate. 

194. The New discoveries in heliochromy, 
illus. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1891, v. 22, p. 216-219.) MFA 

Lippmann process. 

195. Ogonowski, E., conte. La photochro- 
mie. Tirage d'epreuves photographiques 
en couleurs. Paris: Gauthier-Villars et 
fils, 1891. 2 p.L, 30 p., 1 table. 12°. (Bib- 
liotheque photographique.) MFF p.v.20 

Bound with: C. O'Madden, Le photographe en 
voyage. Paris, 1890. 12°. 

196. Photographing in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 27, 
1891, v. 38, p. 135.) MFA 

Comments by The Lancet on the Lippmann process. 

197. Photography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 20, 
1891, v. 38, p. 113.) MFA 

Description of and comments on Lippmann process. 

198. Scott, Albert W. Natural colors on 
the lantern screen. (Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1891, v. 22, 
p. 118-119.) MFA 

Verak process. 

199. Some of the difficulties of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1891, v. 38, p. 273, 306-307.) 

MFA 

200. Thwing, Charles B. Color photogra- 
phy by Lippmann's process. (American 
journal of science, New Haven, Conn., 
1891, series 3, v. 42, p. 388-390.) OA 

Modifications of the process. 

201. Vidal, Leon. Photographic methods 
of obtaining polychromatic impressions. 
(Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 698-700, 725-728.) 

MFA 

Describes well-known methods. 

202. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Dr. Lipp- 
mann's photographs in natural colors. 
(Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 166-167.) MFA 



203. Photography in natural colors. 

(Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1891, v. 22, p. 680-683.) MFA 

Argument with F. E. Ives as to priority. 

204. Winstanley, D. Heliochromy. (An- 
thony's photographic bulletin, New York, 
1891, v. 22, p. 85-87.) MFA 

Explains his method of printing with silver salt. 

205. Zenker, Wilhelm. Die Entstehung 
der Farben in der Photochemie. (Jahr- 
buch fixr Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fur 1891, Halle a. S., 1891, Jahrg. 5, 
p. 294-303.) MFA 



1892 

206. Boothroyd, Jabez. Backing of plates 
and color sensitive films. (International 
annual of Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1892, v. 5, p. 23.) MFA 

207. Colour in the camera. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 6, 1892, 
v. 39, p. 295.) MFA 

Account of lecture by Frederic E. Ives at Associa- 
tion Hall, Philadelphia, under the auspices of the 
Photographic Society of Philadelphia. 

208. Colour photography "an established 
fact." (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 8, 1892, v. 39, p. 26-27.) MFA 

Copy of article in Philadelphia Public Ledger re- 
garding an illustrated lecture by Frederic E. Ives at 
the Franklin Institute. 

209. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The helio- 
chromoscope. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1893, v. 135, p. 35- 
41.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 25, 1892, v. 39, p. 758-759, MFA. 

210. Krone, Hermann. Ueber Farbenpho- 
togramme von Spectren. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1892, N. F. 
Bd. 46, p. 426-430.) PAA 

Lippmann process. 

211. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs. illus. (Conservatoire des 
arts et metiers. Annales, Paris, 1892, serie 
2, tome 4, p. 161-172.) VA 

212. ■ La photographie des couleurs. 

(Revue scientifique, Paris, 1892, tome 50, 
p. 33-35.) OA 

213. La photographie des couleurs, 

son principe, ses progres les plus recents. 
illus. (Revue generate des sciences, Paris, 
1892, tome 3, p. 41-45.) OA 

214. Photographies colorees du spectre, 

sur albumine et sur gelatine bichromatees. 
(Academie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Oct. 24, 1892, tome 115, p. 575.) * EO 

215. Sur la photographie des couleurs. 

(Academie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, April 25, 1892, tome 114, p. 961-962.) 

*EO 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



19 



1892, continued. 

216. Meslin, G. Sur la photographie des 
couleurs. (Annales de chimie et de phy- 
sique, Paris, 1892, serie 6, tome 27, p. 369- 
391.) PAA 

On the theory of the Lippmann process. 

217. Photography in natural colours up to 
date. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 19, 1892, v. 39, p. 114-115.) 

MFA 

Describes the process of Dr. Raphael Kopp. 

218. Stolze, F. Color effect in the picture 
and photography. (Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1892, v. 23, 
p. 680-683, 719-722.) MFA 

General principles of color. 

219. Vidal, Leon. La photogravure en re- 
lief et en creux. La photochromographie 
et leurs applications a l'industrie du livre. 
(Conservatoire des arts et metiers. An- 
nales, Paris, 1892, serie 2, tome 4, p. 192— 
211.) . VA 

1893 

220. Colour photography, an interview 
with Mr. Frederic Ives. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1893, v. 
40, supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 

221. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Composite 
heliochromy. illus. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, May 19, 1893, v. 41, p. 
663-672.) VA 

With discussion. 

Reprinted in British journal of photography, 1893, 
v. 40, p. 328-330, 344-347, MFA. 

222. ■ The Lumiere — Lippmann col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 15, 1893, v. 40, p. 
798-799.) MFA 

223. MM. Lumiere's experiments in "col- 
our photography." (British journal of 
photography, London, May 26, 1893, v. 40, 
p. 325.) MFA 

Gives formulae for emulsion and developer. 

224. Mareschal, G. Les progres de la pho- 
tographie des couleurs. (Le Genie civil, 
Paris, June 24, 1893, tome 23, p. 125-126.) 

VA 

Lumiere formulas for working Lippmann process. 

225. Warnerke, Leon. Photographs in 
natural colours produced by the improved 
process of L. Lumiere, after Professor 
Lippmann's interference method. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 10, 

1893, v. 40, p. 718.) MFA 

For editorial comments see Oct. 20, 1893, v. 40, 
p. 668. 



1894 

226. Dillaye, Frederic. La chromophotog- 
raphie. illus. (In his: Les nouveautes 
photographiques 1894. Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 
142-154.) MFA 



227. Photochromographie. illus. (In 

his: Les nouveautes photographiques 1894. 
Paris, 1894. 8°. p. 247-258.) MFA 

228. Dunmore, Edward. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 10, 1894, v. 41, p. 504.) MFA 

Suggests "suitably coloured films of gelatine, pro- 
duced by the aforesaid triple negatives, superposed on 
each other, and the result examined as a transpar- 
ency." 

229. Fourtier, H. Photography in colors. 
(International annual of Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. 
215-216.) MFA 

230. Gitchell, Corwin. Photography in 
colors. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 221-223.) MFA 

Ives' process. 

231. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photography in 
colors. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 50-51.) MFA 

Lippmann process. 

232. Hopkins. Photography in colors — 
the method as practiced by R. D. Gray, 
illus. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 40-43.) MFA 

233. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Color screens 
for composite heliochromy, illus. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1895, New 
York, 1894, p. 241-244a.) MFA 

234. Composite heliochromy. illus. 

(Technology quarterly, Boston, 1894, v. 7, 
p. 317-323.) VDA 

Abstract in Journal of the Society of Chemical In- 
dustry, London, Nov. 30, 1895, v. 14, p. 987-988, 
VOA. 

235. ■ ■ The Lumiere - Lippmann color 

photography. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Jan., 1894, v. 137, p. 16- 
21.) VA 

236. The Lumiere-Valenta-Lippmann 

colour photographs. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 5, 1894, v. 41, 
p. 5-7.) MFA 

Paper read before the Photographic Society of 
Great Britain. 

237. Zusammengesetzte Heliochromie. 

illus. (Jahrbuch fur, Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fur 1894, Halle a. S., 
1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 215-233.) MFA 

Describes kromoscope. 

238. Ives's stereoscopic photo - chromo- 
scope. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 14, 1894, v. 41, p. 790.) MFA 

239. Joly, John. On colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 20, 1894, v. 41, p. 457-459.) MFA 

Paper read before the Photographic Convention of 
the United Kingdom. 
With discussion. 



20 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1894, continued. 

240. Lectures on colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 4, 1894, v. 41, p. 282-283.) MFA 

Account of two lectures by E. J. Wall in London. 
Contains a brief history of color photography. 

241. Lippmann, Gabriel. Sur la theorie de 
la photographie des couleurs simples et 
composees par la methode interferentielle. 
(Academie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, Jan. IS, 1894, tome 118, p. 92-102.) 

*EO 

Also printed in Journal de physique, Paris, 1894, 
serie 3, tome 3, p. 97-107, PAA. 

242. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Die 
neuesten Fortschritte der Chromophotog- 
raphie und die Theorie der Lippmann'schen 
Versuche. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photog- 
raphie und Reproductionstechnik fur 1894, 
Halle a. S., 1894, Jahrg. 8, p. 73-82.) MFA 

Theory of Lippmann process. 

243. Valenta, Eduard. Photography in 
natural colors. (Anthony's photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 63-64.) 

MFA 

Lippmann process. 

244. Vidal, Leon. Applications of the 
stereochromoscope to the arts and sci- 
ences, illus. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1895, New York, 1894, p. 238- 
240.) MFA 

245. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. The his- 
tory of color-sensitive (iso-chromatic or 
ortho-chromatic) photography. (Interna- 
tional annual of Anthony's photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 6, p. 143-145.) 

MFA 

246. Ward, Catherine Weed. Gabriel Lipp- 
mann. port. (Anthony's photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1894, v. 25, p. 296- 
299.) MFA 

247. Warnerke, Leon. Photographs in 
natural colors, by the process of L. Lumi- 
ere. (Smithsonian Institution. Report for 
1893, Washington, 1894, p. 163-164.) * EA 

248. Wilson, Edward L. Wilson's cyclo- 
paedic photography; a complete hand-book 
of the terms, processes, formulas and ap- 
pliances available in photography. . .for 
ready reference. New York: Edward L. 
Wilson, 1894. viii, (1)18-494 p. illus. 8°. 

MFD 

See p. 182—187 for heliochrome processes of Niepce 
de Saint Victor and Becquerel. 



1895 

249. Bayley, R. Child. Emulsion for the 
Lippmann process. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 21, 1895, v. 42, 
p. 388-389.) MFA 



250. Lippmann's process of color pho- 
tography. (Anthony's photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1895, v. 26, p. 231-235.) 

MFA 

251. Lippmann's process of colour 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 31, 1895, v. 42, p. 342- 
343.) MFA 

For editorial comment see June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
353-355. 

252. Berthier, A. Manuel de photochromie 
interferentielle; procedes de reproduction 
directe des couleurs. Paris: Gauthier- 
Villars et fils, 1895. 2 p.L, 169 p. 12°. 
(Bibliotheque photographique.) MFV 

253. Dillaye, Frederic. Chassis a. mercure 
pour la chromophotographie. illus. (In 
his: Les nouveautes photographiques 1895. 
Paris, 1895. 8°. p. 90-95.) MFA 

Lippmann process. 

254. Du Bois-Reymond, CI. Eine Demon- 
stration der neuen farbigen Photographien 
von Dr. Joly in Dublin. (Physikalische 
Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, 
Berlin, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 73-76.) PAA 

255. The First direct portrait in colors. 
(Anthony's photographic bulletin, New 
York, 1895, v. 26, p. 359.) MFA 

Claim of E. Bierstadt for picture taken in 1890. 

256. Gelatine emulsion for the Lippmann 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 7, 1895, v. 42, p. 
353-355.) MFA 

257. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 15, 1895, v. 42, p. 103- 
105.) MFA 

Lecture before the Society of Amateur Photog- 
raphers of New York. "The editor of a well-known 
photographic magazine has quite recently asserted 
that the natural colours have not yet been reproduced 
as seen upon the ground glass of the camera; but, 
if that editor is here tonight, he will have an oppor- 
tunity to see in the photo-chromoscope a more perfect 
reproduction of coloured objects than he ever saw on 
the ground glass of the camera, because it is free 
from granulation, and, being in stereoscopic relief, 
looks like the very object itself." 

258. Colour photography. (British 

journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
1895, v. 42, p. 599-600.) MFA 

Abstract of a paper read before the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science. 

259. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
La photographie des couleurs, ses methodes 
et ses resultats. (Revue generale des sci- 
ences, Paris, 1895, tome 6, p. 1034-1038.) 

OA 

260. Sur la photographie en couleurs, 

par la methode indirecte. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1895, 
tome 120, p. 875-876.) * EO 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



21 



1895, continued. 

261. McFarland, John Horace. Practical 
color-process work. illus. (American 
annual of photography for 1896, New 
York, 1895, p. 209-211.) MFA 

Has colored plate by Coloritype process. 

262. Neuhauss, Richard. Ueber die Pho- 
tographic in naturlichen Farben. (Physi- 
kalische Gesellschaft zu Berlin. Verhand- 
lungen, Berlin, Feb. 8, 1895, Jahrg. 14, p. 
17-24.) PAA 

Discusses Zenker's theory as applied to Lippmann 
process. 

Also printed in Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik, 1895, Halle a. S., 1895, Jahrg. 
9, p. 186-192, MFA. 

263. Photographs in natural colors — Mc- 
Donotype process. (Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, March 1, 1895, 
v. 26, p. 73-75.) MFA 

264. Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud. The 
heliogabotype. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 25, 1895, v. 42, p. 
680-681.) MFA 

Facetious account of proceedings of the Turkey- 
town Hypo Club. From the American journal of pho- 
tography. 

265. Wall, Edward John. A note on col- 
our-sensitive plates and screens. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 14, 



1895, v. 42, p. 375-376.) MFA 

266. Photography in colours, illus. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
1895, v. 42, p. 474-476, 484.) MFA 



Describes the Joly process, the Niewenglowski 
heliochromoscope, Nachet's stereochromoscope, Zink's 
photo-polychromoscope, and the poly-photochromo 
stereoscopic camera. 

267. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Farbenpho- 
tographie durch Korperfarben und me- 
chanische Farbenanpassung in der Natur. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1895, N. F. Bd. 55, p. 225-281.) PAA 

Discusses Seebeck, Becquerel, Poitevin, and Carey- 
Lea processes. 

Also printed in Jahrbuch filr Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1896, Halle a. S., 1896, 
Jahrg. 10, p. SS-107, MFA. 



1896 

268. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Becquerel's colour photographs. (Nature. 
London, June 11, 1896, v. 54, p. 125.) OA 

Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 

269. Bothamley, C. H. Becquerel's and 
Lippmann's colour photographs. (Nature, 
London, May 28, 1896, v. 54, p. 77.) OA 

Comments on article by Meldola, which see. 

270. Direct trichromatic half-tone nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 9, 1896, v. 43, p. 642-643.) 

MFA 



271. Eder, Josef Maria. Coloured screens 
for orthochromatic and three-colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 16, 1896, v. 43, p. 660.) MFA 

272. Gibson, J. Stewart. Photography of 
color. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1896, v. 27, p. 184-191.) MFA 

General principles. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1896, v. 43, p. 345-346, 362-363, MFA. 

273. Glan, Paul. Zur Photographie in 
naturahnlichen Farben. (Annalen der 
Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1896, N. F. 
Bd. 58, p. 402-404.) PAA 

Use of the spectrotelescope. 

274. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The perfected 
photo-chromoscope. illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 17, 1896, 
v. 43, p. 38-41.) MFA 

Abstract of lecture delivered before the Camera 
Club. 

275. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 
raphy in natural colours, illus. (Royal 
Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
Dublin, 1896, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 

*EC 

276. Joly's translucent coloured screens. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 1, 1896, v. 43, supplement, p. 39-40.) 

MFA 

277. Kelvin (1st baron), William Thom- 
son. On Lippmann's colour photography 
with obliquely incident light. (Nature, 
London, May 7, 1896, v. 54, p. 12-13.) OA 

278. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
raphy. (Royal Institution of Great Brit- 
ain. Proceedings, London, April 17, 1896, 
v. 15, p. 151-156.) *EC 

Abstracted in British journal of photography , 
April 24, 1896, v. 43, p. 265, MFA. 

Also printed in Nature, London, April 30, 1896, 
v. 53, p. 617-618, OA. 

279. On colour photography by the 

interferential method. (Royal Society of 
London. Proceedings, 1896, v. 60, p. 10- 
13.) *EC 

280. McDonough's improvements in pho- 
tographic coloured screens. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 28, 1896, 
v. 43, p. 551-552.) ' MFA 

Quotes his patent claims. 

281. McDonough's improvements in and 
relating to colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 14, 
1896, v. 43, p. 523.) MFA 

Quotes his patent claims. 

282. Meldola, R. Becquerel and Lipp- 
mann's colour photographs. (Nature, Lon- 
don, May 4, 1896, v. 54, p. 28.) OA 

Believes that effects shown in these processes are 
due to the same cause. For comments see p. 77, 125. 



22 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1896, continued. 

283. Neuhauss, Richard. Die Photogra- 
phic in natiirlichen Farben. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographic und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1896, Halle a. S., 1896, Jahrg. 10, p. 20- 
23.) MFA 

Lippmann process. 

284. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. A new 
stereochromoscope. illus. (International 
annual of Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1896, v. 8, p. 221-222.) MFA 

285. Photographs in colours: Lumiere's 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. 183.) 

MFA 

286. Photographs in natural colours: Selle's 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 20, 1896, v. 43, p. 182-183.) 

MFA 

287. Photography in colours at Newquay. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 18, 1896, v. 43, p. 602-603.) MFA 

Comments on Mr. J. W. Bennetto. 

288. "Photography in natural colours" (?) 
— a challenge. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1896, v. 43, p. 505.) 

MFA 

A challenge to Bennetto "to make good." 

289. Richard, Georges Adolphe. Photog- 
raphic en couleurs; substitution de cou- 
leurs organiques a l'argent reduit des 
epreuves photographiques. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1896, 
tome 122, p. 609-611, 687.) * EO 

290. Sachse, Julius Friedrich. The Joly 
process of color photography. (American 
Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Phila- 
delphia, 1896, v. 35, p. 119-122.) * EA 

Also printed in British journal of photoaraphy, 
London, Aug. 28, 1896, v. 43, p. 553-554, MFA. 

291. Schuett, F. Innerer Bau und optisches 
Verhalten der Lippmann'schen Photo- 
graphien in natiirlichen Farben. illus. 
(Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Leip- 
zig, 1896, N. F. Bd. 57, p. 533-554.) PAA 

292. Wall, Edward John. Chromatic pho- 
tography, illus. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. Journal, London, June 30, 1896, 
v. 15, p. 400-404.) VOA 

Carey Lea, Lippmann, and three-color processes. 



1897 

293. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Photography in colours. (Nature, Lon- 
don, Feb. 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 318-319.) OA 

Discusses Chassagne process. Partly reprinted in 
British journal of photography, London, Feb. 12, 
1897, v. 44, p. 102-103, MFA. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
12, 1897, v. 41, p. 103, MFA. 



294. ■ The scientific requirements of 

colour photography. (Nature, London, 
June 24, 1897, v. 56, p. 186.) OA 

Abstract of lecture before the Oxford University 
Junior Scientific Club. 

295. The sensitiveness of the return 

to light and colour, illus. (Royal Society 
of London, Philosophical transactions, 
London, 1897, series A, v. 190, p. 155-195.) 

*EC 

296. Bonacini, Carlo. La fotografia dei 
colori... Milano: U. Hoepli, 1897. xxxii, 
422 p., 11 pi. 4°. MFV 

297. Chassagne's colour process described. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 9, 1897, v. 44, p. 226-227.) MFA 

298. Colour photography: Baumgartner's 
improvements. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 1, 1897, v. 44, p. 11- 
12.) MFA 

299. Colour photography: Brasseur and 
Sampolo's process, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, April 2, 1897, v. 
44, p. 217-219.) MFA 

Description of their patent which involves a sensi- 
tive film, sensitised as far as may be for the visible 
rays of the spectrum, exposed under and in close con- 
tact with a taking screen, having minute, closely ad- 
jacent or adjoining areas of transparent colours of 
the required or desired light-selecting absorption 
powers. 

300. "Colour without colour." (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 10, 
1897, v. 44, p. 793-794.) MFA 

Describes Charles Henry's experiments with thin 
membranes and the effects of surface tension of 
liquids. 

301. A Criticism of M. Chassagne's colour 
photographs. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 5, 1897, v. 44, p. 146— 
147.) MFA 

302. Gamble, William. M. Chassagne's 
colour process. A possible explanation. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 19, 1897, v. 44, p. 118-119.) MFA 

303. Graby, A. Positifs instantanes en 
deux teintes. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, 1897, serie 2, 
tome 13, p. 229-231.) MFA 

304. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Le photo- 
chromoscope. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, 1897, serie 2, 
tome 13, p. 451-456.) MFA 

305. Photochromoscope and stereo- 
scopic folding chromogram. illus. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, Sept., 1897, 
new series, v. 22, p. 35.) MFA 

Brief description, with illustrations. 

306. Ives's method of illuminating photo- 
chromoscope pictures. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1897, v. 44, p. 665-667.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



23 



1897, continued. 

307. The Joly process of natural colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 5, 1897, v. 44, supple- 
ment, p. 84.) MFA 

Instructions issued by the Natural Colour Photog- 
raphy [Co.] of Dublin. 

308. Lambert, F. C. Photography in nat- 
ural colors — a comparative sketch. (An- 
thony's photographic bulletin, New York, 
1897, v. 28, p. 108-110.) MFA 

Historical. 

309. A New process of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 15, 1897, v. 44, p. 661.) MFA 

Dittmar process. 

310. Photographic reproduction of colours. 
(Nature, London, March 4, 1897, v. 55, p. 
422.) OA 

Account of exhibition of Bennetto. 

311. Pretzl, A. D. Three colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1897, v. 44, p. 293-294, 310-312.) 

MFA 

An excellent outline of Hubl's Die Dreifarbenpho- 
tographie. 

312. Saint-Florent, E. de. Photographie 
des couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
25, 1897, annee 7, p. 101.) MFA 

Celloidine paper and gum solution for direct ex- 
posure to sun. Not suitable for camera. 

313. Smith, Stephen. The application of 
the theory of colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 10, 1897, v. 44, 
p. 791-793.) MFA 

From the Transactions of the Edinburgh Photo- 
graphic Society. 

314. Vidal, Leon. Le chromoscope C. Na- 
chet, instrument propre a la synthese des 
couleurs obtenues analytiquement par la 
photographie. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, serie 2, 
tome 13, p. 225-229.) MFA 

315. Du role des ecrans colores dans 

le chromographe et le chromoscope. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1897, serie 2, tome 13, p. 121-126.) 

MFA 

316. Le photochromoscope. (Societe 

frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1897, serie 2, tome 13, p. 546-547.) MFA 

317. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Beobach- 
tungen an farbigen Interferenzphotogra- 
phien. (Physikalische Gesellschaft zu Ber- 
lin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 1897, Jahrg. 
16, p. 176-178.) PAA (Deutsche) 

318. Wallon, Etienne. La decouverte de la 
"methode indirecte" (reproduction des 
couleurs). (Societe frangaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1897, serie 2, tome 
13, p. 547-550.) MFA 



319. What is photography in natural col- 
ours? (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 12, 1897, v. 44, p. 98-99.) 

MFA 

320. Wood, Sir Henry Trueman. Colour 
photography. (Nature, London, July 8, 
1897, v. 56, p. 223.) OA 

Dansac-Chassagne process. 

321. Photography in colours. (So- 
ciety of Arts. Journal, London, Jan. 29, 
1897, v. 45, p. 158-159.) VA 

Dansac-Chassagne process. 

Also printed in Nature, London, Feb. 4, 1897, v. 
55, p. 318, OA, and Photographic news, London, Feb. 
5, 1897, v. 41, p. 89, MFA. 

322. ■ The production of colour by 

photographic methods. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, Feb. 26, 1897, v. 45, p. 
278-287.) VA 

With discussion. 

Well written history of various experiments. 



1898 

323. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Colour photography at the Camera Club. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 8, 1898, v. 45, p. 218.) MFA 

An abstract of his lecture on the Joly process. 

324. The theory of colour vision ap- 
plied to modern colour photography, illus. 
(Royal Institution of Great Britain. Pro- 
ceedings, London, 1898, v. 15, p. 802-809.) 

*EC 

325. Three-colour photographic print- 
ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
April 29, 1898, v. 46, p. 548-553.) VA 

With discussion. 

Ives process. Reprinted in British journal of pho- 
tography, supplement, May 6, 1898, p. 35-37, MFA. 

326. The Bennetto process of colour pho- 
tography, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1898, v. 45, p. 776, 783, 
799, 814.) MFA 

327. Colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 1898, 
v. 45, p. 635.) MFA 

Describes pictures by the Bennetto process but tells 
nothing of process. 

328. Colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 
45, p. 808-809.) MFA 

Experiments by E. J. Wall and T. E. Freshwater; 
also a discussion of Clerk Maxwell color theory. 

329. Gamble, William. Colour processes. 
(Photographic journal, London, Feb. 28, 
1898, new series, v. 22, p. 167-170.) MFA 

Special dark-slide for Lippmann process. Joly 
process. 

330. Gibson, J. Stewart. Color photogra- 
phy — the Joly process, illus. (American 
annual of photography for 1899, New 
York, 1898, p. 84-89.) MFA 



24 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



189S, continued. 

331. Graby, A. Direct instantaneous posi- 
tives in two colours. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 53-54.) MFA 

Abstract of a paper in Helios. "He endeavored 
to substitute the mercuric mirror in the Lippmann 
process by emulsifying silver in the film, thus pro- 
viding each grain of bromide of silver with its own 
mirror." 

332. Gravier, Charles. Les impressions en 
couleurs et les methodes photographiques 
dites orthochromatiques. (Photo-gazette, 
Paris, 1898, annee 9, p. 26-30, 54-58, 84-88, 
207-211, 229-232.) MFA 

Processes of Cros and Ducos du Hauron. 

333. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
theory of three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1898, v. 
45, p. 133-135, 167-168.) MFA 

334. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour pho- 
tography, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, sup- 
plement, p. 4-7.) ' MFA 

Fundamental principles discussed in a paper read 
before the Croyden Camera Club. 

335. The photochromoscope. illus. 

(Royal Scottish Society of Arts. Transac- 
tions, Edinburgh, 1898, v. 14, p. 136-151.) 

VA 

336. Joly, John. On a method of photog- 
raphy in natural colours, illus. (Royal 
Dublin Society. Scientific transactions, 
Dublin, 1898, series 2, v. 6, p. 127-138.) 

*EC 

Has interesting colored facsimiles. Abstracted in 
Nature, v. 53, p. 91-93, OA, and in British journal 
of photography, v. 42, p. 774-776, MFA. 

337. Joly's changing back for colour screen 
photography, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 19, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 539.) MFA 

338. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
Colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 16, 1898, v. 45, 
p. 815.) MFA 

Very brief references to the work of Clerk Max- 
well, Dr. Joly, Lord Rayleigh, Zenker, Wiener, Cornu, 
and Mascart. 

339. Lippmann, Gabriel. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 
2-4.) MFA 

Abstract o? paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 

340. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumi£re. 

Photographies en couleurs par la methode 
indirecte. (Societe francaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1898, serie 2, tome 
14, p. 316-317.) MFA 

Abstract in Photographic journal, London, Feb. 28, 
1899, new series, v. 23, p. 173-174, MFA, and 
British journal of photography, London, July 29, 1898, 
v. 45, p. 486-487, MFA. 



341. Mareschal, G. La photographie des 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 
1898, annee 8, p. 61-62.) MFA 

Geisler process. 

342. Meyer's camera for producing nega- 
tives for use in three - colour printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 13, 1898, v. 45, p. 310.) MFA 

343. Monpillard, Felix. Impression tri- 
chrome: paysage obtenu d'apres nature par 
triple selection. (Societe franchise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, serie 
2, tome 14, p. 534-535.) MFA 

344. Note sur les epreuves imprimees 

en trois couleurs dans les ateliers de M. 
Prieur, a Puteaux. (Societe franchise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1898, serie 
2, tome 14, p. 409-412.) MFA 

345. Neuhauss, Richard. Nachweis der 
diinnen Zenker'schen Blattchen in den 
nach Lippmann's Verfahren aufgenom- 
menen Farbenbildern. (Annalen der Phy- 
sik und Chemie, Leipzig, 1898, N. F. Bd. 
65, p. 164-172.) PAA 

346. Neuen Untersuchungen iiber das 

Lippmann'sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik fur 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, 
Jahrg. 12, p. 179-184.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1898, v. 45, supplement, p. 50-51; 1899, 
v. 45, supplement, p. 57-58; 1900, v. 47, Journal, p. 
26-27, 167, MFA. 

347. Ueber die Photographie in natiir- 

lichen Farben nach Lippmann's Verfahren 
und den Nachweis der diinnen Zenker'- 
schen Blattchen. (Physikalische Gesell- 
schaft zu Berlin. Verhandlungen, Berlin, 
1898, Jahrg. 17, p. 94-95.) PAA 

348. A New colour process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 21, 1898, 
v. 45, p. 678.) MFA 

Brief description of the Dittmar process, which, it 
is stated, "is hardly likely to be of much use, but is 
of theoretical interest as a confirmation of Wiener's 
theory of 'Korperfarben.' " 

349. Noack. A three-colour printing proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 23, 1898, v. 45, p. 822.) MFA 

350. La Photographie des couleurs et la 
photochromie des metaux. (La Revue 
technique, Paris, Oct. 10, 1898, v. 19, p. 
451.) VA 

Abstract in Photographic news, London, Dec. 23, 
1898, v. 42, p. 838, MFA. 

351. Photography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 24, 
1898, v. 45, p. 406.) MFA 

Brief reference to the claims of Herr Reichel. 

352. Photography in natural colours. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 9, 1898, v. 45, p. 787.) MFA 

Brief reference to the Grenier-Villerd process. 
"The colours appeared to be absolutely fixed, and, 
if M. Grenier-Villerd is to be believed, the cost of the 
same is considerably less than that of ordinary wall 
paper." 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



25 



1898, continued. 

353. Swan, J. W. Professor Joly's process 
of colour-photography. (English mechanic 
and world of science, London, March 25, 
1898, v. 67, p. 119.) VA 

Reprinted in British journal of photography, April 
1, 1898, supplement, p. 29-30, UFA. 

354. Tallent, Alexander A. K. On rapid 
dry plates for process work. Combined 
screen and colour negatives for three col- 
our printing. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Dec. 23, 1898, new series, v. 23, p. 81- 
84.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Nov. 25, 1898, v. 45, p. 764, MFA. 

355. Valenta, Eduard. Untersuchungen 
iiber das Sensibilisirungsvermogen ver- 
schiedener Theerfarbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1898, Halle a. S., 1898, Jahrg. 12, p. 255- 
265.) MFA 

356. Vidal, Leon. Moyen de preparer les 
ecrans colores pour les reproductions tri- 
chromes et de regler leur saturation. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1898, serie 2, tome 14, p. 85-89.) 

MFA 

357. Vieuille, G. The chromographoscope. 
illus. (American annual of photography 
for 1899, New York, 1898, p. 156-157.) MFA 

358. Vogel, Hermann Wilhelm. Colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 28, 1898, v. 45, p. 53.) 

MFA 

Describes different color effects produced by the 
Lippmann process. 

359. A review of triple printing 

methods. (Photographic journal, London, 
April 28, 1898, new series, v. 22, p. 297-298.) 

MFA 

360. Wallon, Etienne. Le chromographo- 
scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1898, serie 2, tome 14, p. 80- 
83.) MFA 

361. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Color pho- 
tography by means of body colors, and 
mechanical color adaptation in nature. 
(Smithsonian Institution. Annual report 
for 1896, Washington, 1898, p. 167-205.) 

* EA 



1899 

362. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The colour sensations in terms of luminos- 
ity. (Photographic journal, London, June 
30, 1899, new series, v. 23, p. 291-292.) 

MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Royal Society. 



363. Colours for tri-chromatic photo- 
graphic printing. illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, 1899, new series, v. 23, 
p. 192-198, 288.) MFA 

364. Becquerel, Edmond. The researches of 
Edmond Becquerel on direct heliochromy. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1899, v. 46, p. 292-294, 309-311.) MFA 

Except for a short introduction this article is a 
translation of Becquerel's paper before the Societe 
franchise de photographie in 1857. 

365. Blanc, A. Procedes pour l'etude de 
la photochromie interferentielle. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1899, serie 2, tome 15, p. 469-471.) MFA 

366. Boothroyd, Jabez. A few thoughts 
on photographing in natural colors. (In- 
ternational annual of Anthony's photo- 
graphic bulletin, New York, 1899, v. 11, 
p. 72-76.) MFA 

Difficulties to be overcome. 

367. Brothers, Alfred. Photography: its 
history, processes, apparatus, and materi- 
als. Comprising working details of all 
the more important methods. London: 
Charles Griffin & Co., 1899. xviii, 367 p. 
2. ed. rev. illus. 8°. MFE 

Brief history, p. 142-151. Kromoskop, p. 300- 
306. 

368. C, R. H. W. Vogel. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1899, serie 2, tome 15, p. 165.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

369. Clerc, Louis Philippe. La photogra- 
phie des couleurs, avec une preface de 
Gabriel Lippmann. Paris: Gauthier-Vil- 
lars t 1899j. 190 p. 12°. (Encyclopedic 
scientifique des aide-memoire.) MFV 

370. Fuerst Brothers. The Lippmann proc- 
ess. (Professional photographer, Buffalo, 
April, 1899, v. 4, p. 171-172.) MFA 

Directions for working. 

371. Grebe, C. On increasing the sensitive- 
ness of substances by colouring. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March 30, 1899, 
new series, v. 23, p. 205-207.) MFA 

372. Hermann Wilhelm Vogel. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Jan. 31, 1899, new 
series, v. 23, p. 113-114.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

373. The Ives Kromskop and color pho- 
tography. (Professional photographer, 
Buffalo, Oct., 1899, v. 4, p. 413-416.) MGA 

374. Jones, Chapman. The Royal Photo- 
graphic Society's exhibition. (Nature, 
London, Sept. 28, 1899, v. 60, p. 539.) OA 

Brief reference to medal awarded to E. Sanger 
Shepherd for his trichromatic light filters. 

375. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
The application of the diffraction grating 
to photochromy. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 
232.) MFA 



26 



" THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1899, continued. 

376. The fundamental principles of 

photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 28, 1899, v. 46, p. 262- 
263.) MFA 

Discusses the use of the terms "direct" and "in- 
direct" as applied to color processes. 

377. Kromskop color photography. (Pho- 
tographic times, New York, 1899, v. 31, p. 
164-167.) fMFA 

378. Lambert, F. C. English notes — 
recent advances in three-color photogra- 
phy, illus. (Anthony's photographic bul- 
letin, New York, 1899, v. 30, p. 371-372.) 

MFA 

Abstract of lecture by E. Sanger Shepherd, describ- 
ing his process. 

379. Lippmann, Gabriel. Photographie 
directe des couleurs. (Societe franchise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, 
serie 2, tome 15, p. 116-118.) MFA 

Translation in Photographic news, London, March 
30, 1899, v. 22, p. 207, MFA. 

380. The Melano chromoscope. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1899, v. 46, p. 822.) MFA 

381. Monpillard, Felix. Sur la photogra- 
phie indirecte des couleurs appliquee a la 
microphotographie. (Societe franchise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 
2, tome 15, p. 467-468.) MFA 

382. Namias, Rodolfo. Obtention d'images 
colorees monochromes et polychromes par 
voie chimique. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 2, 
tome 15, p. 565-573.) MFA 

383. Neuhauss, Richard. Neue Untersu- 
chungen iiber das Lippmann'sche Farben- 
verfahren. (Jahrbuch fitr Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1899, Halle 
a. S., 1899, Jahrg. 13, p. 70-74.) MFA 

384. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Prog- 
ress in color photography. (Smithsonian 
Institution. Annual report for 1898, Wash- 
ington, 1899, p. 209-215.) * EA 

385. Photography in natural colours. 
(Photographic news, London, March 10, 
1899, v. 43, p. 154-155.) MFA 

Formulas for Lippmann process. 

386. Photography in natural colours — Mr. 
Friese-Greene's system. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 17, 
1899, v. 46, p. 729-730.) MFA 

Copy of specifications. 

387. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1899, v. 46, supplement, 
p. 85-86.) MFA 

Describes operation of the Cadett plates. 



388. The photography of colour. 

(Photographic journal, London, Aug. 31, 
1899, new series, v. 23, p. 316-326.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Deals principally with the Cadett plates. 

389. Practical three-colour lantern- 
slide making. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Dec. 23, 1899, new series, v. 24, p. 95- 
101.) MFA 

With discussion. 

390. Vidal, Leon. Application des reseaux 
de diffraction a la reproduction photo- 
graphique des couleurs, par M. le profes- 
seur Wood, illus. (Societe franchise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 
2, tome 15, p. 267-272.) MFA 

391. ■ Chromoscope Nachet a vision 

simple. (Societe frangaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 2, tome 
15, p. 103-106.) MFA 

392. Photographie trichrome. Re- 
marques relatives a la production du vert. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1899, serie 2, tome 15, p. 538- 
541.) MFA 

393. Photographie trichrome, procede 

pelliculaire. (Societe frangaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 2, tome 
15, p. 486-489.) MFA 

394. Procede pelliculaire d'impres- 

sions trichromes pour projections et ste- 
reoscope. (Societe francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 2, tome 
15, p. 306-311.) MFA 

395. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Ursache und 
Beseitigung eines Fehlers bei der Lipp- 
mann'schen Farbenphotographie, zugleich 
ein Beitrag zu ihrer Theorie. illus. (An- 
nalen der Physik und Chemie, Leipzig, 
1899, N. F. Bd. 69, p. 488-530.) PAA 

396. Wood, Robert Williams. An applica- 
tion of the diffraction grating to colour 
photography. (London, Edinburgh & 
Dublin philosophical magazine & journal 
of science, London, April, 1899, series 5, 
v. 47, p. 368-372.) OA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 14, 1899, v. 46, p. 229-230, MFA. 



1900 

397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the estimation of the luminosity of 
coloured surfaces used for colour discs, 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
July 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 319-321.) 

MFA 

Paper read before the Royal Society. 

398. ■ Screens for three-colour work. 

illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan. 27, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 121-131.) 

With discussion. MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



27 



1900, continued. 

399. Barbieri, D. The history of photog- 
raphy in natural colours. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 27, 1900, v. 
47, p. 474-475.) MFA 

Also printed in American architect, Boston, 1900, 
v. 69, p. 62-63, MQA. 

400. Bolas, Thomas, and others. A hand- 
book of photography in colours. Section 
r. By Thomas Bolas... Section II. By 
Alexander A. K. Tallent... Section in. 
By Edgar Senior... London: Marion & 
Co., 1900. 3 p.l., viii, 343 p., 3 pi. 12°. 

MFV 

401. Capt. Lascelles Davidson's improve- 
ments in cinematographs for taking and 
projecting photographs in colours, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 7, 1900, v. 47, supplement, p. 94-95.) 

MFA 

402. Colour fallacies. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1899, v. 46, p. 114- 
115, 190, 226-227, 290-291, 322-323; 1900, v. 
47, p. 143, 159, 175.) MFA 

Editorial discussion of papers by Messrs. Hitch- 
cock and Zerban, as well as the claims of J. W. Ben- 
netto. 

"An ordinary film of sensitive silver haloid in 
gelatine, exposed and developed in the usual manner, 
is just as likely, either itself to register the colours 
of the original or to transmit them to a prepared 
printing surface, as the moon is to yield a supply of 
green cheese to Sir Thomas Lipton for his many 
shops, or the obese inhabitants of the farmyard pig- 
stye are to take unto themselves wings and fly." 

403. Colour photography: Krayn's system 
of viewing the pictures, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 19, 
1900, v. 47, p. 40.) MFA 

404. Colour screens. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 13, 1900, v. 47, 
p. 229.) MFA 

405. Cundall, J. Tudor. The Joly, Wood, 
and Lippmann processes for producing 
photographs in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 6, 1900, v. 47, 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 

406. A Dark slide for the Lippmann proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, June 1, 1900, v. 47, supplement, p. 47.) 

MFA 

Apparatus sold by Penrose & Co., London. 

407. Fawcett, E. Douglas. Amateurs and 
the Lippmann process. illus. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, 1900, v. 44, p. 248- 
249, 266-267, 279.) MFA 

408. Forrest, Mark. The MacDonough 
process of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1900, v. 47, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 69.) MFA 



409. The MacDonough process at 

Milwaukee convention. (Anthony's pho- 
tographic bulletin, New York, 1900, v. 31, 
p. 292-293.) MFA 

Also printed in Professional Sr amateur photog- 
rapher, Buffalo, Aug., 1900, v. 5, p. 267-269, MFA. 



410. Graby, A. Development of colour 
photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, June 15, 1900, v. 44, p. 378.) MFA 

411- L 412]. Nouvelle methode de pho- 

tographic des couleurs. (Societe franchise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1900, 
serie 2, tome 16, p. 274-276.) MFA 

Translated in Camera craft, San Francisco, Oct., 
1900, v. 1, p. 358, MFA. 

413. Hinchley, J. W. Colour photography: 
the Joly process. (Society of Chemical 
Industry. Journal, London, Jan. 31, 1900, 
v. 19, p. 5-6.) VOA 

With discussion. 

Devotes some space to the theory of color as laid 
down by Clerk Maxwell. Part of this paper is re- 
printed in British journal of photography, Feb. 23, 
1900, p. 119-121, MFA. 

414. Howdill, Charles B. The Joly proc- 
ess for reproducing stained-glass windows. 
(Photographic news, London, May 4, 1900, 
v. 44, p. 285-286.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 4, 1900, v. 47, supplement, p. 36, MFA. 

Author's name misspelled in British journal of 
photography. 

415. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
combination of colours, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 12, 
1900, v. 47, p. 23-25.) MFA 

416. Procede trichrome produisant 

des images transparentes pour projections 
et stereoscopes. (Societe frangaise de 
photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1899, serie 
2, tome 15, p. 511-519, 587-594; 1900, serie 
2, tome 16, p. 31-35.) MFA 

417. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics 
of trichromatic photography. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Nov. 30, 1900, 
new series, v. 25, p. 99-120.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photonraphy, 

1900, v. 47, p. 742-746, 757-759, 773-776, 788-790; 

1901, v. 48, p. 47, 127, 1,41-143, 190-191, 223-224, 
430, 511-512, MFA; Photographic news, London, 
1900, v. 44, p. 764-765, 781-782, 795-797, 809-811, 
830-832, 842-844, MFA. 

418. Ives improvements in photochromo- 
scopic apparatus, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 7, 1900, v. 
47, supplement, p. 71-72.) MFA 

Describes the patent. 

419. Jones, Chapman. The effect of wave- 
length on gradation, illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, 
v. 24, p. 279-286.) MFA 



28 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1900, continued. 

420. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
On the recent progress in direct photo- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1900, v. 47, p. 566, 597-598.) MFA 

"To Zenker is due the principle, to Rayleigh is also 
due independently the principle and also the idea 
(lacking with Zenker) of a transition from principle 
to method; to Lippmann is due the final method." 

421. Photography in natural colours. 

(Nature, London, Aug. 2, 1900, v. 62, p. 
316.) OA 

A review of Zenker's Lehrbuch der Photochromie, 
1900. 

422. Kromskop color photography. Phila- 
delphia: Ives Kromskop Co. r 1900.] 32 p. 
3. ed. 16°. MFF p.v.52, no.5 

423. Kromskop color photography, illus. 
(Professional and amateur photographer, 
Buffalo, May, 1900, v. 5, p. 166-168.) MFA 

424. L. Neue Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 9, 
1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 631-632.) f MFA 

Hesekiel process. 

425. Loescher, Fritz. Photographie in na- 
turlichen Farben unter Anwendung von 
Beugungsgittern. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., 1900, Jahrg. 7, p. 295-296, 
307-308.) f MFA 

Wood's process. 

426. Lueppo-Cramer. Untersuchungen tiber 
das Lippmann'sche Farbenverfahren. (Jahr- 
buch fur Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 

15, p. 23-37.) MFA 

Reprinted from Photographische Korrespondenz, 
1900. 

English translation in Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Oct. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. 82-85, MFA, 
and British journal of photography, London, Sept. 14, 
1900, v. 47, p. 583-584, MFA. 

427. The McDonough-Joly process of pho- 
tography in natural colours. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 44, 
p. 825.) MFA 

428. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
leurs; petit appareil d'amateur par M. L. 
Ducos du Hauron. illus. (La Nature, 
Paris, 1900, annee 28, semestre 1, p. 188- 
189.) OA 

429. The Melano - chromoscope. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 12, 1900, v. 47, p. 25-26.) MFA 

430. Monpillard, Felix. Note sur quelques 
perfectionnements apportes par MM. Prieur 
et Dubois dans l'industrie des impressions 
trichromes. (Societe francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1900, serie 2, tome 

16, p. 320-327.) MFA 



431. Namias, Rodolfo. Color pictures by 
reaction, after exposure, and by substitu- 
tion. (Anthony's photographic bulletin, 
New York, 1900, v. 31, p. 90-93.) MFA 

432. Printing in natural colors. (An- 
thony's photographic bulletin, New York, 
1900, v. 31, p. 126.) MFA 

433. Panchromatic emulsion for colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 23, 1900, v. 47, p. 122.) 

MFA 

Use of glycinroth as a sensitizer for red. 

434. Quentin, H. Notes pratiques sur 
l'orthochromatisme. Emploi des plaques 
orthochromatiques avec et sans ecrans. 
Paris: C. Mendel t 1900?j. 45 p. 12°. 
(Bibliotheque de la Photo-revue, no. 16.) 

MFF p.v.44, no.ll 

435. Recent patents in colour photography, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1900, v. 47, p. 327-329, 539-540, 
556-557, 572; supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 

Specifications: Thorpe, Selle, Garchey, Butler, 
Lascelle, Pollock. 

436-i437j. Shepherd, E. Sanger. The pho- 
tography of colour. Cantor lectures. (So- 
ciety of Arts. Journal, London, 1900, v. 48, 
p. 758-766, 769-776, 781-788, 793-797.) VA 

438. Thorp, Thomas. Grating films and 
their application to colour photography, 
illus. (Manchester Literary and Philo- 
sophical Society. Memoirs, Manchester, 
1900, v. 44, no. 12, p. 1-8.) * EC 

439. Trichromatic photography by Hof- 
mann's process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 22, 1900, v. 47, 
p. 389.) MFA 

440. Trillat, A. Transformation de l'image 
photographique d'un cliche en un etat 
lamellaire et phenomenes de colorations 
qui en derivent. (Academie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, 1900, tome 130, p. 
170-172.) * EO 

By chemical treatment colors may be produced on 
a negative; these, however, bear no true relation to 
the colors photographed. Abstract in Photographic 
journal, London, March 31, 1900, new series, v. 24, 
p. 205-206, MFA. 

Also printed in Societe francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1900, serie 2, tome 16, p. 137-139, 
MFA. 

441. Valenta, Eduard. Some more colour 
sensitisers. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 2, 1900, v. 47, p. 133- 
134.) MFA 

442. Wallon, Etienne. Melanochromo- 
scope de M. Louis Ducos du Hauron. 
illus. (Societe frangaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1900, serie 2, tome 16, p. 58- 
62.) MFA 

Abstract in Journal of photography, London, Feb. 
28, 1900, new series, v. 24, p. 180-182, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



29 



1900, continued. 

443. Ward, Henry Snowden. The Mc- 
Donough-Joly process of colour photog- 
raphy. (Photographic journal, London, 
Dec. 31, 1900, new series, v. 25, p. 141-148.) 

MFA 

Has a list of related patents. 

444. Watkins, Alfred. Hydroquinone and 
colour impressions. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, June 30, 1900, new series, v. 
24, p. 287-290.) MFA 

445. Wood, Robert Williams. The diffrac- 
tion process of color photography, illus. 
(Science, New York, June 23, 1899, new 
series, v. 9, p. 859-862.) OA 

Stated to be a variation of the three-color process. 
Also printed in Nature, London, June 29, 1899, 
v. 60, p. 199-201, OA. 

446. Diffraction process of colour 

photography. illus. (Society of Arts. 
Journal, London, Feb. 16, 1900, v. 48, p. 
285-291.) VA 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, Feb. 
23, 1900, v. 44, p. 120-123, MFA. 

447. Zenker, Wilhelm. Lehrbuch der Pho- 
tochromie (Photographie der natiirlichen 
Farben). Neu hrsg. von B. Schwalbe. 
Braunschweig: F. Vieweg & Sohn, 1900. 
xiii, 157 p. 8°. MFV 



1901 

448. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The photography of colour, illus. (So- 
ciety of Chemical Industry. Journal, Lon- 
don, Nov. 30, 1901, v. 20, p. 1060-1071.) 

VOA 

Underlying scientific principles which must be fol- 
lowed to obtain success. 

449. Barstow, Montagu. Colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1901, v. 48, p. 399, 430-431.) MFA 

Two letters referring to the De Lubicz process, 
but no details. 

450. Brasseur, Charles L. A. The Sampolo- 
Brasseur process of indirect colour-pho- 
tography, illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, May 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
p. 265-269.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 19, 1901, v. 48, p. 252, MFA. 

451. Buss, Otto. Luppo-Cramer's Contra- 
blau vom Standpunkte der Zenker'schen 
Theorie. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photogra- 
phie und Reproductionstechnik fur 1901, 
Halle a. S., 1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 37-44.) 

MFA 

452. Drecker, J. Referat iiber direkte Far- 
benphotographie. (Physikalische Zeit- 
schrift, Leipzig, 1901, Jahrg. 2, p. 44-45.) 

PAA 

Explains theories of interference and absorption. 



453. Dubois, Louis. La photographie des 
couleurs et ses applications industrielles. 
(Societe industrielle du nord de la France. 
Bulletin, Lille, 1901, annee 29, p. 485-502.) 

VA 

454. Farmer, Howard. The optics of tri- 
colour photography. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, June 31, 1901, new series, v. 
25, p. 303-308.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, June 7, 1901, v. 48, p. 365, MFA. 

455. The optics of trichromatic pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Dec. 21, 1900, v. 47, p. 815; 
1901, v. 48, p. 63, 68-69, 154.) MFA 

456. Farmer, Howard, and Guy Symmons. 
Practical tri-colour photography. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, June 21, 
1901, new series, v. 25, p. 294-302.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1901, v. 48, supplement, p. 62—64, Journal, 
p. 503-504, MFA. 

457. Fawcett, E. Douglas. On a suggested 
advance in the practice of the line system 
of three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 22, 
1901, v. 48, p. 118-119.) MFA 

Improvement on the Joly-McDonough processes, 
claiming extreme simplicity of working and perfect 
registration. 

For discussion see 1901, v. 48, p. 140-141, 205. 

458. Godde, G. Photographie directe des 
couleurs par la methode interferentielle de 
M. G. Lippmann — pratique du procede. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1901, serie 2, tome 17, p. 351— 
356.) MFA 

459. Grant, Thomas K. A practical proc- 
ess of colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, Dec. 6, 1901, v. 45, p. 794- 
795.) MFA 

3-plate Lumiere process. 

460. Hale, William H. Natural color pho- 
tography — the Sanger Shepherd process. 
(Photographic times, New York, 1901, v. 
33, p. 104-107.) fMFA 

461. Herschel, Sir William James. Colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 12, 19.01, v. 48, p. 439- 
441.) MFA 

Presidential address to the sixteenth annual meet- 
ing of the Photographic Convention of the United 
Kingdom, Oxford, July 8, 1901. Describes Ives, 
Shepherd, Joly-McDonough, and Lippmann processes, 
with comments on the work of Zenker and Wiener. 

Also printed in Smithsonian Institution. Annual 
report for 1901, Washington, 1902, p. 313-316, *BA. 

462. Hitchcock, Romyn. Tithonic rays 
and early photographs in color. (Inter- 
national annual of Anthony's photographic 
bulletin, New York, 1901, v. 13, p. 107- 
109.) MFA 



30 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1901, continued. 

463. Howdill, Charles B. The photogra- 
phy of stained glass windows by the three- 
colour process. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, 
p. 342-344.) MFA 

464. Husnik, Jaroslav. On colour sensi- 
tizing in theory and practice. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Oct. 31, 1901, new 
series, v. 25, p. 364-365.) MFA 

Abstract from Eder's Jahrbuch, 1901. 

465. Ives, Frederic Eugene. The optics of 
tri - colour photography. (Photographic 
journal, London, July 31, 1901, new series, 
v. 25, p. 339-340.) MFA 

Reply to charges of Howard Farmer. 

466. The optics of trichromatic pho- 
tography, illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug. 31, 1901, new series, v. 25, p. 
350-352.) MFA 

467. Jourdain, Philip Edward Bertrand. 
Notes on the development of interference 
photochromy. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1900, v. 47, p. 612-613, 693- 
694, 711-712; 1901, v. 48, p. 3-4, 21, 100-101, 
116-117, 180, 230-231, 277-278.) MFA 

Excellent outline with footnote references. Dis- 
cusses the work of Neuhauss, Lippmann, Dittmar, 
Delvalez, Kitz, Zenker, Becquerel, Rayleigh, Wiener, 
Eder, Valenta, Thwing, Meslin, Schiitt. 

468. Kenah, Arthur V. The McDonough- 
Joly process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 1, 1901, v. 48, p. 
140-141.) MFA 

469. On a method of producing pho- 
tographs in colour, suitable to the require- 
ments of the amateur, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 18, 
1901, v. 48, p. 36-39.) MFA 

McDonough and Joly processes exploited by The 
Natural Color Photo. Co. of London. 

470. Kuchinka, Eduard. Neuere Apparate 
zur Herstellung von Farbenphotographien 
nach dem Dreifarbenprocesse. illus. (Jahr- 
buch fur Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik fur 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 257-273.) MFA 

Ives and Ducos du Hauron processes. 

471. Lueppo-Cramer. Fine grain and its 
relation to colour sensitiveness. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1901, v. 48, p. 675.) MFA 

472. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Sur la photographie des couleurs. illus. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1901, serie 2, tome 17, p. 204- 
211, 303-310, 441-449.) MFA 

473. Miethe, Adolf. Das Heliochromo- 
scope als Hilfsmittel im Dreifarbendrucke. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fur 1901, Halle a. S., 
1901, Jahrg. 15, p. 461-464.) MFA 



474. Neuhauss, Richard. The Lippmann 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 24, 1901, v. 48, p. 326-327.) 

MFA 

475. Die Sensibilisirung der Gelatine- 

platten fur Lippmann's Farbenverfahren. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 115-126.) MFA 

476. A Notable advance in color photog- 
raphy, illus. (Smithsonian Institution. 
Annual report for 1900, Washington, 1901, 
p. 523-526.) * EA 

Brasseur-Sampolo process. 

477. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber Farben- 
photographie mittels Beugungsgitter. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fitr Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1901, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 177-187.) MFA 

Wood's process. 

478. La Photographie des couleurs. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, 1901, annee 11, p. 165-171, 
189-198, 226-233.) MFA 

Lippmann, Cros, and Ducos du Hauron processes 
in detail. 

479. Shearer, J. S. Screens for the Mc- 
Donough-Joly process. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 7, 1901, v. 
48, p. 367.) MFA 

For a comment by A. V. Kenah see issue for June 
14, 1901, p. 383. 

480. T., H. Herstellung farbiger Positive 
nach Dreifarben - Negativen. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 9, 
1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 29-30.) fMFA 

Lumiere process. 

481. Tallent, Alexander A. K. The optics 
of trichromatic photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 4, 
1901, v. 48, p. 15-16.) MFA 

482. Van Beek, H. Wesentliche Verbesse- 
rung der Kamera, fur gleichzeitige Auf- 
nahme dreier farbiger Teilbilder bestimmt. 
illus. (Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Jan. 27, 1901, Jahrg. 8, p. 58-60.) fMFA 

Szczepanik process. 

483. Wall, Edward John. The optics of 
trichromatic photography, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1901, v. 
48, p. 231-233, 244-245.) MFA 



1902 

484. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1902, v. 
49, p. 111-112.) MFA 

Abstract of paper on lenses read before the Camera 
Club, with discussion. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



31 



1902, continued. 

485. Colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 25, 1902, 
v. 49, p. 581-582.) MFA 

Dr. Miethe's process. 

486. Colour photography. Dr. Neuhauss's 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 31, 1902, v. 49, p. 81-82.) 

MFA 

487. Direct colour photographs. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1902, v. 
49, p. 282, 1001.) MFA 

A brief history of progress made. 

488. Eder, Josef Maria. Spectralana- 
lytische Studien iiber photographischen 
Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Kaiserliche Aka- 
demie der Wissenschaften. Denkschrif- 
ten, Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche 
Classe, Wien, 1902, Bd. 72, p. 633-663.) 

* EF 

Abstracted by E. J. Wall in British journal of 
photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 228-229, 251- 
252, 268-270, MFA. 

489. System der Sensitometrie pho- 

tographischer Platten. illus. (Kaiserliche 
Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungs- 
berichte : Mathematisch-naturwissenschaft- 
liche Classe, Wien, 1899, Bd. 108, Abt. na, 
p. 1407-1498; 1900, Bd. 109, Abt. na, p. 1103- 
1126; 1901, Bd. 110, Abt. na, p. 1103-1124; 
1902, Bd. Ill, Abt. na, p. 888-893.) * EF 

490. Fritsch, Gustav. Trichromatic filters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1001.) MFA 

491. Goethe and colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, July 4, 
1902, v. 49, p. 522-523.) " MFA 

492. Gravier, Charles. Impressions poly- 
chromes par les procedes photographiques. 
(Societe franqaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1902, serie 2, tome 18, p. 132- 
136.) MFA 

493. Hanneke, Paul. Direkte Farbenphotog- 
raphie. (Photographische Kunst, Wochen- 
Beilage, Miinchen, April 23, 1902, Jahrg. 1, 
p. 17-19.) f MFA 

Vallot, Neuhauss, and Worel processes. 

494. Hitchcock, Romyn. Photographs in 
color. (International annual of Anthony's 
photographic bulletin, New York, 1902, v. 
14, p. 183-185.) MFA 

General description of McDonough process. 

495. Johnson, George Lindsay. A century's 
progress in colour photography and the 
knowledge of colour vision. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March 31, 1902, 
v. 42 t new series, v. 26], p. 86-90.) MFA 

Reprinted in Photographic times-bulletin, New 
York, 1902, v. 34, p. S.4>-552, *MFA 



496. The Lippmann process and colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, p. 61.) MFA 

Brief abstract of article by R. Neuhauss in Liese- 
gang's photographischer Almanach, relating to possi- 
bilities of color photography. 

497. The Lumiere process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 17, 1902, v. 49, p. 52-53.) 

MFA 

Gives directions for preparing screens and printing 
papers, with formulas for intensifier and reducer. 

498. Miethe, Adolf. A new colour sensi- 
tizer. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1002.) 

MFA 

Abstract only. 

499. Plates and light-filters for ortho- 
chromatic and tri - color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, 1902, v. 4, 
p. 199-207; v. 5, p. 9-11.) MFA 

500. Mr. Sanger Shepherd's new colour 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1004.) MFA 

501. Monpillard, Felix. Sur la formation 
des noirs, des gris et des demi-teintes dans 
les syntheses trichromes industrielles; pro- 
cedes en relief, illus. (Societe franqaise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1902, se- 
rie 2, tome 18, p. 169-184.) MFA 

502. Neuhauss, Richard. Direkte Farben- 
photographie durch Korperfarben. (Jahr- 
buch fur Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1902, Halle a. S., 1902, Jahrg. 
16, p. 20-21.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 79-81, 93-96, MFA. 

503. Nutting, P. G. The effect of light on 
cyanin. (Nature, London, Aug. 28, 1902, 
v. 66, p. 416.) OA 

Abstract in Photographic journal, London, Aug. 30, 
1902, new series, v. 26, p. 197-198, MFA. 

504. The Physiological basis of three-col- 
our work. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 24, 1902, v. 49, p. 64.) 

MFA 

An appreciation of the work of James Clerk Max- 
well. 

505. Plaskett, J. S. Photography in nat- 
ural colors, illus. (Royal Canadian Insti- 
tute. Transactions, Toronto, 1902, v. 7, p. 
371-390.) * EC 

506. Senior, Edgar. Mise en evidence de 
l'existence des lames minces de Zenker 
dans les chromophotographies du procede 
Lippmann. illus. (Societe franqaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1902, serie 
2, tome 18, p. 441-446.) MFA 

507. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Colour photog- 
raphy at the London Camera Club. (Pho- 
tographic news, London, Dec. 19, 1902, v. 
46, p. 829-830.) MFA 



32 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1902, continued. 

508. St. Photographie in naturlichen Far- 
ben auf Papier (Korperfarben). (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 6, 
1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 347-349.) fMFA 

Word's process. 

509. Thorpe's Methode der Photographie 
in naturlichen Farben. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1902, Halle a. S., 1902, Jahrg. 16, 
p. 229-237.) MFA 

510. Three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 11, 
1902, v. 49, p. 281-282.) MFA 

Describes process of A. Miethe on Schelter and 
Giesecke plates. 

511. Verrill's process for producing photo- 
graphs in colors. (Wilson's photographic 
magazine, New York, April, 1902, v. 39, p. 
124-127.) MFA 

From an article in the Chicago Chronicle. Also in 
British journal of photography, London, May 2, 1902, 
v. 49, p. 349-350, MFA. 

512. Vidal, Leon. Des pigments colores 
theoriques et pratiques pour les impres- 
sions photo - trichromes. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1902, serie 2, tome 18, p. 200-208.) MFA 

513. A trichromatic carbon process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 19, 1902, v. 49, p. 1002-1003.) MFA 

514. Wallace, Robert James. Color pho- 
tography, illus. (Photo-miniature, New 
York, May, 1902, v. 4, p. 57-87.) MFA 

Reviews older methods and gives details of super- 
imposing of stained films. 

515. Wallon, Etienne. Chromoscope a 
vision libre de M. Ducos du Hauron. illus. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1902, serie 2, tome 18, p. 115- 
118.) MFA 

516. Worel, Karl. Photography in natural 
colours (body colours) on paper. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, July 31, 1902, 
new series, v. 26, p. 183.) MFA 

517. Word's experiments in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 18, 1902, v. 49, p. 562.) MFA 



1903 

518. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographic 
journal, London, Aug., 1903, new series, 
v.27, p. 211.) MFA 

519. Another Miethe print. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1903, 
v. 50, p. 102.) MFA 

"This new plate is said to be about eight times as 
sensitive for green and red as the older plate and 
permits of equal exposures with Miethe's filters for 
the red and blue, and about one-half for the green." 



520. Arthur von Hiibl. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 207.) MFA 

521. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Notes on 
the adaptation of light filters to plates for 
three-colour work, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 11, 1903, v. 
50, p. 987-988.) MFA 

522. Bosch, A. Photography in colors, 
illus. (Scientific American, New York, 
Sept. 12, 1903, v. 89, p. 185-186.) VA 

Deals principally with the Miethe process. 
Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 16, 1903, v. 50, p. 828-830, MFA. 

523. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Further ex- 
periments with the Thames plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 
1903, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 92-93.) MFA 

524. Dalziel, Harvey. Three-colour print- 
ing. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
Feb. 20, 1903, v. 51, p. 292-299.) VA 

Interesting comparison of chromo-lithography and 
modern three-colour printing. 

Also printed in British journal of photoaraphy, 
London, March 13, 1903, v. 50, p. 205-208, MFA. 

525. Dr. Miethe's three-color process. 
(Photo -era, Boston, April, 1903, v. 10, 
p. 138-140.) MFA 

526. Donath, Bruno. Der Projektions- 
apparat der Urania fur Dreifarbenphoto- 
graphie. illus. (Zeitschrift fur wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1903, 
Bd. 1, p. 94-97.) PLC 

527. Edouard Valenta. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 215.) MFA 

528. The First photo - colour swindle. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 184-185.) MFA 

Caustic comments on the Hill process which was 
frequently referred to in the Daguerreian journal of 
1850-51. 

529. Florence. Die Farbenphotographie 
nach dem Dreifarbensystem. illus. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1901, 
Jahrg. 8, p. 349-352, 399-401, 519-521, 643- 
645; 1902, Jahrg. 9, p. 105-108, 205-207, 320- 
322, 437-439, 657-659; 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 
118-120, 275-277.) MFA 

530. Frederic Eugene Ives. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 

531. Gabriel Lippmann. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v.27, p. 213.) MFA 

532. Gravier, Charles. Observations sur 
la chromophotographie. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1903, serie 2, tome 19, p. 221-223.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



33 



1903, continued. 

533. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Unter- 
suchungen iiber die Sensibilisierung durch 
Farbstoffe. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1903, Halle 
a. S., 1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 128-131.) MFA 

534. Josef Maria Eder. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 215.) MFA 

535. Kaiserling, Carl. Three-colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, April 10, 1903, v. 50, p. 282.) 

MFA 

536. Kauffmann, Hugo. Uber den Ur- 
sprung der Farbe bei organischen Stoffen. 
(Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1903, Bd. 1, p. 60-71.) PLC 

537. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 213.) MFA 

538. Miethe, Adolf. Light-filters for three- 
colour printing. (Photographic journal, 
London, Aug., 1903, new series, v. 27, p. 
214-218.) MFA 

539. Natural colour portraiture. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 15, 
1903, v. 50, p. 383-384.) MFA 

A plea to professional photographers to experiment. 

540. Neuhauss, Richard. Weitere Unter- 
suchungen iiber Korperfarbenphotographie 
(Ausbleichverfahren). (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
tographie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
1903, Halle a. S., 1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 47-55.) 

MFA 

541. Norman, Albert. Photomicrography 
in black and white and in colours. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, March 31, 1903, 
new series, v. 27, p. 68-73.) MFA 

Experiments with Sanger Shepherd process. 

542. Photography in colours. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 13, 1903, 
v. 50, p. 121.) MFA 

Miethe process. 

543. Power, H. D'Arcy. Color photogra- 
phy. A brief resume of what has been 
done and the future prospects of the proc- 
ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, April, 
1903, v. 6, p. 240-244.) MFA 

544. The Sanger Shepherd process of 

making color photographs. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Feb., 1903, v. 6, p. 169.) 

MFA 

545. Pumphrey, Alfred. Colour photog- 
raphy on paper within the reach of all. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1903, v. 50, p. 176-177, 198-199, 218-219.) 

MFA 

Uses a celluloid gelatine film. Attacks the Sanger 
Shepherd patent. 



546. Sanger Shepherd & Co. Colour pho- 
tography on paper. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 23, 1903, v. 50, 
p. 71.) MFA 

Abstract of booklet issued by the firm. 

547. Shepherd, E. Sanger. Natural colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 6, 1903, v. 50, p. 115.) 

MFA 

Abstract of lecture. 

548. Sir W. de W. Abney. port. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Aug., 1903, new 
series, v. 27, p. 205.) MFA 

549. Stolze, F. Dreifarben - Projektions- 
bilder und Dreifarbendruck. diagrs. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1903, 
Jahrg. 10, p. 442-444, 455-457.) f MFA 

Miethe's process. 

550. Talboys, Arthur E. Practical color 
photography, illus. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, 1903, v. 6, p. 109-115, 141-144, 
192-197.) MFA 

Three-color work for amateurs. 

551. Triplice, pseud. Colour photography 
on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 27, 1903, v. 50, p. 257.) 

MFA 

Claims that the Sanger Shepherd patent process js 
not identical with that patented by Charles Cros in 
1880. 

552. Vidal, Leon. The Sanger-Shepherd 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 9, 1903, v. 50, p. 22- 
23.) MFA 

553. Wall, Edward John. Colour photog- 
raphy on paper, etc. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1903, v. 50, p. 198, 
236.) MFA 

Comments on Mr. Alfred Pumphrey's paper in 
British journal of photography of Feb. 27, 1903. 

554. Trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
9, 1903, v. 50, p. 27-29.) MFA 

A review of Hubl's Die Dreifarbenphotographie. 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1903, v. 6, p. 208-210, MFA. 

555. Worel, Karl. Direkte Photographie 
in naturlichen Farben (Korperfarben) auf 
Papier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1903, Halle a. S., 
1903, Jahrg. 17, p. 68-70.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Oct. 21, 1903, Jahrg. 10, p. 545-546, \MFA. 



1904 

556. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Some points connected with landscape 
three-colour photography, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 
1904, v. 51, p. 63-66.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
March, 1904, new series, v. 28, p. 81-88, MFA. 



34 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1904, continued. 

557. Adolf Miethe. port. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, 
p. 449.) MFA 

558. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The com- 
posite print in three-colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 12, 1904, v. 51, p. 707.) MFA 

559. Some notes on three-colour work. 

illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1904, v. 51, p. 289-290, 342.) MFA 

Author's experiments with dyes. 

560. Some peculiarities of dyes which 

produce total spectrum sensitiveness. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
7, 1904, v. 51, p. 867-868.) MFA 

561. Brown, George Edward. Dr. Miethe's 
methods of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 10, 
1904, v. 51, p. 489-491.) MFA 

562. Bull, A. J. Some spectroscopic ex- 
periments with tricolour filters. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 13, 
1904, v. 51, p. 391-393.) MFA 

563. Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley. The 
functions of tricolour filters, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1904, 
v. 51, p. 47-50, 70-71.) MFA 

564. Chapelain. Sur un nouvel appareil de 
photochromie. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, 1904, serie 2, 
tome 20, p. 520-521.) MFA 

3-negative process. 

565. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Papier au char- 
bon de M. Vaucamps pour le procede tri- 
chrome. (Societe frangaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1904, serie 2, tome 
20, p. 86-88.) MFA 

566. Erste internationale Ausstellung fur 
Farbenphotographie in Paris. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 251-255.) MFA 

Account of exhibits. 

567. Farmer, Howard, and Guy Symmons. 
Irradiation in photography and its appli- 
cation to direct screen colour work, illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Aug., 
1904, new series, v. 28, p. 239-248.) MFA 

568. Fritsch, Gustav. Die Retinaelemente 
und die Dreifarbentheorie. 19 p., 1 pi. 
(Koenigliche Akademie der Wissenschaf- 
ten, Berlin. Abhandlungen, 1904: Anhang, 
Physikalische Abhandlung 2.) * EE 

569. Grun, Ernst. Colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 29, 1904, v. 51, p. 99.) MFA 

Experiment with the Cooper-Hewitt mercury lamp 
and a red screen. "The undoubted fact remained 
that red light was produced direct from blue, or per- 
haps yellow, owing to change of wave length." 



570. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. A col- 
our-sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 30, 
1904, v. 51, p. 846.) MFA 

571. Die Farbenphotographie mit Hiilfe 

des Ausbleichverfahrens. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
103-108.) MFA 

572. Jan Szczepanik. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1904, v. 51, p. 21-22, 
58-59.) MFA 

An attack by Dr. Neuhauss and a defense by 
William Gamble. 

573. Jones, Chapman. Developments of 
three - colour photographic processes. 
(Nature, London, 1904, v. 70, p. 553-555, 
578-580.) OA 

General article. 

574. Klein, Henry Oscar. Eine originelle 
Dreifarbenmethode. (Jahrbuch fiir Pho- 
tographie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
1904, Halle a. S., 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 175- 
177.) MFA 

575. Koenig, Ernst. Uber die Herstellung 
von Pinachrom - Badeplatten. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 116-117.) MFA 

576. Ueber die Lichtempfindlichkeit 

der Leukobasen organischer Farbstoffe 
und ihre Anwendung zur Herstellung pho- 
tographischer Bilder. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 6, 1904, Jahrg. 
11, p. .591-594.) fMFA 

577. Uber ein neues Kopierverfahren 

fiir die Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 521-525.) MFA 

Experiments with paper at laboratory of Meister 
Lucius & Bruning. 

578. ■ Ueber praktische Dreifarben- 

Photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 
Munchen, 1903-04, Jahrg. 2, p. 1-14.) 

fMFA 

579. Weitere Untersuchungen in der 

Reihe der Cyaninfarbstoffe. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, 
Jahrg. 41, p. 108-116.) MFA 

580. Koenig's colour filters. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 29, 1904, 
v. 51, p. 665.) MFA 

581. Kuchinka, Eduard. Fortschritte und 
neue Verfahren auf dem Gebiete der Far- 
benphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1904, Halle a. S.. 1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 201- 
210.) MFA 

Prieur & Dubois, Fraschbourg. Perscheid, Sanger- 
Shepherd, Lascelles-Davidson cameras; also Gurtner 
process. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



35 



1904, continued. 

582. Lenses for trichromatic work. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 
March 18, 1904, v. 51, p. 229.) MFA 

583. Levy, Max. Screens for color work. 
(American annual of photography 1905, 
New York, 1904, p. 235-237.) MFA 

584. The Lippmann process simplified. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 18, 1904, v. 51, p. 990.) MFA 

M. Rothe overcomes the necessity of the mercury 
dark slide. 

585. Loebel, Leopold. Un nouveau pro- 
cede de tirage trichrome par l'emploi des 
leucobases. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Nov. 
25, 1904, annee 15, p. 13-16.) MFA 

586. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
A new method for the production of pho- 
tographs in colours. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, July, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
p. 226-228.) MFA 

Announcement of the Autochrome process. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 8, 1904, v. 51, p. 605, MFA, and 
Camera craft, San Francisco, Oct., 1904, p. 212, 
MFA. 

587. Sur une nouvelle methode d'ob- 

tention de photographies en couleurs. 
(Academie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, 1904, tome 138, p. 1337-1338.) * EO 

Also printed in Societe francaise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris, 1904, serie 2, tome 20, p. 333-334, 
MFA. 

588. Vorlaufige Mitteilung iiber ein 

neues Verfahren der Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 

589. Meister Lucius & Briining. Portrait- 
studie. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, opp. p. 210.) MFA 

Sample of work with Pinachrome plates back of 
filters made by above firm. 

590. Miethe, Adolf. The composition of 
colour-filters for the production of por- 
traits in natural colours. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 27, 1904, v. 
51, p. 432-435.) MFA 

591. Dreifarbenphotographie nach der 

Natur; nach den am photochemischen La- 
boratorium der technischen Hochschule zu 
Berlin angewandten Methoden. Halle a. 
S.: W. Knapp, 1904. 80 p., 1 pi. 8°. (En- 
cyklopadie der Photographic Heft 50.) 

MFV 

592. Dreifarbenphotographien auf Pa- 
pier. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 286-287.) MFA 

Formula for his process. 

593. Mitteilung iiber ein neues Verfah- 
ren der Farbenphotographie von August 
und Louis Lumiere. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Oct. 30, 1904, Jahrg. 
11, p. 576-578.) f MFA 

Autochrome process. 



594. Zu dem Urtel des Herrn Pro- 
fessor Bruno Meyer iiber Naturfarben- 
Photographien. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., Dec. 21, 1904, Jahrg. 11, 
p. 681-683.) f MFA 

595. Monpillard, Felix. Les couleurs chi- 
miquement pures de la maison Lucius et 
Briining. (Societe frangaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1904, serie 2, tome 
20, p. 319-323.) MFA 

596. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichverfah- 
ren. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Re- 
productionstechnik fur 1904, Halle a. S., 
1904, Jahrg. 18, p. 62-65.) MFA 

597. New colour sensitisers. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 15, 1904, 
v. 51, p. 306-307.) MFA 

Directions for using Pinachrom sensitiser. 

598. Newton, A. J., and A. J. Bull. The 
practical testing of tri-colour filters. 
(Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1904, 
new series, v. 28, p. 263-273.) MFA 

Illustrations in color. 

599. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber die Zen- 
kerschen Streifen in nach Lippmanns Ver- 
fahren hergestellten Photographieen sich 
iiberdeckender Spektra und ihre Bedeu- 
tung fur die Leistungsfahigkeit dieses Ver- 
fahrens bei gemischten Farben. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1904, Halle a. S., 1904, 
Jahrg. 18, p. 229-233.) MFA 

600. Power, H. D'Arcy. Worel's direct 
color photography. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Feb., 1904, v. 8, p. 124.) MFA 

601. Precht, J. Dreifarbenprojektionsap- 
parat. (Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd. 2, p. 407- 
410.) PLC 

602. Einrichtung fur Dreifarbenpro- 

jektion. illus. (Zeitschrift fur wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1904, 
Bd. 2, p. 60-63.) PLC 

603. Precht, J., and Erich Stenger. Aus 
der Praxis der Dreifarbenphotographie. 
(Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1904, Bd.2, p. 410-413.) 

PLC 

604. R., H. Photographie directe des 
couleurs sans appareil special. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1904, annee 15, 
p. 3-5.) MFA 

E. Rothe's adaptation of Lippmann process. 

605. Rheinberg, Julius. A suggested plan 
for photography in colours, without the 
use of colour screens, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 1904, 
v. 51, p. 7-8.) MFA 

Substitutes the artificial color screen of the Joly 
process with real spectra. 



36 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1904, continued. 

606. Rothe, E. Photographies en couleurs 
obtenues par la methode interferentielle 
sans miroir de mercure. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, 1904, 
tome 139, p. 565-567.) * EO 

Also printed in Societe francaise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris, 1904, serie 2, tome 20, p. 548-550, 
UFA. 

607. Saint Florent, E. de. Note sur un 
procede de photographie en couleurs au 
moyen du sous-chlorure d'argent. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1904, serie 2, tome 20, p. 351-352.) 

MFA 

608. Satori, Karl. Einige Untersuchungen 
von panchromatischen Platten fiir Drei- 
farbendruck. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 224-226.) 

MFA 

609. Selle, Gustav. Diaphragms for three- 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 29, 1904, v. 51, 
p. 347.) MFA 

Brief reference to his patent. 

610. Senior, Edgar. Colour sensitometers. 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 10, 1904, v. 51, p. 504-506.) 

MFA 

Has portrait of the author. 

611. South, C. W. [The solgram., (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
16, 1904, v. 51, p. 1063.) MFA 

612. Szczepanik, Jan. [Process of colour 
photography.] (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 19, 1904, v. 51, p. 142.) 

MFA 

613. Three-colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 
18, 1904, v. 51, p. 221-222.) MFA 

Pinachrom sensitizer for red rays. Also German- 
English patent for securing accurate registration of 
superimposed images. 

614. Traube, Artur. Lichtechte Farben- 
photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Dec. 14, 1904, Jahrg. 11, p. 668- 
669.) t MFA 

Reichel process. 

615. Valenta, Eduard. Uber das Sensibili- 
sieren von Kollodionemulsion fur die 
Zwecke des Dreifarbendruckes. Athyl- 
violett als Sensibilisator fiir Bromsilber- 
gelatine - Trockenplatten. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1904, Jahrg. 41, p. 
125-128.) MFA 

616. Wall, Edward John. _ Dr. Koenig's 
colour process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 14, 1904, v. 51, p. 
886-887.) MFA 



617. Elementary three-colour work. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
1904, v. 51, p. 666-667, 684-685.) MFA 

618. ■ ■ Light filters for trichromatic 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 11, 1904, v. 51, p. 
208.) MFA 

A translated abstract of article by E. Konig in 
Photographische Mitteilungen. 

619. Some notes on three-colour work. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
1904, v. 51, p. 321, 362.) MFA 

Disputes T. Thome Baker's statements on sensi- 
tisers. 

620. Wall, E. J. port. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 10, 1904, v. 51, 
p. 494.) MFA 

621. Wallon, fitienne. Photographie des 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 
1904, annee 14, p. 205-211.) MFA 

Autochrome process. 

622. Waterhouse, James. Experiences with 
red sensitisers. illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, June, 1904, new series, v. 28, 
p. 165-171.) MFA 

623. Weidert, Fr. The latest in color 
photography. (Photo-era, Boston, Sept., 
1904, v. 13, p. 165-166.) MFA 

Slavik process. 

624. Wood, Robert Williams. Recent im- 
provements in the diffraction process of 
colour-photography, illus. (Nature, Lon- 
don, Oct. 20, 1904, v. 70, p. 614-616.) OA 



1905 

625. Aarland, G. Three-colour photogra- 
phy. (Photographic journal, London, 
May, 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 172-176.) 

MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 14, 1905, v. 52, p. 295, MFA. 

626. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Three-colour work. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, 
p. 975.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 

627. Why not take three-colour pho- 
tographs? (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Aug., 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 280- 
281.) MFA 

Recommends Sanger Shepherd camera to amateurs. 

628. Acland, Sarah A. A visit to Gibraltar. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 9, 1905, v. 52, p. 456.) MFA 

"The bulk of the illustrations were three-colour 
slides by the Sanger Shepherd process, and it is no 
exaggeration to refer to Miss Acland's work as the 
finest which has ever been publicly shown." 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



37 



1905, continued. 

629. The Angle of three-colour screens. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 3, 1905, v. 52, p. 90-91.) MFA 

630. Another process of color photogra- 
phy. (Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
1905, v. 10, p. 167-168.) MFA 

Process of Rudolph Isenmann. 

631. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Spectro- 
scopic photography in colour. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Jan.-Feb., 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 24-28.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Jan. 13, 1905, v. 52, p. 31, MFA. 

632. Barker, Johnson. Colour photogra- 
phy on paper. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 1, 1905, v. 52, p. 
946-947.) MFA 

Abstract. Superimposes yellow and red images on 
a ferro-prussiate base. Detailed description. 

633. Beckers, Fritz. Ueber Dreifarben- 
photographie. (Photographische Kunst, 
Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 108-112.) 

Pinachrome process. f MFA 

634. Bull, A. J. The principles of trichro- 
matic photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 447- 
449, 467.) MFA 

Paper read before the Optical convention. Covers 
color-mixture curves, theories, negative records in- 
tended to follow curves, relation of ordinary colors 
and monochromatic colors as regards their reproduc- 
tion, fundamental requirements of the reproductioft 
colors, and the mutual adjustment of filter records 
and reproduction colors. 

635. Butler, Edwin T. Tricolour photog- 
raphy by means of a single exposure 
camera and a simple method of printing, 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
June, 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 199-204.) 

MFA 

Brief abstract in British journal of photography, 
London, May 12, 1905, v. 52, p. 375, MFA. 
With discussion. 

636. Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc. Sur 
l'accroissement de sensibilite de quelques 
mixtions bichromatees sous l'influence de 
diverses matieres colorantes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1905, serie 2, tome 21, p. 377-379.) MFA 

637. Colorprinte. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, 1905, v. 10, p. 295-296, 379.) MFA 

Invented by Dr. von Slavik, perfected by Dr. 
Adolf Hesekiel. 

638. Colour photography mysteries. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
17, 1905, v. 52, p. 902.) MFA 

Criticism of Solgram process. 

639. Davidson, Lascelles. The latest one- 
plate colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, 
p. 1030.) MFA 

Bleaches a carbon print carrying proper mono- 
chrome color densities. 



640. Dillaye, Frederic. Le procede tri- 
chrome et sa mise a la portee de tous. 
(In his: Les nouveautes photographiques 
1904-1905. Paris, 1905. 8°. p. 282-298.) 

MFA 

Cros and Ducos du Hauron processes. 

641. Direct three-colour negatives on dry 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 12, 1905, v. 52, p. 368.) MFA 

Loewenstamm and Hoffert experiments. 

642. Dr. Miethe's colour photography in 
London, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 268-269, 
302, 311.) MFA 

Brief description and photograph of the projection 
apparatus. The titles of the above articles vary. 

643. Dr. Smith's three-colour plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 

5, 1905, v. 52, p. 355.) MFA 

644. Eder, Josef Maria. Geschichte der 
Photographie. Dritte ganzlich umgearbei- 
tete und vermehrte Auflage. Halle a. S.: 
Wilhelm Knapp, 1905. 2 p.l., (i)vi-xvi, 
484 p. illus. 8°. (Ausfiihrliches Hand- 
buch der Photographie. Bd. 1, Teil 1.) 

MFC 

See chapters 14, 46-47. Numerous references to 
early experiments concerning the effects of light upon 
chemicals. 

645. Orthochromatische Wirkung einer 

gefarbten Unterlage auf Bromsilbergela- 
tine. Sensibilisierende Wirkung von Farb- 
stoffen der Kongorot-Reihe. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1905, 
Jahrg. 42, p. 311-315.) MFA 

646. Farmer, Howard. A criticism of 
three-colour photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1905, v. 52, p. 
849-850, 868-870.) MFA 

Abstract. "An indictment of three-colour photo- 
graphic processes, so far as they are intended for 
commercial use by professional photographers." 

647. Freshwater, T. E. Recent improve- 
ments in the diffraction process of colour 
photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Jan.-Feb., 1905, new series, v. 29, p. 3— 

6. ) MFA 

648. Gamble, William. Cameras and other 
apparatus for three-colour work. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1905, new 
series, v. 29, p. 150-157.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography , Lon- 
don, March 31, 1905, v. 52, p. 256, MFA. 

649. Gilles, E. Magasin pour procede tri- 
chrome, pouvant se placer d'une fagon mo- 
bile sur des chambres ordinaires. (Soci- 
ete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin. 
Paris, 1905, serie 2, tome 21, p. 487-488.) 

MFA 

650. Gruen, Edward F. Three-colour prints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, p. 1030-1031.) MFA 

"The gelatine surface of the ordinary lantern slide, 
bromide opal, or bromide paper is capable of receiving 
three printings in successive colors." 



38 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1905, continued. 

651. Hansen, Fritz. Ein Freilicht-Atelier 
fur Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 13, 1905, Jahrg. 12, 
p. 418-419.) f MFA 

652. Husnik, Jaroslav. Ueber Dreifarben- 
Naturaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch fur Photo- 
graphic und Reproductionstechnik fur 
1905, Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 222- 
225.) MFA 

Von Hiibl's process. 

653. Jones, Chapman. The influence of 
gradation on colour reproduction. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
6, 1905, v. 52, p. 13.) MFA 

From Penrose's process year-book, 1904-05. 

654. Kieser, Karl. Uber die sensibillier- 
renden Eigenschaften einiger Farbstoffe 
einer neuen Farbstoffklasse. (Zeitschrift 
fur wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 6-15.) PLC 

655. Klein, Henry Oscar. Colour photog- 
raphy with pigment films. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 29, 1905, 
v. 52, p. 768-769.) MFA 

Detai!ed instructions. 

656. Koenig, Ernst. Colour photography 
on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 10, 1905, v. 52, p. 182.) 

MFA 

Pinatype process. 

657. Pinachromy, concerning the light 

sensitiveness of the leukobases of organic 
dyestuffs and their application to the pro- 
duction of photographic pictures. (Photo- 
era, Boston, Feb., 1905, v. 14, p. 46-52.) 

MFA 

658. The practice of three - colour 

work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 8, 1905, v. 52, p. 964-965.) 

MFA 

Describes making of filters and the use of pina- 
cyanol. 

659. Kuemmell, G. The bleaching out 
process of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1905, v. 52, p. 1021.) MFA 

660. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Zum 
Problem der Mischfarbenphotographie 
mittels stehender Lichtwellen. illus. 
(Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 165-172.) 

PLC 

Abstract in Photographic journal, London, July, 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 270-271, MFA, and Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 9, 1905, Jahrg. 
12, p. 413-415, 1MFA. 

661. Lippmann, Gabriel. La photographie 
des couleurs sur plaques sensibilisees aux 
sels de chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Nov. 25, 1905, annee 16, p. 8-9.) MFA 

Use of chromium salts in Lippmann process. 



662. Photographies en couleurs du 

spectre negatives par transmission. (Aca- 
demie des sciences. Comptes rendus, 
Paris, June 5, 1905, tome 140, p. 1508-1509.) 

*EO 

Abstract in Photographic journal, London, July, 
1905, new series, v. 29, p. 271, MFA. 

663. Photographs in colours from 

negatives by the Lippmann process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 30, 1905, v. 52, p. 505.) MFA 

Translation of paper read before the Paris Acad- 
emy of Sciences. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1905, p. 133, MFA. 

664. Loebel, Leopold. Plaques panchro- 
matiques. ficrans colores. Negatifs tri- 
chromes. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
1905, annee 15, p. 55-58, 76-79, 96-98.) 

MFA 

Directions for amateurs. 

665. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Mitteilung uber ein neues Verfahren der 
Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Kunst, Miinchen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 337- 
339.) f MFA 

Autochrome process. 

666. Lumiere, A., & ses Fils. Sensitized 
plates for colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1905, v. 52, p. 10.) MFA 

Abstract of their English patent no. 22, 988, 1904, 
for plates prepared with starch grains. 

667. Maldiney. La photographie des cou- 
leurs. £tat present de la question, illus. 
(Societe d'emulation du Doubs. Memoires, 
Besangon, 1905, serie 7, v. 8, p. 177-197.) 

* EN 

668. Mareschal, G. Ou en est la photo- 
graphie des couleurs? (Photo - gazette, 
Paris, Dec. 25, 1905, annee 16, p. 21-23.) 

MFA 

669. Monpillard, Felix. The accurate pro- 
duction of selective colour filters. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 28, 
1905, v. 52, p. 587.) MFA 

670. Etudes et recherches sur les 

ecrans colores. (Societe francaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1905, serie 2, 
tome 21, p. 364-372.) MFA 

671. La Pinatype, de la Farbwerke 

vorm Meister Lucius und Bruning. (So- 
ciete francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1905, serie 2, tome 21, p. 302-308.) 

MFA 

672. Namias, Rodolfo. Quelques observa- 
tions sur la trichromie industrielle. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1905, serie 2, tome 21, p. 44-48.) 

MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



39 



1905, continued. 

673. Neue Verbesserungen im Diffraktions- 
prozess auf dem Gebiete der Farbenpho- 
tographie. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1905, Halle 
a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 213-217.) MFA 

Wood and Joly processes. 

674. Ein Neuer Dreifarben-Projektionsap- 
parat. (Photographische Chronik, Halle 
a. S., Jan. 1, 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 9-11.) 

f MFA 

Miethe-Goerz apparatus. 

Also printed in Photographische Korrespondens, 
Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 21-22, MFA. 

675. Neuhauss, Pichard. Ausbleichverfah- 
ren. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie und Re- 
productionstechnik fiir 1905, Halle a. S., 
1905, Jahrg. 19, p. 51-54.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 2, 1905, v. 52, p. 367, MFA. 

676. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
Zenkerschen Blattchen und die Zen- 
kerschen Streifen in Farbenphotographien 
nach Lippmann. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 493- 
500, 564-568.) MFA 

677. Payne, Arthur. Plates, filters, and 
inks: their relative importance in three- 
colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1905, v. 52, p. 13-14.) 

MFA 

678. The Pinatype process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 22, 1905, v. 52, p. 749- 
751.) MFA 

Directions from the handbook issued by Meister 
Lucius and Bruning. For a discussion see British 
journal of photography, Oct. 13, 1905, v. 52, p. 816. 

679. Powrie, John H. Practical helio- 
chromy for professional and amateur. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, p. 1029-1030.) MFA 

Use of Powrie-Warner plates in adaptation of Joly- 
McDonough process. 

680. Precht, J., and Erich Stenger. Uber 
die chemische Farbenhelligkeit des Tages- 
lichts. (Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Photophysik, und Photo- 
chemie, Leipzig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 27-39.) 

MFA 

Translation in British journal of photography , 
London, March 24, 1905, v. 52, p. 226-227, MFA. 

681. Reising, H. Ein neuer Dreifarben- 
projektionsapparat. illus. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1905, Bd. 3, p. 40-43.) PLC 

Miethe's apparatus. 

682. Rothe, E. Nouvelles recherches sur 
la photographie des couleurs. (Universite 
de Grenoble. Annales, Paris, 1905, v. 17, 
p. 511-523.) * EN 



683. Schinzel, Karl. One-plate colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Aug. 4, 1905, v. 52, p. 608- 
609.) MFA 

684. Schmidt, Hans. Three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 29, 1905, v. 52, p. 1025-1026.) 

MFA 

685. Uber Farbenphotographie mit 

besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Systems 
N. P. G. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1905, Jahrg. 42, p. 518-522, 568- 
572.) MFA 

686. Spoerl, Hans. Reichels Dreifarben- 
verfahren. (Photographische Kunst, Miin- 
chen, 1904-05, Jahrg. 3, p. 393-396.) f MFA 

687. Stenger, Erich. Some notes on three- 
colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 8, 1905, v. 52, p. 710- 
711.) MFA 

688. ■ Trichromatic work on ordinary 

plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 30, 1905, v. 52, p. 514.) MFA 

689. Ueber das Abstimmen der Licht- 

filter fiir Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Dec. 6, 
1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 625-629.) f MFA 

690. Stolze, F. Ueber die Moglichkeit der 
Dreifarbenphotographie durch eine einzige 
Aufnahme. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., 1905, Jahrg. 12, p. 528-531, 541- 
543.) f MFA 

691. Three-colour direct on dry plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 19, 1905, v. 52, p. 391.) MFA 

Homocol sensitizer for bathing plates during warm 
weather. 

692. Three - colour portraiture from the 
commercial standpoint. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 15, 1905, 
v. 52, p. 723-724.) MFA 

693. Townsend, C. F. Color photography 
and the dark-room. (Camera & dark- 
room, New York, Sept, 1905, v. 8, p. 279- 
281.) MFA 

694. Traube, Artur. Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S, 
July 9, 1905, Jahrg.-12, p. 358.) f MFA 

J. H. Smith & Co. process. 

695. Worel, Karl. Forschungen auf dem 
Gebiete der Farbenphotographie. (Jahr- 
buch fiir Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fiir 1905, Halle a. S, 1905, Jahrg. 
19, p. 7-10.) MFA 

696. Zander, C. G. The complementary 
colour reproduction process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 29, 
1905, v. 52, p. 1028-1029.) MFA 

Zander process. 



40 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1906 

697. "Allochrome" and "Panchromatic" 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 14, 1906, v. S3, p. 737.) MFA 

Plates made by Wratten & Wainwright, Croydon, 
England. 

698. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Das Rot- 
filter im Dreifarbenprozess. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 167-168.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 20, 1906, v. S3, p. 310-311, MFA. 

699. Spectro-photography and the 

making of light filters, including control- 
ling methods by the Abney colour disc. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 396.) MFA 

700. Belin, Edouard. Methode spectro- 
sensitometrique. illus. (Societe francaise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1906, 
serie 2, tome 22, p. *25-*32.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. S3, p. 630-632, MFA. 

701. Boardman, F. R. Artificial light in 
colour portraiture. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 397-398.) MFA 

Boardman arc lamps adopted by the Rotary Photo- 
graphic Company. 

702. Braham, A. C. Autotype trichrome 
tissues. (Photographic journal, London, 
May, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 178-181.) 

MFA 

703. Trichrome carbon printing. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
July 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 566.) MFA 

Detailed instructions. 

704. Butler, Edwin T. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1906, v. S3, p. 158, 197.) MFA 

States that after long experiment he has succeeded 
in securing in his camera three-colour negatives of 
equal size. 

705. A colour - photography society. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 219.) MFA 

Suggests organization of a society. 

706. Tri-colour work with a single 

exposure camera. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 23, 1906, v. 53, p. 
145-146.) MFA 

Describes his own process. 

707. Cheron, Andre. La photographie des 
couleurs par dispersion spectrale prisma- 
tique. illus. (Societe francaise de photog- 
raphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 
23, p. 36-41.) MFA 

Also printed in La Nature, Paris, 1906, annee 34, 
semestre 2, p. 401-403, OA, and in British journal 
of photography, London, Nov. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 904- 
907, MFA. 



708. Cinematography in colours. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 27, 
1906, v. 53, p. 584.) MFA 

709. Colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, 1906, v. 50, p. 976, 1020, 
1040.) MFA 

Lippmann process. Filters. 

710. Colour photography without filters at 
one exposure. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1906, v. 53, p. 87- 
88.) MFA 

Drac process. 

711. Comley, Henry J. Proposed society 
of colour photographers. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 558- 
559, 599.) MFA 

7^2. Coustet, Ernest. L'invention du pro- 
cede trichrome par elements juxtaposes. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, an- 
nee 16, p. 87-92.) MFA 

713. ■ Photographie des couleurs par 

decoloration. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 
25, 1906, annee 16, p. 166-172.) MFA 

Bleachout process. 

714. Dark room illumination for working 
red sensitive collodion emulsion. (British 
iournal of photography, London, July 27, 
1906, v. 53, p. 592-593.) MFA 

715. Day, T. Cuthbert. Colour and colour 
photography. (Photographic news, Lon- 
don, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 50, p. 128.) MFA 

Resume of theory and practice. 

716. Donath, Bruno. Die Grundlagen der 
Farbenphotographie. Braunschweig: F. 
Vieweg und Sohn, 1906. viii, 166 p., 2 pi. 
illus. 8°. (Die Wissenschaft. No. 14.) 

MFV 

Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 25, 1906, v. 53, p. 412, MFA. 

717. Eder, Josef Maria. Trichromie und 
Tetrachromie. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 477-478.) 

MFA 

718. Farmer, Howard. The exhibition of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 198.) MFA 

A plea to keep the London exhibition intact. 

719. Geisler, Louis. La photographie en 
couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 1906, an- 
nee 16, p. 230-231; annee 17, 1906, p. 4-7, 
26-28, 69-72.) MFA 

Nachet-Geisler process. 

720. Three-colour screens and inks. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 24, 1906, v. 53, p. 667-669.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



41 



1906, continued. 

721. Gravier, Charles. Methode d'impres- 
sion en couleurs la quadrichromie Zander. 
(Societe francaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, serie 2, tome 22, p. 273- 
274.) MFA 

722. Grothuss, Theodor, Freiherr von. Ab- 
handlungen uber Elektrizitat und Licht. 
Hrsg. von R. Luther und A. v. Oettingen. 
Leipzig: Wilhelm Engelmann, 1906. 198 
p., 1 1., 1 port. 12°. (Ostwald's Klassiker 
der exakten Wissenschaften. No. 152.) 

OAC 

During the early part of the nineteenth century 
Grothuss made researches upon the nature of colored 
light. See p. 100 et seq in above volume. 

723. Gruen, Edward F. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1906, v. S3, p. 97-98.) MFA 

Criticizes E. J. Wall's account of the London exhi- 
bition. 

724. Haberkorn, Fritz. Eine Kamera fur 
Dreifarbenaufnahmen nach der Natur. 
illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 430-432.) MFA 

725. Heicke, Richard. Direct enlargements 
in monochrome and three-colour in gum 
bichromate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 20, 1906, v. 53, p. 305- 
307.) MFA 

726. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The ab- 
sorption and sensitising spectrum of the 
cyanins. illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, March, 1906, new series, v. 30, p. 
133-137.) MFA 

From Eder's Jahrbuch, 190S. 

727. ■ The basis of three-colour photog- 
raphy, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 489-491, 627- 
629, 693-695.) MFA 

"It ought to be clear that the Young-Helmholtz 
theory of colour vision possesses no importance, for 
the theory of three-colour photography, and that it is 
therefore not correct to identify the physiological 
fundamental colours with those of three-colour pho- 
tography." 

728. ■ — — Ein Beitrag zur Photographie 
farbiger Gegenstande. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 157-167.) MFA 

Good article on color sensitizing, with a colored 
plate. 

729. Red sensitive plates, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
23, 1906, v. 53, p. 147-148.) MFA 

730. - — — The "Uto" bleach-out process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 787-788.) MFA 

Describes his experiences with paper prepared by 
Dr. J. H. Smith & Co., Zurich. 

731. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
in the diffraction process of color photog- 



raphy. (Franklin Institute. Journal, Phila- 
delphia, 1906, v. 161, p. 439-449.) VA 

Invention of R. W. Wood of Johns Hopkins Uni- 
versity in 1899. 

Also printed in Physical review, New York, June, 
1906, v. 22, p. 339-344, PAA; Photo-era, Boston, 
Nov., 1906, v. 17, p. 285-295, MFA, and British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 3, 1906, v. 53, p. 
609-612, MFA. 

732. Koenig, Ernst. Further applications 
of pinatype. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 30, 1906, v. 53, p. 
246.) MFA 

733. Natural-color photography . . . 

Translated from the German, with addi- 
tions, original tests and experiments, etc., 
by E. J. Wall... With color-chart, test- 
results, and diagrams. London: Dawbarn 
& Ward, Ltd. [1906., 94 p. illus. 8°. MFV 

Reviewed in British journal of photography , Lon- 
don, July 13, 1906, v. 53, p. 556, MFA. 

734. Kunstlicht und Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
Feb. 14, 1906, Jahrg. 13, p. 89-90.) f MFA 

Jupiter lamp. 

735. Legier, Alphonse. Le "photochrome" 
de la Societe du photochrome, illus. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1906, serie 2, tome 22, p. 184-186.) 

MFA 

Apparatus for exposing three plates. 

736. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Beitrage 
zur Theorie und Praxis der direkten Far- 
benphotographie mittels stehender Licht- 
wellen nach Lippmanns Methode... Frei- 
burg i. Br.: C. Tromer, 1906. iv, 89 p. 
tables, illus. 8°. MFF p.v.54, no.5 

Reviewed in British journal of photoaraphy, Lon- 
don, Nov. 30, 1906, v. 53, p. 946-047, MFA. 

737. Neue Untersuchungen iiber Lipp- 

mann-Photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1906, Halle a. S., 1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 49- 
53.) MFA 

738. Lippmann, Gabriel. Des divers prin- 
cipes sur lesquels on peut fonder la pho- 
tographie directe des couleurs. Photogra- 
phie directe des couleurs fondee sur 
la dispersion prismatique. (Academie des 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, July 30, 
1906, tome 143, p. 270-274.) * EO 

Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 17, 1906, -v. 53, p. 644-645, MFA. 
Abstract in Nature, London, Aug. 30, 1906, v. 74, 
p. 459, OA. 

739. La photographie des couleurs sur 

plaques sensibilisees aux sels de chrome. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, serie 2, tome 22, p. 287- 
288.) MFA 

740. A Lumiere one - lens one - exposure 
camera, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 191.) MFA 

Abstract of patent. 



42 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1906, continued. 

741. Mareschal, G. La pinatypie. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, March 25, 1906, annee 16, 
p. 96-97.) MFA 

742. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Three - colour at the Croydon Camera 
Club. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 4, 1906, v. S3, p. 349-350.) 

MFA 

Discusses filters, spectrum tests of filters, and 
screens for general work. 

743. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. E. Sheppard. The estimation of the 
colour - sensitiveness of plates. illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, March, 
1906, new series, v. 30, p. 110-131.) MFA 

744. Monpillard, Felix. Essai d'etalonnage 
des ecrans colores. illus. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1906, serie 2, tome 22, p. 231-240.) MFA 

745. Essais du pinacyanol et de la 

dicyanine des Farbwerke vorm Meister 
Lucius et Briining de Hoechst-sur-Mein. 
(Societe frangaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1906, serie 2, tome 22, p. 132— 
143.) MFA 

Abstract in Photographic journal, London, June, 
1906, new series, v. 30, p. 260-261, MFA. 

746. Neame, S. E. The possibility of 
portraiture in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1906, v. 53, p. 259, 
278.) MFA 

Demonstrates Sanger Shepherd process. Abstract 
and comment in Photographic news, London, 1906, 
v. 50, p. 253, 271, 316, MFA. 

747. Neuhauss, Richard. Ausbleichver- 
fahren. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1906, Halle a. S., 
1906, Jahrg. 20, p. 11-14.) MFA 

748. A New three-colour printing process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 30, 1906, v. 53, p. 944-945.) MFA 

Invention of Dr. Traube of Berlin. 

749. Newton, A. J. Pigments for three- 
colour processes, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 25, 1906, 
v. 53, p. 406-408.) MFA 

750. ■ Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
16, 1906, v. 53, p. 910-911.) MFA 

751. Three - colour process work. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 30, 1906, v. 53, p. 248-249.) MFA 

752. Norman, Albert. [The Sanger Shep- 
herd process.] (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 11, 1906, v. 53, p. 374.) 

MFA 

Demonstration of making transparencies before 
the Royal Photographic Society. 



753. Novak, Franz. Rapidlichtf ilter fiir Drei- 
farbenphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 285— 
287.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505, MFA. 

754. Ozobrome and three - colour work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 27, 1906, v. 53, p. 581.) MFA 

755. Pector, S. Leon Vidal. port. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1906, tome 22, p. 457-459.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

756. Pfaundler, Leopold. Die Young- 
Helmholtzsche Farbentheorie und die 
Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fiir Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1906, Halle a. S„ 1906, Jahrg. 20, 
p. 53-58.) MFA 

757. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1906, v. 53, p. 139, 178-179.) MFA 

Comments on the Jumeaux process. 

Traces patent history of reflector cameras. For 
criticisms of E. T. Butler and E. J. Wall, see above 
publication March 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 197. 

758. Trichromatic one-exposure cam- 
eras, illus. (Photographic news, London, 
April 20, 1906, v. 50, p. 308-309.) MFA 

Has list of patents. 

759. Professional colour photography, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1906, v. 53, p. 366-368, 391, 419, 438.) MFA 

Reference to studios of Heath & Stoneman, the 
Rotary Company, and Otto Pfenninger. 

760. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Observa- 
tions et remarques sur les travaux photo- 
graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (VI 
Congresso internazionale di chimica appli- 
cata, Roma, 1906. Atti, v. 6, p. 10-13.) 

PKR 

Translation in Photographic journal, London, new 
series, v. 30, p. 304-306, MFA. Suggests preservation 
of plates by rapid drying. 

761. Rheinberg, Julius. Photography in 
natural colours, (Nature, London, Nov. 
29, 1906, v. 75, p. 103.) MFA 

Admits patent priority to F. Cheshire. 

762. Sallwuerk, Edmund von. Farbenpho- 
tographie und Kunst. (Photographische 
Kunst, Munchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 243- 
248.) f MFA 

763. Saville-Kent, W. The photography 
of colour as applied to obtaining correct 
colour records of natural history subjects. 
(Royal Asiatic Society. — Ceylon Branch. 
Journal, Colombo, 1906, v. 18, p. 435-445.) 

*OAA 

Various well-known processes described. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



43 



1906, continued. 

764. Schmidt, Hans. Eine Dreifarben- 
Momentkamera. illus. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 
579-582.) MFA 

765. Das Dreifarben - Photographie- 

Verfahren, System N. P. G. (VI Congresso 
internazionale di chimica applicata, Roma, 
1906. Atti, v. 6, p. 36-52.) PKR 

Process of the Neue photographische Gesellschaft. 
Partial abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1907, v. 14, p. 110-112, MFA. 

766. Three-colour prints by the car- 
bon-film process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 15, 1906, v. 53, p. 
469-470.) MFA 

Abstract. 

767. Ueber Farbenphotographie mit 

besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Systems 
N. P. G. (Photographische Kunst, Miin- 
chen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 345-350.) f MFA 

768. Uber Kameras fur Dreifarben- 

photographie. illus. (Photographische 

Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, Jahrg. 43, p. 

531-535.) MFA 

769. Scoble, Walter A. The red sensitive- 
ness of dyed films, illus. (Photographic 
journal, London, May, 1906, new series, 
v. 30, p. 190-197.) MFA 

770. Seddig, M. A suggested method of 
colour sensitometry. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 10, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 629-630.) MFA 

771. Smith, John H. The bleach-out proc- 
ess of colour-photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 8, 1906, 
v. 53, p. 459.) MFA 

States that he has abandoned the Szczepanik proc- 
ess in favor of the Smith-Merckens process. 

772. Smith, John H., and W. Merckens. 
[Natural-colour printing out paper.] (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, May, 1906, new 
series, v. 30, p. 197-200.) MFA 

Abstract only. 

773. Ober ein direkt in Farben kopie- 

rendes Papier (Uto - Papier). (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 385-388.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 
1906-07, Jahrg. 5, p. 109-111, MFA. 

774. Smith, J. H., & Co. Direct-colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 12, 1906, v. 53, p. 817.) 

MFA 

Reference to improvements in "Uto" paper; also 
to combination of owners of Smith-Merckens and of 
Szczepanik patents. 

775. The "Solgram" colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
2, 1906, v. 53, p. 88.) MFA 



776. Some notes on the bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 23, 1906, v. 53, p. 146.) MFA 

Brief description of Szczepanik process. 

777. Some notes on the gum process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 388-390.) MFA 

778. Stable colours for three-colour prints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, p. 11.) MFA 

M. Pacini recommends the use of picric acid, car- 
mine, and Prussian blue. 

779. The Szczepanik bleach-out process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 12, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 26-27.) MFA 

Translation of manufacturer's instructions. 

780. The Technics and practice of the 
Lumiere starch grain process. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 9, 
1906, v. 53, p. 190-191.) MFA 

781. Three-colour without filters. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
12, 1906, v. 53, p. 21.) MFA 

Description of C. J. Drac's patent. 

782. Three-colour photographs of the solar 
eclipse. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 29, 1906, v. 53, p. 505.) MFA 

Brief paragraph referring to work of Professor 
Mengarini of Rome. 

783. Three - colour prints on "Autotype" 
trichrome tissues. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 106.) MFA 

784. Three - colour transparencies by the 
pinatype process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, p. 6- 
7.) MFA 

Detailed instructions. 

785. Three - colour transparencies by the 
Sanger-Shepherd process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 29, 1906, 
v. 53, p. 506.) MFA 

786. A Two-colour printing process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
7, 1906, v.53, p. 705.) MFA 

Abstract of German patent of J. K. Henberger. 

787. Valenta, Eduard. Pinachrom and Pina- 
cyanol als Rotsensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1906, 
Jahrg. 43, p. 132-134.) MFA 

788. Vidal, Leon. Colour photography. A 
modern pinatype method. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 18, 1906, v. 
53, p. 390-391.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1906, v. 13, p. 447-448, MFA. 

789. The Lippmann and Lumiere proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 16, 1906, v. 53, p. 125-126.) 

MFA 



44 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1906, continued. 

790. W., J. Death of M. Leon Vidal. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 24, 1906, v. S3, p. 672.) MFA 

791. - The late Leon Vidal. port. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, 1906, new se- 
ries, v. 30, p. 316-317; port. opp. p. 339.) 

MFA 

792. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 
process. (Photographic news, London, 
July 20, 1906, v. SO, p. 574.) MFA 

Brief reference to patent of Mezaro. 

793. Colour photography. (British 

iournal of photography, London, Feb. 9, 
"1906, v. 53, p. 117-118.) MFA 

Replies to Dr. Grun regarding disputed features 
of the Color Photography Exhibition. 

794. Colour sensations. (Photographic 

news, London, Sept. 21, 1906, v. 50, p. 755.) 

MFA 

Scientific basis of color photography upset by dis- 
coveries of Professor Raehlmann. 

795. An exhibition of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 53, p. 64-67.) MFA 

796. How to take portraits in natural 

colours. (Photographic news, London, 
1906, v. 50, p. 388-389, 426-427, 490-491.) 

MFA 

797. Natural colour P. O. P. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, May 4, 1906, v. 50, 
p. 351.) MFA 

Smith process. 

798. A new process of three-colour 

printing. (Photographic news, London, 
Dec. 7, 1906, v. 50, p. 983.) MFA 

Traube process. 

799. The pinatype camera. illus. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, p. 105.) MFA 

800. ■ Pinatype and Rotary Co.'s super- 
imposed carbon colour tissues. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1906, new 
series, v. 30, p. 144-146.) MFA 

Abstract of lecture delivered before the Royal 
Photographic Society. 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, March 9, 1906, v. S3, p. 195, MFA. 

801. The present status of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy. London, July 27, 1906, v. 53, p. 588- 
592.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Dec, 1906, v. 
17, p. 352-364, MFA. 

802. A treatise on Lippmann colour 

photography, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 30, 1906, v. S3, 
p. 946-947.) MFA 

Review of Hans Lehmann's book on color photog- 
raphy. 



803. Walter, Gustav. Die Pietznersche 
Farbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 5, p. 321- 
323.) f MFA 

804. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1905- 
06, Jahrg. 4, p. 400-404, 425-434.) f MFA 

Historical outline. 

805. Yerbury, S. G. The "Sinop" process 
in colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Jan. 26, 1906, v. 
53, p. 78.) MFA 

Recommends "Sinop" simplified collotype plates 
to obviate "blobby" appearance of prints. 

806. ■ Three-colour printing by the Si- 
nop process, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 9, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 106-107.) MFA 

807. Zander, C. G. The Zander four-colour 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 18, 1906, v. 53, p. 397.) MFA 

Claims that his process is not based on Hering's 
theory. 

808. The Zander four-colour process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 7, 1906, v. 53, p. 719.) MFA 

809. The Zander complementary colour 
reproduction process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 5, 1906, v. 53, 
p. 14.) MFA 

810. Zander's four-colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 
11, 1906, v. 53, p. 371.) MFA 



1907 

811. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
The autochrome process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, 
v. 54, p. 804-805.) MFA 

From the Journal of the Royal Photographic So- 
ciety. 

812. The Achromatism of lenses for colour 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 42-43.) MFA 

813. Albert, E. Three-colour without fil- 
ters. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 55.) MFA 

814. Alleged anticipations of the Warner- 
Powrie process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, p. 
812-813.) MFA 

815. Another American discovery in colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 53.) MFA 

Invention of Charles Gilbert of Chicago. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



45 



1907 , continued. 

816. Another well-known worker in colour- 
photography, Dr. Gustav Selle. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 55.) MFA 

Brief obituary notice. 

817. Art and colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
1907, v. 54, p. 781-782.) MFA 

818. Atkinson, E. H. C. Section-cut half- 
tone screens. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 22, 1907, v. 54, p. 894.) 

MFA 

Brief suggestion for the Warner-Powrie process. 

819. Autochrome items. (British journal 
of photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 
54, p. 839-840.) MFA 

Cause of green stains. Reversing, intensification, 
residues. 

820. Autochrome plates under modified 
treatment. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 11, 1907, v. 54, p. 772- 
773.) MFA 

821. The Autochrome process in a nutshell. 
(Photographic news, London, Sept. 27, 
1907, v. 52, p. 304.) MFA 

From revised book of instructions. 

822. Autochromes from autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
15, 1907, v. 54, p. 858.) MFA 

823. Baker, Thomas Thorne. The colour 
sensitising of gelatine and collodion emul- 
sions and the relation of the colour of a 
dye to its sensitising action. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1907, new 
series, v. 31, p. 207.) MFA 

With discussion. 

824. Bardorf. Uber Jougla's Autochrom- 
platte "Omnicolor." (Photographische 
Welt, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 147-148, 
167-168.) MFA 

825. Bauer, Otto. A camera for three- 
colour photography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
v. 54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
31.) MFA 

Abstract of specification. 

826. Bayley, R. Child. Color photography. 
(Photo-miniature, New York, Sept., 1907, 
v. 7, p. 449-455.) MFA 

Manipulation of autochromes. 

827. Copying autochromes in the 

camera. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 831.) MFA 

828. Beck, Conrad. [Lumiere starch grain 
process.] (Royal Microscopical Society. 
Proceedings, London, 1907, p. 763-764.) 

OCA 

_ Brief reference to examination of plates under the 
microscope. See also Nature, London, Dec. 26, 1907, 
v. 77, p. 188, OA. 



829. Blackburn, H. E. The pinatype proc- 
ess of color photography. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Dec, 1907, v. 14, p. 515-519.) 

MFA 

830. ■ A rapid three-color carbon proc- 
ess. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1907, v. 14, p. 273-276.) MFA 

831. Brasseur, Charles L. A. Weather 
conditions and colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
8, 1907, p. 843.) MFA 

832. Burchardt, Ernest A. Three-colour 
printing with bichromated size. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 25-26.) MFA 

833. Cajal, S. R. The Lippmann process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 13, 1907, v. 54, p. 691-692.) MFA 

Abstract. 

834. Die Struktur der Lippmannschen 

Photochromien. illus. (Zeitschrift fur 
wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 
1907, Bd. 5, p. 213-245.) PLC 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 59-61, 69-71, 77-79, MFA. 

835. Uber die Polychromie mikro- 

skopischer Metallkornchen. (Zeitschrift 
fur wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 137-140.) PLC 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 

836. Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc. La re- 
production photographique des couleurs. 
Paris: Le Procede [1907]. 2 p.l., 132 p. 
illus. 8°. (Bibliotheque des procedes 
photomecaniques.) MDS 

837. Cheron, Andre. Improvements in the 
prismatic dispersion process, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
6, 1907, v. 54, p. 675-677.) MFA 

838. Chevrier, Henri. Observations sur le 
traitement des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 477-485.) 

MFA 

839. Traitement des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 
1907, annee 18, p. 21-26.) MFA 

840. Claudy, Carl Harry. Autochrome 
color photography. (Bulletin of photog- 
raphy, Philadelphia, Dec. 11, 1907, v. 1, p. 
347-348.) f MFA 

Advice to professionals. 

841. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Development 
of three-colour negatives. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 5, 1907, 
v. 54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
29.) MFA 



46 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1907, continued. 

842. Colour curves and how to control 
them. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, v. 54, p. 30.) MFA 

843. Colour photography. (Photographic 
news, London, June 21, 1907, v. 51, p. 505.) 

MFA 

Explains difference between Sanger Shepherd and 
Lumiere processes. 

844. Colour processes. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 855.) MFA 

Formulas for pinatype process. 

845. Comley, Henry J. The bichromated 
size process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 46.) MFA 

Gives formula for sizing. 

846. Three - colour carbon and the 

autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1907, v. 54, p. 853— 
854, 875.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Southampton 
Camera Club. 

847. Three-colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
21, 1907, v. 54, p. 471.) MFA 

Describes author's camera and process. Abstract 
of paper read before South London Photographic So- 
ciety. 

Also printed in Photographic news, London, July 
12, 1907, v. 52, p. 31, MFA. 

848. The Connection between duration of 
development, fog, and colour rendering. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19-21.) MFA 

849. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
couleurs: les plaques a filtres trichromes. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 27, 1907, an- 
nee 17, p. 101-107.) MFA 

Lumiere, Krayn, Ramon y Cajal, Berton & Gambs, 
Smith, and Ducos du Hauron processes. 

850. Photographie des couleurs; le 

procede trichrome par elements juxta- 
poses. (Revue scientifique, Paris, 1907, 
serie 5, v. 8, semestre 2, p. 237-241.) OA 

851. Cremier, Victor. Les plaques auto- 
chromes et la stereoscopic (Photo - ga- 
zette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1907, annee 17, p. 186- 
189.) MFA 

852. Didier, Leon. A simplified pinatype 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 

853. Direct half-tone three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 87.) MFA 

Formulas from Klimsch's Jahrbuch. 



854. The Donisthorpe three-colour print- 
ing process. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 71.) MFA 

855. Duchenne, Paul. Chassis-magasin a 
poses multiples pour la trichromie. illus. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 121— 
122.) MFA 

856. _A multiple three-colour back. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 23.) MFA 

Abstract of French patent. 

857. Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. de 
Bercegol. The Du Hauron one-plate proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 3, 1907, v. 54, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 

858. "Ensign" chemical outfit for auto- 
chrome plates, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 926-927.) MFA 

859. The "Ensign" viewing stand for auto- 
chrome transparencies. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 95.) MFA 

860. Execution de contretypes par la pina- 
type. (Societe frangaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 
189-190.) MFA 

861. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Oct. 18, 1907, v. 54, p. 782.) MFA 

Reference to patent of Hans Lehmann. 

862. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
6, 1907, v. 54, p. 918.) MFA 

863. Fairchild, Thomas J. Colour prints 
and transparencies. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 21, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 473.) MFA 

Directions for producing greens and yellows from 
ordinary negatives. 

864. Flower studies in colour. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, p. 822.) MFA 

Comments on Lumiere process. 

865. Fraprie, Frank Roy. Simple color 
photography achieved. (American pho- 
tography, Boston, Aug., 1907, v. 1, p. 59- 
64.) MFA 

Brief description of autochrome, with formulas. 

866. Frederking, H. Das neue Verfahren 
der Naturfarbenphotographie von A. und 
L. Lumiere. (Dinglers polytechnisches 
Journal, Berlin, 1907, Bd. 322, p. 713-716.) 

VA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



47 



1907 , continued. 

867. Gamble, William. Colour photogra- 
phy by the Warner - Powrie screen - plate 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 4, 1907, v. 54, p. 748-750.) 

MFA 

868. Geisler, Louis. Chromographe Nachet- 
Geisler. illus. (Societe franchise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, 
tome 23, p. 271-276.) MFA 

869. Gill, William. Professional colour 
photography: does it pay? (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 3, 1907, 
v. 54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
33-34.) MFA 

870. Grant, Thomas K. The autochrome 
process. (Photographic journal, London, 
Dec, 1907, new series, v. 31, p. 395-401.) 

MFA 

Demonstration at the Royal Photographic Society. 
With discussion. 

871. Gravier, Charles. Observations nou- 
velles sur les plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographic Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 475-476.) 

MFA 

871a. La photographie des couleurs 

sur les plaques autochromes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 415-417.) MFA 

872. Grills, E. Notes on the pinatype 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

873. Screen-plate colour photography 

by the Warner - Powrie process. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 11, 1907, v. 54, p. 763 -765.) MFA 

874. The three-colour tissue process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 

875. Guebhard, Adrien. Sur le procede de 
photographie des couleurs de MM. A. & L. 
Lumiere. (Academie des sciences. Comptes 
rendus, Paris, Nov. 11, 1907, tome 145, p. 
792-795.) * EO 

Suggests that by the application of the principle of 
reversal the chemical method used in Lumiere pro- 
cedure might be avoided. Brief abstract in British 
journal of photography, Nov. 29, 1907, v. 54, p. 898, 

MFA. 

876. Sur le role de l'inversion dans le 

procede de' photographie des couleurs de 
MM. A. et L. Lumiere. illus. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 534-537.) MFA 

877. Harberisser. Autochrome filters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, p. 816.) MFA 



878. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
spectrum and three-colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 26, 1907, v. 54, p. 315-316.) MFA 

879. An Interview with M. Louis Ducos du 
Hauron. port. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

880. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A color screen 
color meter. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, Dec, 1907, v. 164, p. 421- 
423.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19, MFA. 

881. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Improvements 
in the diffraction process of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 89.) 

MFA 

Abstract of paper read before London and Provin- 
cial Photographic Association. 

882. Three - color interference pic- 
tures. (Physical review, New York, Jan., 
1907, v.' 24, p. 103-107.) PAA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 10-12, MFA. 

883. J., C. A new method of colour pho- 
tography. (Nature, London, Oct. 24, 1907, 
v. 76, p. 642.) OA 

Warner-Powrie process. 

884. Single-plate colour-photography. 

(Nature, London, Aug. 1, 1907, v. 76, p. 
317.) OA 

Simple account of the Lumiere process. 

885. Jougla, J. Nouvelles plaques "Omni- 
colore" reproduisant par developpement 
toutes les couleurs de la nature. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 221-223.) MFA 

886. The omnicolore plate. (British 

journal of photography, London, June 7, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 46.) MFA 

887. Klein, Henry Oscar. Ueber die Be- 
deutung richtiger Expositionsratia in der 
Dreifarbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1907, Halle a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, 
p. 88-91.) MFA 

Penrose ratiometer. 

888. Koenig, Ernst. The keeping proper- 
ties of bathed plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 1, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 23.) 

MFA 

Experiments with pinachrome and pinacyanol in 
semi-alcohol bath. 

889. A new method for preparing 

three-colour transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, 
v. 54, Colour photography supplement, p. 
13.) MFA 

Uses pinatype process. 



48 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1907, continued. 

890. Non-screen orthochromatic and 

panchromatic plates by bathing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 18, 
1907, v. 54, p. 786.) MFA 

Prepared from ordinary plates. 

891. ■ The permanency of pinatype 

prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 23.) MFA 

892. The Krayn screen - plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 13, 
1907, v. 54, p. 944.) MFA 

893. The Krayn screen - plate process of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 93-94.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1908, v. 15, p. 109, MFA. 

894. Kruegener, R. Die neue Farbenpho- 
tographie von Auguste und Louis Lumiere 
in Lyon. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 45, p. 337-341.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Welt, Leipzig, 
1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 113-115, 131-133, MFA. 

895. Lasareff, P. Uber das Ausbleichen 
von Farbstoffen im sichtbaren Spektrum. 
(Annalen der Physik, Leipzig, 1907, Folge 
4, Bd. 24, p. 661-671.) PAA 

Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 38-40, MFA. 

896. Latest developments in screen - plate 
colour photography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 13, 1907, 
v. 54, p. 688-691.) MFA 

Warner-Powrie process. 

Also printed in American photography, Boston, 
Oct., 1907, v. 1, p. 186-192, MFA. 

Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1907, v. 14, p. 503-504, MFA. 

897. The Latest on Warner-Powrie. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
18, 1907, v. 54, p. 783.) MFA 

Experiments; also comparisons with Lumiere plates. 

898. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Uber die 
direkten Verfahren der Farbenphotogra- 
phie nach Lippmann und Lumiere. illus. 
(Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, 
Jahrg. 8, p. 842-849.) PAA 

Also printed in Deutsche physikalische Gesellschaft. 
Berichte, Berlin, 1907, Jahrg. 5, p. 624-638, PAA. 

899. Uber eine neue kornlose Platte 

fur Lippmann-Photographie. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 279-283.) PLC 

900. Leiber, Ferdinand. A three-colour 
positive transparency process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 84-85.) MFA 

Glass transparencies by the triple subtractive 
process. 



901. Le Roy, George A. Rectification des 
epreuves sur plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 473.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11, MFA. 

902. Vernis pour plaques autochromes. 

(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 472.) 

MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11, MFA. 

903. Lueppo - Cramer. The behaviour of 
dyes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 50.) MFA 

Deals with the action of dyes in hydrosols of the 
silver halides. 

904. Zur Photochemie der Photoha- 

loide und Theorie der Poitevinschen 
Photochromie. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 376-382, 
439-444.) MFA 

905. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Notice de MM. Lumiere sur le mode d'em- 
ploi des plaques autochromes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 358-368.) MFA 

Full directions. 

906. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. Methods 
of control in the development of autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 90-93.) MFA 

Also printed in American photography, Boston, 
Feb., 1908, v. 2, p. 93-102, MFA. 

907. Sur le developpement des plaques 

autochromes. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, 
tome 23, p. 515-528.) MFA 

908. The Lumiere autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 51-53, 65-68.) MFA 

Directions for manipulating. 

909. Lumieres Verfahren der Photographie 
in naturlichen Farben mittels Autochrom- 
platten. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 434-438.) 

MFA 

910. Mackenstein, H. Declenchement auto- 
matique des obturateurs par le declic auto- 
matique H. B. illus. (Societe frangaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 
2, tome 23, p. 386-387.) MFA 

911. Mareschal, G. Photographie des cou- 
leurs par les plaques autochromes Lu- 
miere. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
1907, annee 17, p. 121-123.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



49 



1907, continued. 

912. Martin-Duncan, F. Autochromes of 
nature subjects. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, p. 
834-835.) MFA 

Abstract of lecture before the Blenheim Club. 

913. The microscopic appearance of 

the Warner-Powrie plate, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 83-84.) ' MFA 

914. Some notes on the microscopic 

appearance of the Lumiere autochrome 
plate, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 6, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 

915. Martiny, Gaston. Quelques conse- 
quences de l'emploi des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
1907, annee 17, p. 165-167.) MFA 

Difficulties to be overcome. 

916. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. Mo- 
saic and linear colour plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 5, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 49-50.) MFA 

917. Preparing colour-duplicates by 

the Warner-Powrie process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 20, 
1907, v. 54, p. 708-710.) MFA 

918. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
J. H. Pledge. Printing and copying from 
screen-plate colour negatives and posi- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 

919. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. H. Wratten. Rapid filter blue. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 62.) MFA 

920. Mente, Otto. Ueber die neue Omni- 
colore Platte. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., July 3, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 334- 
337.) f MFA 

921. Millochau, G. Photography of the 
infra-red solar spectrum. (British journal 
of photography, London, May 17, 1907, v. 
54, p. 364-365.) MFA 

922. Monpillard, Felix. lJcrans colores 
pour la microphotographie. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 177-179.) MFA 

923. Natural colour photographs of inter- 
ference effects in glass under stress. (En- 
gineering, London, Jan. 11, 1907, v. 83, p. 
56.) VA 

Abstract in Photographic news, London, Tan. 25. 
1907, v. 51, p. 71, MFA. 



924. Neuhauss, Richard. History of the 
bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 262.) MFA 

_ States that process was used as early as 1899 by 
Liesegang. 

925. A note by Dr. Neuhauss on the 

bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 1, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 14-15.) 

MFA 

Refers to new paper introduced by Dr. J. H. Smith 
& Co. of Zurich. 

926. Newton, A. J. The Warner-Powrie 
screen -plate from the photo - engraver's 
point of view. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 27, 1907, v. 54, p. 730- 
731.) MFA 

927. A Note on varnishing autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. 859.) MFA 

928. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Die 
Farbenphotographie nach dem Warner- 
Powrie- Verfahren. illus. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 
533-538.) MFA 

929. Neuerungen in der Dreifarben- 

photographie. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Pho- 
tographic und Reproductionstechnik fur 
1907, Halle a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 129- 
141.) MFA 

Brief abstracts of periodical articles. 

930. One-plate colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 13.) MFA 

A review of patents issued. 

931. Le Papier Uto pour obtention da- 
mages polychromes par decoloration. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographic Bulletin, 
Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 190-192.) 

MFA 

932. Patents in colour-photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Aug. 
30, 1907, v. 54, p. 666, 681-682.) MFA 

Discussion between Frederic E. Ives and Otto 
Pfenninger as to patent priority of refraction com- 
pensator. 

933. Payne, Arthur. Stereoscopic photog- 
raphy with autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1907, v. 
54, p. 784-785, 803-804.) MFA 

934. Pfaundler, Leopold. Ueber ein Mo- 
dell zur mechanischen Versinnbildlichung 
der Heringschen Farbentheorie. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1907, Halle a. S., 1907, 
Jahrg. 21, p. 20-21.) MFA 

935. The Pinatype process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 1, 
1907, v. 54, supplement, p. 23.) MFA 

Description of French patent 337,054. 



50 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1907 , continued. 

936. Das Pinatype-Verfahren der Hochster 
Farbwerke. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Aug. 4, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 397- 
398.) f MFA 

937. Piper, Charles Welborne. Duplicates 
of autochromes by contact printing and 
copying. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 81-82.) MFA 

938. Plauderei fiber die Farbenphotogra- 
phie nach Lumiere. (Photographische 
Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 18, 1907, Jahrg. 
14, p. 423-425.) f MFA 

939. Pledge, John H. Photo-micrographs 
of starch grains in the Lumiere auto- 
chrome plates, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 721.) MFA 

940. Poiree, Georges. Methode de photo- 
graphic des couleurs par analyse et synthese 
au moyen d'objectifs non achromatiques. 
illus. (Societe francaise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 
61-66.) MFA 

Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, March 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 21-22, MFA. 

941. A Precaution in the autochrome proc- 
ess. Securing white in autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
11, 1907, v. 54, p. 761-762.) MFA 

942. Precautions in the use of liquid col- 
our-filters. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, p. 35-36.) 

MFA 

943. "Pyro-Reeb," revelateur special pour 
plaques autochromes. (Societe franchise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1907, 
serie 2, tome 23, p. 529-531.) MFA 

944. Quentin, H. Comment on obtient une 
photographie en couleurs. Procedes tri- 
chromes, methodes par reseaux poly- 
chromes, procede par dispersion spectrale. 
Paris: Ch. Mendel [1907?]. 1 p.l., 69 p. 
12°. MFV 

945. The mercury fog in interference 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 

946. The R. P. S. progress medal-award 
for colour photography, port. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 1, 
1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12.) MFA 

Award to E. Sanger Shepherd. 

947. Raymond, R. Photography in col- 
ours by prismatic dispersion, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 
4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 5-6, 18-19.) MFA 



948. Real color photography. (Outlook, 
New York, 1907, v. 87, p. 238-239.) * DA 

Autochromes. 

949. Reducing three - colour negatives. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 6, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 71.) MFA 

"Sanzol" process. 

950. Reeb, Henri. De l'estimation du 
temps de pose sur plaques autochromes. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 490- 
495.) MFA 

951. Riley, Phil Madison. Color-photog- 
raphy near. A new one-plate process for 
the ordinary camera. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Dec, 1907, v. 19, p. 307-309.) MFA 

Joly process. 

952. Rothe, E. Practice of Lippmann's 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 3.) MFA 

Does away with mercury mirror. Method of work- 
ing is described. 

953. Schmidt, Hans. Ueber Dreifarben- 
negative. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fur 1907, Halle a. S., 
1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 10-13.) MFA 

954. Screen-plate photography by the War- 
ner-Powrie process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1907, v. 54, p. 707- 
708, 730.) MFA 

955. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. The col- 
our of dye solutions. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 25, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 819.) MFA 

956. Sims, W. A. Three-colour printing 
process by means of the Rotary Photo- 
graphic Company's films. (Photographic 
journal, London, Jan., 1907, new series, v. 
31, p. 4-8.) MFA 

With discussion. 

957. Smith, John H. The copying of col- 
our - screen plates on bleach - out paper. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 62-63.) MFA 

958. Direct colour-photography by the 

Smith screen plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, 
p. 6.) MFA 

959. Smith, John H., and W. Merckens. 
Ausbleichverfahren und direkte Farben- 
photographie. (Jahrbuch fiir Photogra- 
phie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1907, 
Halle a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 113-118.) 

Szczepanik process. MFA 

960. Some points in the manipulation of 
Lumiere's autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1907, v. 54, p. 746-747.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



51 



1907 , continued. 

961. Stark, J. Latente Fluoreszenz und 
optische Sensibilisation. (Physikalische 
Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1907, Jahrg. 8, p. 248- 
250.) PAA 

Translation with comments in British journal of 
photography, London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 44-46, MFA. 

962. Steadman, Frank Morris. Color pho- 
tography with Lumiere autochrome plate, 
illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1907, v. 14, p. 395-400.) MFA 

Portraits of the inventors. 

963. Stenger, Erich. Aus der Praxis der 
Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photographische 
Kunst, Miinchen, 1905-06, Jahrg. 4, p. 161— 
167, 201-207, 323-329, 361-365; 1906-07, 
Jahrg. 5, p. 173-179.) f MFA 

964. — — Die Autochromplatte. illus. 
(Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphic, Leipzig, 1907, Bd. 5, p. 372-382.) 

PLC 

965. Film thickness and colour sensi- 
tiveness. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 13, 1907, v. 54, p. 932-933.) 

MFA 

Brief abstract. Claims increasing color sensitive- 
ness with increasing thickness of film. 

966. Lippmann-Photographie. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Aug. 21, 
1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 431-432.) f MFA 

967. Three-colour cameras, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
8, 1907, v. 54, p. 99-100.) MFA 

Apparatus of Hans Schmidt and of M. Geisler. 

968. Three-colour Lippmann photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 18, 1907, v. 54, p. 36-37.) MFA 

Brief reference to Herbert E. Ives' method of 
duplication. 

969. Tilney, F. C. Colour reproduction 
from the point of view of the man in the 
street. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 

970. The "Times" on colour processes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 20, 1907, v. 54, p. 718.) MFA 

Account of exhibition in which Lumiere pictures 
are compared with some of the older processes. 

971. Traube, Artur. Colored tones by the 
Traube iodide process. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 15, 1907, v. 
54, p. 196-197.) MFA 

972. Three-colour prints by the Traube 

iodide process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 26-28.) 

MFA 



973. Valenta, Eduard. Sensibilisierungs- 
versuche mit diversen Farbstoffen der 
Cyaningruppe. (Photographische Korre- 
spondenz, Wien, 1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 449- 
450.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 4, 1907, v. 54, p. 751, MFA. 

974. Wall, Edward John. Another colour 
process. (Photographic news, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v. 52, p. 547.) MFA 

Brief description of the Krayn process. 

975. Another three - colour printing 

process. (Photographic news, London, 
Sept. 6, 1907, v. 52, p. 231.) MFA 

Lieber process. 

976. The circulating portfolios of the 

Society of Colour Photographers. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, April 
5, 1907, v. 54, p. 31-32.) MFA 

Comments on work submitted by several colour 
photographers. 

977. Latent fluorescence and optical 

sensitising. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, June 7, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 45—46.) MFA 

Comments on paper by J. Stark. 

978. The Lumiere autochrome plate, 

(Photographic news, London, July 19, 
1907, v. 52, p. 63.) MFA 

Brief description. 

979. ■ The Lumiere autochrome plates. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 2, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 

980. ■ ■ A new three - colour camera. 

(Photographic news, London, Jan. 4, 1907, 
v. 51, p. 11.) MFA 

Schmidt apparatus. 

981. ■ The omnicolore plate. (Photo- 
graphic news, London, May 10, 1907, v. 51, 
p. 379.) MFA 

982. The Powrie-Warner colour proc- 
ess. (Photographic news, London, Oct. 4, 
1907, v. 52, p. 329.) MFA 

Brief description. 

983. A review of the exhibition. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 73-75.) MFA 

984. A review -of recent work in col- 
our sensitising. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1907, v. 54, p. 365-367, 
386-388, 406-407, 464-466.) MFA 

Footnote citations to a number of references. 

985. - — — A simpler method of working 
autochrome plates. (Photographic news, 
London, Nov. 8, 1907, v. 52, p. 451.) MFA 

Gravier process. 

986. ■ — — Some notable features of the 
Warner-Powrie process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 20, 1907, v. 
54, p. 710-711.) MFA 



52 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1907 , continued. 

987. Some notes on colour filter 

making. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 4, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4-5.) MFA 

988. Three-colour carbon work. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
1, 1907, v. 54, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9-10.) MFA 

989. Three-colour Lippmann pictures. 

(Photographic news, London, Feb. 8, 1907, 
v. 51, p. 111.) MFA 

Ives process. 

990. Three-colour negative-making as 

an evening amusement. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 5, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 50.) 

MFA 

Suggestion for a panchromatic flashlight. 

991. Wallace, Robert James. Studies in 
sensitometry. illus. (Astrophysical jour- 
nal, Chicago, 1907, v. 25, p. 116-150; v. 26, 
p. 298-325.) OMA 

1 : The daylight sensitometry of photographic plates, 
and a suggested standard dispersion piece. 2: Ortho- 
chromatism by bathing. 

992. Wallon, fitienne. Appareil pour la 
photographie des couleurs par dispersion 
prismatique de M. Cheron. illus. (Societe 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 537-542.) MFA 

993. ■ Paysages autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1907, annee 17, p. 
221-225.) MFA 

994. La photographie des couleurs et 

les plaques autochromes. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1907, serie 2, tome 23, p. 336-358.) MFA 

995. — La photographie des couleurs et 
les plaques autochromes; conference faite 
devant la Societe francaise de photogra- 
phie le 27 juin 1907, par E. Wallon; suivie 
d'une Notice sur le mode d'emploi des 
plaques autochromes, par MM. Lumiere. 
Paris: Gauthier-Villars, 1907. 39 p. table. 
4°. MFF p.v.54, no.6 

996. Watkins, Alfred. Actinometers and 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 1, 1907, v. 54, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 82-83.) MFA 

997. Exposure of autochromes by ac- 

tinometer. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 15, 1907, v. 54, p. 874.) 

MFA 

998. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Einige 
Beitrage zur Autochromphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1907, Jahrg. 44, p. 461-464.) MFA 

999. Einige Versuche mit der neuen 

Autochromplatte. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., Sept. 1, 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 
447_448.) f MFA 



1000. Experiments with the bleach- 
out printing process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1907, v. 54, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 28-29.) 

MFA 

1001. Naturfarbige Kopien auf Papier. 

(Photographische Welt, Leipzig, April, 
1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 49-51.) MFA 

Uto paper. 

1002. Worel, Karl. Direkte Farbenpho- 
tographie. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fur 1907, Halle 
a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 21, p. 5-8.) MFA 

Describes Uto paper. 

1003. New-comers in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 3, 1907, v. 54, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 36-37.) MFA 

Reviews recent advances. 

1004. Wratten & Wainwright. M screens. 
(Nature, London, April 18, 1907, v. 75, p. 
592.) OA 

Reference to their booklet on photomicrography and 
plates supplied by them. 

1005. A Year of colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 918-919.) MFA 



1908 

1006. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
A one-exposure three-colour camera, illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, Oct., 1908, 
new series, v. 32, p. 331-333.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 6-7, MFA. 

1007. Auerbach, Herbert. Ein kurzer Ueber- 
blick iiber die . Entwicklungsgeschichte 
der Photographie in natiirlichen Farben. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 295-298, 323-325, 339- 

341, 347-349.) fMFA 

1008. The Autochromes at the new gallery. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 25, 1908, v. 55, p. 734-735.) MFA 

Comments on London exhibition. 

1009. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
diamidophenol en liqueur acide au de- 
veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 55- 
58.) MFA 

1010. Bayley, R. Child. Lantern slides of 
autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, May, 1908, v. IS, p. 177-180.) 

MFA 

1011. Blackburn, H. E. Filters for three- 
plate color photography. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Sept., 1908, v. 15, p. 335- 

342. ) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



53 



1908, continued. 

1012. Brown, Edward Lumsden. On di- 
rect colour-photography by the Lumiere 
process. (Royal Scottish Society of Arts. 
Transactions, Edinburgh, 1908, v. 18, p. 
154-157.) VA 

1013. Calmels, H. ficrans colores de 
Wratten and Wainwright pour ortho- 
chromatisme, trichromie, photomicrogra- 
phie, usages scientifiques. illus. (Societe 
frangaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 340-343.) MFA 

1014. The Campbell anti - frilling dish. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

1015. Carpentier, J. La photographie des 
couleurs par les plaques autochromes de 
MM. Lumiere freres. (Societe des inge- 
nieurs civils de France. Memoires, Paris, 
1908, serie 6, annee 61, p. 962-972.) VDA 

1016. Carrara, Achille. An improved non- 
screen panchromatic plate by bathing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, supplement, p. 89-90; 
Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, supplement, p. 7-8.) 

MFA 

1017. Carter, Charles M. Painting and 
color photography. (American annual of 
photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
v. 13, p. 41-42.) MFA 

1018. Chaboseau, Robert. Observations 
sur l'emploi des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 349- 
358.) MFA 

Abstracted in British journal of photography , Lon- 
don, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, MFA. 

1019. Cheron, Andre. A modified appara- 
tus for the prismatic dispersion process, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 

1020. Chevrier, Henri. Montage des 
epreuves obtenues sur plaques auto- 
chromes. (Societe frangaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, 
tome 24, p. 257.) MFA 

1021. Claudy, Carl Harry. The autochrome 
plate and the microscope. (Bulletin of pho- 
tography, Philadelphia, 1908, v. 2, p. 105- 
106, 125-126, 145-146.) f MFA 

1022. Clifton, William E. A simplified 
system of developing autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
14, 1908, v. 55, p. 130-131.) MFA 

1023. Colour in autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 9, 
1908, v. 55, p. 765.) MFA 

Editorial rejoinder to criticism of autochromes at 
the Salon. 



1024. [Colour photographs of rock sec- 
tions.) (Nature, London, Jan. 2, 1908, v. 
77, p. 206.) OA 

Brief reference to Lumiere photographs taken by 
J. W. Patterson. 

1025. Colour photography and crime. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 

Reference to blood-stained garments photographed 
by autochrome process. 

1026. Colour transparencies by artificial 
light. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 445.) MFA 

1027. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The "Thames" 
one-exposure colour plate, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 20, 
1908, v. 55, p. 884-886.) MFA 

1028. Courtellemont, G. Autochromes on 
tour. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908,. v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 46.) MFA 

A record of 1,300 pictures taken in the Near East. 
Brief reference to exposures required; also of de- 
velopment. 

1029. Coustet, Ernest. Conseils pratiques 
sur l'emploi des plaques autochromes. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, Feb. 25, 1908, annee 
18, p. 72-78.) MFA 

1030. La photographie en couleurs sur 

plaques a filtres colores. Paris: B. Tignol 
[1908,. viii, 91 p. 12°. (Bibliotheque des 
actualites industrielles. no. 118.) MFV 

1031. Le procede Diachrome. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1908, annee 18, p. 
197-200.) MFA 

Traube's process. 

1032. Le temps de pose des plaques 

autochromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, April 
25, 1908, annee 18, p. 111-115.) MFA 

1033. Cremier, Victor. Determination du 
temps de pose pour autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1908, annee 19, p. 
5-15.) MFA 

1034. Cundall, J. Tudor. Advances in color 
photography. (American photography, 
Boston, Aug., 1908, v. 2, p. 437-445.) MFA 

Paper read before the Edinburgh Photographic So- 
ciety. 

1035. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. Finlay. 
The examination of the positive of the 
Thames colour plate, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography,. London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
96.) MFA 

1036. A Development accessory for auto- 
chromes, panchromatic plates, etc. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 16.) MFA 

Developing tank of Messrs. Beck. 

1037. The Development of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 



54 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1908, continued. 

1038. Didier, Leon. Pinatype prints from 
autochrome and other screen-plate trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 35-37.) MFA 

1039. Dillaye, Frederic. Autochromes of 
bluish tones. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 20, 1908, v. 55, p. 
221.) MFA 

1040. Doncaster, E. D. The latest im- 
provements and applications of the 
Sanger-Shepherd process of colour-pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 

Abstract. 

1041. Dowier, Charles A. Acid amidol for 
the development of autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 3, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 

1042. Dowries, William Howe. Influence 
of the autochrome process upon art. 
(Photo-era, Boston, Jan., 1908, v. 20, p. 41- 
42.) MFA 

1043. Drake-Brockman, H. G. Autochrome 
photography for the tourist. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 5, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 

Suggestions as to developing equipment. 

1044. ■ Blueness with autochromes. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
May 8, 1908, v. 55, p. 371.) MFA 

1045. ■ Yellow light for the develop- 
ment of autochromes. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 80.) 

MFA 

1046. The Dufay screen - plate process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51-52.) MFA 

1047. Dye mordants. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
p. 110.) MFA 

1048. Edgson, Hugh. Washing autochrome 
plates, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 

1049. Emery, C. F. Autochrome plates in 
landscape work. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

Inquires why tones are colder in early summer 
than in September. 

1050. The "Ensign" clock for autochrome 
development. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 



1051. The Exhibition of colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 12, 1908, v. 55, p. 449.) MFA 

Second exhibition of the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. 

1052. Exposure with autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 10-11.) MFA 

1053. Fabry, Charles. La photographie 
des couleurs. (Societe scientifique indus- 
trielle de Marseille. Bulletin, Marseille, 
1908, annee 36, fascicule unique, p. 7-21.) 

VA 

1054. Ferrars, Max. Die Autochrom- 
Platte von Lumiere. (Photographische 
Welt, Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 2.) 

MFA 

Suggestions for exposure. 

1055. Weitere Erfahrungen mit der 

Autochromplatte. (Photographische Welt, 
Leipzig, Jan., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 3-4.) MFA 

1056. Finlay, C. L. t The Thames colour- 
screen plate.] (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 17, 1908, v. 55, p. 312.) 

MFA 

With discussion. 

1057. Gimpel, Leon. Autochromes from 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 61.) MFA 

1058-1059. ■ Reproduction sur plaques 

autochromes des epreuves obtenues sur 
ses memes plaques. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1908, annee 18, p. 222-225.) MFA 

Also in Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 317-320, MFA. 

1060. Goerz. Chassis special pour plaques 
autochromes de Lumiere. illus. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 308-310.) MFA 

1061. Goldberg, E. Farbenphotographie 
und Farbendruck. Leipzig: Deutscher 
Buchgewerbeverein, 1908. 84 p., 12 pi. 16°. 
(Alonographien des Buchgewerbes . . . Bd. 
2.) MFV 

1062. Goldschmidt, Robert. La photogra- 
phie des couleurs. (Universite [librej de 
Bruxelles. Revue, Bruxelles, 1908, annee 
13, p. 317-336.) * EM 

Also printed in Societe chimique de Belgique. 
Bulletin, Gand, 1908, v. 22, p. 20-37, PKA. 

1063. Goutcher, A. Winton. The fixing 
bath in autochrome work. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 20, 
1908, v. 55, p. 227.) MFA 

1064. Grant, Thomas K. Autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 20, 1908, v. 55, p. 895-896.) MFA 

Lecture before the Croydon Camera Club. Discusses 
exposure, intensification, and avoidance of spots. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



55 



1908, continued. 

1065. Gravier, Charles. Daylight develop- 
ment of autochromes by the Gravier 
method, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 10, 1908, v. 55, p. 
34, Colour photography supplement, Jan. 3, 
1908, p. 34.) MFA 

1066. Gray, Edward. An amateur's first 
experience with autochrome plates. (Cam- 
era craft, San Francisco, April, 1908, v. 15, 
p. 132-134.) MFA 

1067. Grimsehl, E. Ein eigentiimlicher 
stereoskopischer Effekt. illus. (Physika- 
lische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1908, Jahrg. 9, 
p. 109-110.) PAA 

Professor von Rohr comments upon this effect in 
Physikalische Zeitschrift, 1908, Jahrg. 9, p. 201-202. 
There is a translation of these two contributions in 
British journal of photoaraphy , April 24, 1908, v. 55, 
p. 328-329, with comments on p. 338, 350, MFA. 

"Interesting, not only because it suggests a pretty 
way of obtaining stereoscopic diagrams, but also be- 
cause it may explain why the coloured starch grains 
are sometimes so noticeable when viewing autochrome 
pictures in the stereoscope." 

1068. Guebhard, Adrien. Ueber den Lu- 
miereschen photographischen Farbenpro- 
zess. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fur 1908, Halle 
a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 164-167.) MFA 

1069. Holme, Charles, editor. Colour pho- 
tography, and other recent developments 
of the art of the camera. London, Paris 
and New York: Offices of "The Studio," 
1908. 4 p.l., 9(1) p., 113 pi. (18 col'd.). 4°. 

t MFV 

1070. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
colour properties of the autochrome plate 
and the processes of producing auto- 
chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 82-85.) 

MFA 

1071. The colours of the autochrome 

pictures in regard to their production. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 93-95.) MFA 

1072. ■ Die Farbenphotographie. (Pho- 

tographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
Jahrg. 45, p. 446-450.) MFA 

Names various characteristics of the autochrome 
plate. 

1073. On the sensitiveness of the auto- 
chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 

1074. Temperature in development. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 



1075. The theory of the autochrome 

plate, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5-7.) MFA 

1076. Zur Charakteristik der modern- 
en Farbenphotographie. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1908, 
Jahrg. 45, p. 496-502.) MFA 

1077. Husnik, Jaroslav. Meine Erfahr- 
ungen mit Lumieres Autochromplatten. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 49-57.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 20, MFA. 

1078. Ueber die gleichmassige Far- 

benempfindlichkeit bei Autochromplatten. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrg. 22, p. 127-128.) MFA 

1079. Intensification of the autochrome. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 76.) MFA 

Suggests Monkhoven's silver cyanide process. 

1080. Ives, Herbert Eugene. An experi- 
mental study of the Lippmann color pho- 
tograph. (Astrophysical journal, Chicago, 
1908, v. 27, p. 325-352.) OMA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1908, v. 55, p. 942-944, 965-967, 979-982, 
MFA, and in Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Pho- 
tographie, Leipzig, 1908, v. 6, p. 373^106, PLC. 

1081. Jones, Chapman. Autochrome plates. 
(Knowledge & scientific news, London, 
May, 1908, new series, v. 5, p. 104.) OA 

Method of intensifying apparently useless plates. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 46, MFA. 

1082. Kinematography in natural col- 
ours. (Nature, London, May 7, 1908, v. 78, 
p. 21.) OA 

Brief account of G. Albert Smith's method. 

1083. The photography of colour. 

(Science progress, London, 1908, v. 2, p. 
349-368.) OA 

An excellent historical article. 

1084. Jones, T. H. Simplified development 
of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, v. 55, p. 
171.) . MFA 

1085. Juhl, Ernst. A Hamburg view of the 
work of Muller and the Hofmeisters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, p. 752-753.) MFA 

1086. Koenig, Ernst. Die Autochrom- 
Photographie und die verwandten Dreifar- 
benraster-Verfahren. Berlin: G. Schmidt, 
1908. 3 p.l., 60 p. 8°. (Photographische 
Bibliothek. Bd. 23.) MFV 

1087. Laurvik, John Nilsen. The new color 
photography, illus. (International studio, 
New York, 1908, v. 34, p. xxi-xxiii.) fMAA 



56 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1908, continued. 

1088. Law, E. F. Application of colour 
photography to metallography. (Iron and 
Steel Institute. Journal, London, 1908, 
v.76, p. 151-154.) VHA 

With discussion. 

For comments see British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 54, MFA. 

1089. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Ad- 
vances in the taking, viewing, and projec- 
tion of the Lippmann colour photographs, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

Editorial comment is appended. 

1090. The Purkinje phenomenon in 

photographic plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 11.) 

MFA 

1091. Ueber die Abstimmung der 

Lippmann - Platte. illus. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 157- 
164.) MFA 

1092. Lenses for colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Homocentric lenses from Ross, Ltd. 

1093. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Zur Ge- 
schichte der Farbenrasterfilms. (Jahr- 
buch fur Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fur 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Tahrg. 
22, p. 147-151.) MFA 

1094. Limmer, Fr. tiber Farbenausbleich- 
papiere. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 463-467.) 

MFA 

1095. Litchfield, Charles. Exposure in 
autochrome work and the use of different 
compensation filters. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 24.) 

MFA 

1096. Locquin, Rene. Autochromes by 
artificial light. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 75-76.) 

MFA 

Recommends a blue viewing screen between the 
autochrome and the source of light. 

1097. Simplifying the handling of 

autochrome plates. (Bulletin of photog- 
raphy, Philadelphia, Oct. 21, 1908, v. 3. p. 
259.) t MFA 

1098. Lohmeyer, R. The gradation of 
plates in different colored lights. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 1, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 



1099. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Chromodiascope. Appareil pour la vision 
des photographies polychromes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 486-487.) MFA 

1100. A new method of developing 

autochrome plates. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, July, 1908, v. 2, p. 361-366.) 

MFA 

1101. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. 
Screen-plate processes of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 

1102. Ueber die Entwicklung der 

Autochromplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
far 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 179- 
188.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 197-207, MFA. 

1103. Luther, R. Some points in stereo- 
scopic photography with the autochrome 
plate, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 85-87.) MFA 

1104. Mcintosh, J. Along the Thames 
with the autochrome plate. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
65-66.) MFA 

Interview in which the author gives some details of 
development. 

1105. The light filter in autochrome 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 

Takes exception to statements of Alfred Watkins 
in above journal, Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, supplement, p. 

73-74. 

1106. Mareschal, G. La cuvette "Marbach" 
pour developpement en plein jour des 
plaques autochromes. illus. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 289-291.) MFA 

1107. Emploi de plaques autochromes 

en voyage. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 
1908, annee 18, p. 130-131.) MFA 

Experiences of Gervais-Courtellemont. 

1108. Nouvelle methode de developpe- 
ment des plaques autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, June 25, 1908, annee 18, p. 
152-155.) MFA 

1109. Marriage, Ernest. Autochrome lan- 
tern slides. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Dec. 16, 1908, v. 55, p. 970.) 

MFA 

Advice for correcting deficiency of blue in lime- 
light. 

Also printed in Camera craft, May, 1909, v. 16, 
p. 187, MFA. 

1110. Martin-Duncan, F. The autochrome 
plate applied to natural science. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, April, 1908, new 
series, v. 32, p. 172-178.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



57 



1908, continued. 

1111. The autochrome plate in natural 

science. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1.) MFA 

Suggestions for working plates in a biological lab- 
oratory. 

1112. Massiot, G. Materiel complet pour 
la projection des vues en couleurs sur 
plaques autochromes. (Societe frangaise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1908, 
serie 2, tome 24, p. 207-208.) MFA 

1113. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
construction of one-exposure cameras for 
three-colour photography, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 58-60.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Royal Photo- 
graphic Society. 

1114. [A one - exposure three-colour 

camera.; illus. (Photographic journal, 
London, July, 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 
276-280.) MFA 

1115. The photography of coloured 

objects in principle and practice, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1908, v. 55, p. 735-737, 754-756, 770-772, 
788-791.) MFA 

1116. Screen-plate colour photogra- 
phy. (Society of Arts. Journal, London, 
Jan. 17, 1908, v. 56, p. 195-205.) VA 

With discussion. 

Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, 1908, v. 55, p. 41-42, supplement, p. 12-15, 
MFA. 

1117. Some measurements of Uto 

paper, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 17-18.) 

MFA 

1118. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
S. H. Wratten. Plates sensitised with di- 
cyanin and photography of the infra-red. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, p. 25-37.) MFA 

1119. A Modified method for the assem- 
bling of three - colour prints on rotary 
stripping film. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 

Use of carbon-stripping films supplied by Rotary 
Photographic Co., Ltd. 

1120. Monpillard, Felix. Methods of de- 
velopment and after - treatment. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 3, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 49-51.) MFA 

As applied to autochrome positive. 

1121. Observations sur la technique 

des manipulations des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Societe frangaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 
24, p. 231-242.) MFA 



1122. Munro, L. Walker. Screen -plate 
processes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Appreciation of the Warner-Powrie process. 

1123. Namias, Rodolfo. The preparation 
of non - filter orthochromatic plates by 
bathing. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 

Experiments with Konig's formula. 

1124. Eine Neue Lumieresche Farbraster- 
platte. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 372-373.) MFA 

1125. The New Lumiere screen -plate, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1908, v. 21, 
p. 196-197, MFA. 

1126. A New Lumiere screen-plate process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 24, 1908, v. 55, p. 557-558.) MFA 

Abstract of French patent no. 386,147. 

1127. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Zur 
Farbenphotographie. illus. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 
223-232.) MFA 

Principally devoted to Warner-Powrie process. 

1128. Peaucellier, A. An exposure meter 
for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 27.) 

MFA 

1129. Permanganate stains on auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 19, 1908, v. 55, p. 465.) 

MFA 

1130. Personnaz, Antonin. A propos des 
autochromes. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, 
tome 24, p. 179-183, 368-378.) MFA 

Time of exposure and development for outdoor 
work. 

1131. Poulenc Freres. Lanterne speciale 
pour plaques autochromes, construite par 
les fitablissements Poulenc. illus. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 487-488.) 

MFA 

1132. Power, H. D'Arcy. Autochrome 
notes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 

1908, v. 15, p. 31-33.) MFA 

Various Suggestions for working. 

1133. — — ■ Color photography. (Camera 
craft, San Francisco, 1908, v. 15, p. 311, 353; 

1909, v. 16, p. 29, 73-74, 186-187, 321, 369.) 

Notes on progress. MFA 

1134. The Lumiere autochrome plate. 

(Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 1908, 
v. 15, p. 20-23.) MFA 



58 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1908, continued. 

1135. A new color plate. (Camera 

craft, San Francisco, June, 1908, v. 15, p. 
229-230.) MFA 

1136. A new method of developing 

autochrome plates. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Sept., 1908, v. 15, p. 353-354.) 

MFA 

Lumiere's new instructions. 

1137. Progress in autochrome color 

work. (Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1908, v. 15, p. 228.) MFA 

1138. Screen-plate color photography. 

(Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 
1908, v. 15, p. 110-111.) MFA 

An epitome of opinions on development of auto- 
chromes. 

1139. Simplified development of auto- 
chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1908, v. 15, p. 215-216.) MFA 

1140. Powrie, John H. The Warner- 
Powrie process of screen plate colour 
photography, illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, Jan., 1908, new series, v. 32, 
p. 3-10.) MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 6, 1907, v. 54, p. 928-929, MFA. 

1141. Rawlins, G. E. H. Persulphate v. 
permanganate as the reversing solution 
for autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 43-44.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era. Boston,- Sept., 1908, 
v. 21, p. 109-111, MFA. 

1142. Raymond, R. Paper prints from 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, p. 97- 
98.) MFA 

1143. Removing black spots from auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 96.) MFA 

1144. Rockwood, George A. Color pho- 
tography direct in the camera — impres- 
sions of a veteran professional. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, July 8, 1908, 
v. 3, p. 30-31.) fMFA 

Autochrome process. 

1145. S., J. C. The autochrome process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 72.) MFA 

Deals with sulphide toning. 

1146. Sacco, Giulio. Aberrazioni e rifles- 
sioni nocive prodotte dai filtri di luce negli 
apparechi fotografica. illus. (Reale ac- 
cademia delle scienze di Torino. Atti, To- 
rino, 1907-08, v. 43, p. 767-782, 856-874.) 

MFA 

Translated abstract in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, p. 53-56, MFA. 



1147. Schaum, Karl. On the colour of un- 
toned photographic films. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 28, 1908, 
v. 55, p. 157-158.) MFA 

1148. Scheffer, W. Mikroskopische Unter- 
suchungen der Autochromplatten. illus. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1908, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrg. 22, p. 96-110.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25-27, MFA. 

1149. Stripping autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 87-88.) MFA 

1150. Schinzel, Karl. Methoden der Kata- 
chromie. (Chemiker Zeitung, Cothen, July 
11, 1908, Jahrg. 32, p. 665-668.) ft VOA 

Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v. 55. supplement, p. 61-64, 
under the title: Suggested catalytic methods of screen- 
plate photography. 

1151. Schmidt, Hans. Das Dreifarben- 
raster-Verfahren der Deutschen Raster 
Gesellschaft. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fur 1908, Halle 
a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 95-96.) MFA 

1152. Sheppard, Samuel Edward. On the 
optical and sensitising properties of the 
isocyanin dyes. (Photographic journal. 
London, Aug., 1908, new series, v. 32, p 
300-318.) MFA 

Latter part of paper in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, p. 678-681, MFA 

1153. Shivas, E. The autochrome process 
(British journal of photography, London 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

Complains that his blacks are blues. Editorial 
suggestions. 

1154. Simmen, Charles. An amidol for- 
mula for development of autochromes by 
inspection. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 

1155. Possibility de developper les 

plaques autochromes en lumiere rouge, 
jaune ou verte. Variation de leur sensi- 
bilite. Appreciation du temps de pose, 
illus. (Societe frangaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 24, p. 36- 
43.) MFA 

1156. Smillie, Thomas W. Recent prog- 
ress in color photography, illus. (Smith- 
sonian Institution. Annual report 1907, 
Washington, 1908, p. 231-237.) * EA 

1157. Smith, G. Albert. Animated photo- 
graphs in natural colours. (Royal Society 
of Arts. Journal, London, Dec. 11, 1908, 
v. 57, p. 70-76.) VA 

With discussion. 

Abstract in British journal of photography , Lon- 
don, Dec. 18, 1908, v. 55, p. 960-961, MFA, and in 
Nature, London, Jan. 14, 1909, v. 79, p. 314, OA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



59 



1908, continued. 

1158. Smith, John H. Leuco dyes v. the 
bleach-out process. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

1159. Sensitisers and desensitisers for 

bleach-out dyes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 81-82.) 

MFA 

1160. The "Uto" bleach-out process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 68-69.) MFA 

1161. Spots on autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 

1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 95.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 

1909, v. 16, p. 29-30, MFA. 

1162. Stained hands in autochrome work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 87.) MFA 

1163. Steichen, Eduard J. Colour photog- 
raphy, illus. (Camera work, New York, 
1908, no. 22, p. 13-24.) f MFA 

1164. Colour photography with the 

autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 17, 1908, v. 55, 
p. 300-302.) MFA 

Notes on development and artificial lighting. 

1165. Stenger, Erich. The Krayn screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 23-24.) 

MFA 

1166. Linienrasterplatten fur Farben- 

photographie. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Feb. 16, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 87- 
90.) t MFA 

1167. Mosaic or line screen - plates 

from three-colour negatives. (British 
journal of photography, April 3, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 30-31.) 

MFA 

1168. Die Transparenz der neuen Farb- 

rasterplatten. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., April 15, 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 193- 
194.) t MFA 

1169. Stenger, Erich, and Ferdinand Lei- 
ber. On the preparation of copies of 
screen-plate transparencies, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
69-72, 76-79.) MFA 

1170. The preparation of paper prints 

from autochrome plates by means of the 
leuco bases, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 1, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 34-35.) 

MFA 



1171. Stieglitz, Alfred. Formalin for ob- 
viating the frilling of autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54.) MFA 

1172. Stobbe, Hans. Die Photochemie 
organischer Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
fur Elektrochemie, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 
14, p. 473-483.) PKA 

1173. Stolze, F. Belichtungsverhaltnisse 
fur Dreifarbenfilter. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1908, 
Jahrg. 15, p. 379-380.) fMFA 

1174. Farbenerscheinungen bei Gela- 

tineemulsionen. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., 1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 431-432.) 

f MFA 

1175. Szczepanik, Jan. Transformation 
photographs on autochrome plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 

1176. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1908, v. 
55, p. 765, 802; Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24, 72.) MFA 

1177. The Thames one - exposure colour 
process, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 89-92.) 

MFA 

1178. Thieme, Paul. Alcohol as an after- 
bath in colour - sensitising dry plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

Describes a variation of procedure recommended 
by Valenta for rapid bath-sensitising of gelatine 
plates. 

1179. Three-colour filters. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, 
v. 55, p. 111-112.) MFA 

Several questions answered editorially and formulas 
for red, green, and blue given. 

1180. Tilney, F. C. Exhibition of photo- 
graphic pictures in colours by T. and O. 
Hofmeister and H. W. Miiller. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
1908, v. 55, p. 752-753.) MFA 

1181. Where we stand in pictorial col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 66-68.) 

MFA 

1182. Torchon, Paul. A new method of 
developing autochrome plates. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, Aug. 19, 
1908, v. 3, p. 117-118.) fMFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Nov., 1908, 
v. 21, p. 222-223, MFA. 

1183. Sulphide toning in autochrome 

work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 60.) MFA 



60 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1908, continued. 

1184. Traut, H. Beitrage zur Geschichte 
der Dreifarbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., Jan. 26, 
1908, Jahrg. 15, p. 49-54.) f MFA 

Reviews the work of Joseph Alberts from 1874 to 

1883. 

1185. Tschoerner, Ludwig. Uber Otto 
Pfenningers Photographien in natiirlichen 
Farben. illus. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 496- 
502.) MFA 

1186. L'Unichrome. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 47.) MFA 

A universal developer especially designed for auto- 
chrome plates. 

1187. Valenta, Eduard. Experiments on 
the sensitising power of some new dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 

1188. Two varnish formulae. (British 

journal of photography, London, March 6, 
1908, v. 55, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 20.) MFA 

1189. Uber die Autochromeplatte. 

illus. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1908, Jahrg. 45, p. 24-29.) MFA 

Description and development directions. 

1190. Zur Kenntnis der Autochrom- 

platten. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fur 1908, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 143-145.) MFA 

1191. Van Deventer, J. G. The Warner- 
Powrie method. (Nature, London, Aug. 
20, 1908, v. 78, p. 376.) OA 

Abstract. 

1192. Wall, Edward John. A diagramma- 
tic explanation of the autochrome process, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 55-56.) MFA 

1193. A green - light carbon, illus. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
April 3, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 

1194. The H. & D. number of the auto- 
chrome plate, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, July 3, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 56.) 

MFA 

1195. The Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers' exhibition. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 41.) 

MFA 

1196. Wallace, Robert James. The auto- 
chrome plate. (Popular astronomy, 
Northfield, Minn., 1908, v. 16, p. 83-91.) 

OMA 

Partial reprint in British journal of photography, 
London, March 6, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 21-23, MFA. 

Gives results of precise measurements. 



1197. The function of a color -filter 

and isochromatic plate in astronomical 
photography. (Astrophysical journal, Chi- 
cago, 1908, v.27, p. 106-124.) OMA 

1198. Wallon, fltienne. Autochromie et tri- 
chromie. (Societe francaise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1908, serie 2, tome 
24, p. 381-402.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-qazette , Paris, Dec. 25, 1908, 
annee 19, p. 23-30, MFA. 

1199. Warburg, J. C. Monsieur Meys' 
autochrome pictures. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1908, v. 55, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 33-34, 48.) 

MFA 

Description of exhibition at Cannes. 

1200. Ward, John J. A remedy for flat 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 3, 1908, v. 55, p. 8.) 

MFA 

1201. The Warner - Powrie screen - plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 4, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 72.) MFA 

1202. Watkins, Alfred. The light filter in 
autochrome photography. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Dec. 4, 1908, 
v. 55, Colour photography supplement, p. 
96.) MFA 

1203. A simple autochrome method. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1908, v. 55, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 73-74.) MFA 

Suggestions for exposure and development. 

Also printed in Bulletin of photography , Philadel- 
phia, Nov. 4, 1908, v. 3, p. 293-296, iMFA, and 
Photo-era, Boston, Feb., 1909, v. 22, p. 83-89, MFA. 

1204. The Watkins special Bee meter for 
autochrome plates, made by the Watkins 
Meter Co., Hereford. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 7, 1908, v. 55, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 15-16.) 

MFA 

1205. Worel, Karl. Das Verfahren mit den 
Autochromplatten der Gebriider Lumiere. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fiir 1908, Halle a. S., 
1908, Jahrg. 22, p. 49-53.) MFA 

1206. Zeiss autochrome accessories. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Tan. 
10, 1908, v. 55, p. 30-31.) MFA 

Reference to camera and to carrier for light filter. 



1909 

1207. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Exposures for colour negatives. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Oct., 1909, new 
series, v. 33, p. 341-342.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, p. 2-3, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



61 



1909, continued. 

1208. Adan, R. Nouveau procede d'obten- 
tion de plaques, pour la photographie des 
couleurs, de M. Szczepanik. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 331-333.) MFA 

1209. Alcide Ducos du Hauron. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

1210. The Aurora colour plate. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23.) MFA 

1211. Autochrome plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 26, 1909, 
v. 56, p. 257.) MFA 

Brief reference to reduction in price. 

1212. Bayley, R. Child. Color plates com- 
pared, illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 89-90.) 

f MFA 

Comparison of Thames and Omnicolore plates. 

1213. Comparisons of colour screen- 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 29, 1909, v. 56, p. 89.) MFA 

Praises the autochrome. 

1214. The complete photographer. 

New York: Doubleday, Page & Co., 1909. 
xv, 410 p., 1 1., 60 pi., 5 ports. 3. ed. illus. 
8°. MFE 

Clear account of autochrome principle, p. 283-291. 

1215. Reproduction par contact et par 

reduction des chromotypes sur plaques 
autochromes. (Societe franchise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, 
tome 25, p. 325-329.) MFA 

1216. Bennett, Colin N. The Thames plate 
as a fix-out process, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, 
v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
57-59.) MFA 

Non-reversal duplication process. 

1217. Thames plates and colour ad- 
justments. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 89-90.) MFA 

1218. The Bleachout process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 88.) MFA 

Refers to German patent no. 209993 of Dr. H. 
Stobbe. 

1219. Bordeaux, Jules. La photographie 
et les couleurs. (Revue generale, Bru- 
xelles, 1909, v. 90, p. 905-922.) * DM 

1220. Bourke, Walter. An autochrome ex- 
perience. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 17, 1909, v. 56, p. 735.) MFA 

Asks why the color disappeared from an auto- 
chrome elate after having been finished in the usual 



way. Answers from three correspondents in above 
journal, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 80. 

1221. Bourree, M. H. Practical notes on 
the autochrome process. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 5, 1909, 
v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
22.) MFA 

Directions for developing, reducing, and drying. 

1222. Calmels, H. Nouveaux ecrans colo- 
res de Wratten and Wainwright, Ltd. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 409- 
410.) MFA 

1223. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The intensi- 
fication of autochromes. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, p. 64.) 

MFA 

1224. Cheron, Andre. Appareil pour la 
photographie et la projection en couleurs 
par selection trichrome. illus. (Societe 
franchise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 117-121.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1909, 
annee 19, p. 109-112, MFA. 

1225. A portable camera for one-ex- 
posure colour photography, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 20-21.) MFA 

1226. Collodion emulsion. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Sept. 17, 
1909, v. 56, p. 730.) MFA 

Tells how to avoid spots. 

1227. Colour photography at the Dresden 
Exhibition. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 

1228. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
phy. (In: J. B. Schriever, Complete self- 
instructing library of practical photogra- 
phy. Scranton, 1909. 8°. v. 8, p. 507-556.) 

MFD 

Detailed instructions for autochromes, three-color 
photography, and pinatype. 

1229. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Studio por- 
traiture with the Thames plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 65-66.) • MFA 

1230. Uto prints from the Thames 

plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1909, v. 56, p. 23-24.) 

MFA 

1231. Coustet, Ernest. Les plaques omni- 
colores. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
April 25, 1909, annee 19, p. 101-108.) MFA 

Details of exposure and development. 

1232. Cremier, Victor. Pour les debutants 
"Autochromistes." (Photo-gazette. Paris, 
Sept. 25, 1909, annee 19, p. 190-195.) MFA 

Exposure and development. 



62 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1909, continued. 

1233. Some essential points in the 

autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 94.) 

MFA 

1234. Sur la traduction des couleurs 

par la plaque "autochrome." (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 1909, annee 20, 
p. 4-12.) MFA 

1235. Dalmas, R., comte de. Produit pour 
l'inversion des plaques autochromes en 
voyage. (Societe francaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1909; serie 2, tome 
25, p. 102-103.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 40, MFA. 

1236. Damry, A. On the intensification of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 

1237. Daur, Guido. Mixtures of dyes as 
sensitisers of gelatine plates, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1909, 
v. 56, p. 572-575, 592-595, 610-612, 630-633, 
649-652.) MFA 

An abridged translation of thesis presented at the 
University of Munster. 

1238. Developing panchromatic plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 546.) MFA 

Brief reference to acid developer for red sensitive 
plates. German patent granted to R. Krayn. 

1239. Devices for the automatic demonstra- 
tion of facts of light, colour, and photog- 
raphy, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1909, v. 56, p. 476-480, 499- 
501.) MFA 

Devices used by Dr. Goldberg at the Dresden Exhi- 
bition. 

1240. Dillaye, Frederic. Le developpe- 
ment surveille des plaques autochromes. 
illus. (In his: Les nouveautes photo- 
graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p. 108- 
117.) MFA 

1241. Expose et critique d'un nouveau 

mode de traitement des plaques auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautes photo- 
graphiques 1909. Paris, 1909. 8°. p. 117- 
124.) MFA 

1242. D'Osmond, H. Le portrait instan- 
tane sur autochromes. illus. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, June 25, 1909, annee 19, p. 
141-146.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, p. 60-61, MFA. 

1243. Drake - Brockman, H. G. Auto- 
chromes and extremes of contrast. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 73.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, March 25, 

1910, annee 20, p. 86-89, MFA. 



1244. The Dufay dioptichrome screen- 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 39.) MFA 

1245. Engelken. Ozo-pinatype in mono- 
chrome and colour photographs. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 36-37.) MFA 

1246. Facsimile reproduction of coloured 
originals. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, April 23, 1909, v. 56, p. 328.) 

MFA 

Editorial comment that Dr. Mees's book omits a 
certain process. Dr. Mees answers in the issue of 
April 30, 1909, v. 56, p. 348. 

1247. The Fading of the autochrome col- 
our screen. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 9, 1909, v. 56, p. 540.) 

MFA 

1248. Farbige Kinematographen - Aufnah- 
men (Kinemacolor). (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 120- 
121.) MFA 

1249. Farmer, Howard. The reproduction 
of autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 71-72.) 

MFA 

1250. Fenske, E. The Aurora colour filter- 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1251. A method of producing positives 

direct on gelatine plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

1252. Flashlight autochrome portraits. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Method of Mr. B. J. Falk. 

1253. Forestier, E. Photographie des cou- 
leurs. Trichromie. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1909, annee 19, p. 208-212.) MFA 

Geisler process. 

1254. Four-colour stereoscopic photogra- 
phy, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 29, 1909, v. 56, p. 88.) 

MFA 

British patent no. 28764 of 1907. For comments 
see issue of Feb. 25, 1909, v. 56, p. 98. 

1255. Frank, Max. Die Farbenphotogra- 
phie auf der Dresdener Ausstellung. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., Oct. 13, 
1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 513-515.) f MFA 

1256. Friedburg, L. H. Ueber die Photo- 
graphie in Farben. illus. (Technologist. 
New York, 1909, v. 14, p. 137-157.) VA 

Historical. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



63 



1909, continued. 

1257. Fritz, Felix. A suggested modifica- 
tion of the Krayn screen-plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 8.) MFA 

1257a. Gargam de Moncetz. Formule de 
sensibilisation chromatique pour le rouge 
extreme et le commencement de l'infra 
rouge. (Academie des sciences. Comptes 
rendus, Paris, Nov. 15, 1909, tome 149, p. 
851-852.) *EO 

1258. Gebhard, Kurt. Eine Bemerkung zum 
Ausbleichverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, Feb., 1909, Bd. 46, 
p. 63-65.) MFA 

1259. Nachtrag zur Theorie des Aus- 

bleichverfahrens. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, Dec, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
557.) MFA 

1260. Notiz zum Ausbleichverfahren. 

(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
June, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 280.) MFA 

1261. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichens 

organischer Farbstoffe. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, April, 1909, Bd. 46, 
p. 185-186.) MFA 

1262. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 

fahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 457-470, 508- 
517, 553-557.) MFA 

1263. Gephard, Karl. A contribution to 
the chemistry of the bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 

1264. Gilchrist, Charles A. Color photog- 
raphy, illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, 1909, v. 4, p. 379-380; v. 5, 
p. 8-9, 38-41.) t MFA 

General article. 

1265. The Goerz autochrome dark - slide, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

1266. Goldsmith, Alfred Norton. Modern 
practice in color photography. (School of 
Mines quarterly, New York, 1909, v. 30, p. 
130-138.) OA 

1267. Gravier, Charles. La photographie 
des couleurs simplified. (Societe franchise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, 
serie 2, tome 25, p. 411-412.) MFA 

Simplification of autochrome procedure. 

1268. A Half - guinea autochrome outfit. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Plates, filter, chemicals, measures, etc., supplied 
by The Lumiere N. A. Co. 

1269. The Henderson award. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 



1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 

Brief reference to grant to Mr. C. L. Finlay for 
his work in connection with the Thames plate. 

1270. Die Herstellung des Rasters der Om- 
nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., May 5, 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 227.) 

t MFA 

1271. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. An auto- 
chrome hint. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 

Method of overcoming blueness. 

1272. Houdaille. Recherches experimen- 
tales sur la determination du temps de 
pose des plaques autochromes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 292-297.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 69-71, MFA. 

1273. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
compensation filter for the autochrome 
plate, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 14-15, 17-18.) MFA 

1274. The correct orthochromatic 

light-filter, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 74-78.) 

MFA 

Author employs the sector-disc apparatus of Abney 
for measuring the luminosities of the colored papers 
used in making the test chart. 

1275. The effect of illumination on 

exposure and viewing of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-29.) MFA 

1276. [Metallic screens for auto- 
chromes.] illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 47.) MFA 

1277. ■ The sensitiveness of dyes to 

light. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 63-64.) MFA 

Use of glycerine, salts of arsenic, and other sub- 
stances to promote bleaching. 

1278. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photo- 
graphic optics and colour photography, in- 
cluding the camera, kinematograph, opti- 
cal lantern, and the theory and practice of 
image formation... London: Ward & 
Co., 1909. x, 332 p. illus. 8°. MFH 

1279. Jougla, J., the younger. Sur les 
plaques "Omnicolores" de la Societe 
Jougla. (Societe franchise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 
25, p. 199-203.) MFA 

1280. Klein, Henry Oscar. My experience 
with the autochrome plate. (American 
annual of photography for 1910, New 
York, 1909, v. 24, p. 130-133.) MFA 



64 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1909, continued. 

1281. Knowles, Hugh C. Screen plate 
color photography. (American annual of 
photography for 1910, New York, 1909, 
v. 24, p. 38-41.) MFA 

Discusses different commercial plates. 

1282. The Latest color plate — the Omni- 
colore. illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Feb. 10, 1909, v. 4, p. 88-89.) 

f MFA 

1283. Lefort, V. Les peintres et la photo- 
graphic des couleurs. (Photo - gazette, 
Paris, May 25, 1909, annee 19, p. 136-138.) 

Relation of color photography to art. MFA 

1284. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Highly 
reflecting lantern screens for autochrome 
and other projections. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 4, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44-47.) MFA 

1285. A three-colour projection lan- 
tern, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 

1286. Ueber einen neuen Projektions- 

schirm mit metallischer Oberflache fiir 
farbige und lichtswache Bilder. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., 1909, 
Jahrg. 16, p. 245-248, 256-260.) f MFA 

1287. Lelong, Adrien. Autochrome work 
without a dark-room. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 60.) 

MFA 

Describes developing dish and development. 

1288. A suggested method of obtain- 
ing paper prints from screen - plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

1289. Lenses for colour work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 15, 
1909, v. 56, p. 804.) MFA 

Recommends the Zeiss Apochromatic Tessar. 

1290. Leon, L. C. An unsuspected cause 
of failure in autochrome work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 64.) MFA 

Chromatic aberration due to unscrewed cell of lens. 

1291. Letouzey, V. Appareil pour voir par 
transparence les plaques a reseau poly- 
chrome, construit par M. E. Lorillon. 
illus. (Societe franchise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 83- 
84.) MFA 

1292. Limmer, Fr. Eine Betrachtung iiber 
die Fixierung von Farbenanpassungsbil- 
dern. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 226-227.) MFA 



1293. Ein Fortschritt auf dem Gebiete 

der indirekten Farbenphotographie. (Zeit- 
schrift fiir angewandte Chemie, Leipzig, 
1909, Jahrg. 22, p. 14-15.) PKA 

Szczepanik process. 

1294. Sensibilisatoren fiir das Farben- 

anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Jahrg. 46, p. 
4-14.) MFA 

Comment on Dr. Smith's article in British journal 
of photography on sensitizers and desensitizers for the 
bleachout process. 

1295. Die Szczepanik-Hollborn-Vera- 

colorplatte. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, Aug., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
373-379.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 49-51, MFA. 

1296. Eine Zusammenstellung der fiir 

das Farbenanpassungsverfahren wichtigen 
Literatur. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, March, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 104- 
106.) MFA 

Bibliography covering years 1801-1908. 

1297. Loewy, Alfred. Uber Dunkelkam- 
merbeleuchtung, Haltbarkeit der Auto- 
chromplatten und anderes aus der Praxis 
der Autochromphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, 
Bd. 46, p. 121-123, 159-166.) MFA 

Translation in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 37-38, MFA. 

Deals with darkroom safety light, a three-solution 
pyro formula, intensifying and reducing, tests for 
permanency, and the action of heat upon the plate. 

1298. Lotus, H. Nouveau procede de fab- 
rication de plaques en couleurs. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 1909, annee 20, p. 
36-37.) MFA 

Szczepanik process. 

1299. Lumiere, Auguste. Traitement 
simplifie des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 449-451.) 

MFA 

1300. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
A magazine apparatus for the viewing of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Communication to the Societe francaise de photo- 
graphie. Apparatus is called the chromodiascope. 

1301. Note sur un dispositif permet- 

tant de reproduire, par contact, des 
chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
chromes. illus. (Societe francaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, serie 
2, tome 25, p. 457-459.) MFA 

1302. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. Sur 
la correction de la surexposition et de la 
sousexposition au cours du developpe- 
ment dans le traitement simplifie des 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



65 



1909, continued. 

plaques autochromes. (Societe franchise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1909, 
serie 2, tome 25, p. 210-213.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 67, MFA. 

1303. ■ Ueber die Moglichkeit, den Ex- 

positionsgrad der Autochromplatten absu- 
schatzen und die Zusammensetzung des 
Entwicklers im Laufe der Entwicklung zu 
modifizieren, um die iiber- oder unterex- 
ponierten Bilder zu verbesseren. (Jahr- 
buch ftir Photographie und Reproduc- 
tionstechnik fur 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, 
Jahrg. 23, p. 27-31.) MFA 

1304. Luther, R. A new colour process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. S, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography- 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 

Process of Russian inventor Loundin. Claims that 
instantaneous exposures may be given. 

Also printed in Bulletin of photoqraphy, Philadel- 
phia, Dec. 29, 1909, v. 5, p. 408, fMFA. 

1305. Makers' instructions for the use of 
the "omnicolore" plates. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 

MFA 

Translated abstract of booklet issued by Messrs. 
Jougla. 

1306. Making autochromes by enclosed arc 
light. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 29, 1909, v. 56, p. 86.) MFA 

Brief reference to filter. 

1307. Malby, H. T., and others. The auto- 
chrome process in many hands. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March, 1909, new 
series, v. 33, p. 136-142.) MFA 

1308. Mareschal, G. The effect of develop- 
ing solution on the sensitiveness of the 
autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 88.) MFA 

1309. Emploi des plaques auto- 
chromes ayant subi Taction du developpe- 
ment. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Oct. 25, 1909, 
annee 19, p. 213.) MFA 

1310. Persistance de la sensibilite 

chromatique des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 410- 
411.) MFA 

1311. Reproduction des plaques en 

couleurs. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Dec. 25, 
1909, annee 20, p. 37-38.) MFA 

Results of prize contest by the journal La Vulgari- 
sation scientiftque. 

1312. Martin-Duncan, F. Some further 
experiments with the autochrome plate. 



(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25.) MFA 
Suggestions as to development. Use of special 
Lumiere screen made for microphotography with the 
electric arc. 

1313. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Characteristics of the "omnicolore" screen- 
plate, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 9-11.) MFA 

1314. Color and photography. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1910, New 
York, 1909, v. 24, p. 20-23.) MFA 

1315. — — The photography of coloured 
objects. New York: Tennant & Ward 
[1909]. vi, 69 p. illus. 8°. MFK 

Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 311, MFA. The Library 
also has 4th edition entered under Eastman Kodak 
Company. 

1316. ■ A report on the present condi- 
tion of sensitometry. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
p. 685-687.) MFA 

See section on color sensitometry. 

1317. Meister Lucius & Bruning. Instruc- 
tions for the use of Hoechst filter dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 79.) MFA 

1318. Merckens, W. Colour prints on 
paper by the bleachout process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 1-2.) MFA 

Suitable dyes for the purpose. Translation of part 
of an article in the Revue technique et industrielle. 

1319. Miethe, Adolf. Photographische 
Aufnahmen vom Ballon aus. Nach einer 
Serie von Vortragen, die im Auftrag des 
Berliner Vereins fur Luftschiffahrt gehal- 
ten worden sind. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm 
Knapp, 1909. 3 p.l., 70 p., 1 pi. 8°. (En- 
cyklopadie der Photographie. Heft 68.) 

MFP 

Contains a chapter on three-color aerial photogra- 
phy, for a translation of which see British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 86, MFA. 

1320. Unter der Sonne Oberagyptens 

neben den Pfaden der Wissenschaft. Ber- 
lin: Dietrich Reimer, 1909. 4 p.l., 263(1) p. 
illus. 8°. BLF 

"These [the illustrations] are not only in mono- 
chrome, but include some fifty examples of colour 
photography from nature by the three-exposure 
method, which Professor Miethe may be said to have 
used more extensively and to better effect than any- 
one else as a result of his introduction of the iso- 
cyanine sensitisers." — From a review in the British 
journal of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 56, MFA. 

1321. Miller, Malcolm Dean. The auto- 
chrome process. (American annual of 
photography for 1909, New York, 1908, 
v. 13, p. 77-78.) MFA 



66 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1909, continued. 

1322. Monpillard, Felix, ficran pour la 
microphotographie sur plaques auto- 
chromes, avec la lumiere oxyhydrique. 
(Societe francaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 245- 
247.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography- 
supplement, p. 61-62, MFA. 

1323. litude sur les dominantes colo- 

rees en photographie autochrome. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 404-409, 
419-426.) MFA 

1324. Indoor autochrome portraits by 

flashlight. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 51-52.) MFA 

From the Bulletin of the Societe franchise de 
photographie. 

1325. Mueller, Gustav. On the redevelop- 
ment of autochromes which have practi- 
cally disappeared in the fixing bath. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

1326. N., A. J. Imperfect register in three- 
colour work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 9, 1909, v. 56, p. 290.) 

MFA 

1327. Namias, Rodolfo. The conversion 
of silver images into those of lead and 
other metals and the use of the compounds 
as mordants for obtaining prints in dif- 
ferent colours. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 68- 
69.) MFA 

1328. Lead compounds as fixatives of 

dyes in three-colour projection. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 91.) MFA 

1329. New Lumiere plate. (Bulletin of 
photography, Philadelphia, Dec. 29, 1909, 
v. 5, p. 408.) f MFA 

Brief reference to autostereoscopic plate. 

1330. Niewenglowski, Gaston Henri. Col- 
oured films on metallic surfaces in relation 
to colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 5, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 

MFA 

Describes the experiments of Joseph Girard. 

1331. Obermayer, Albert, Edler von. Drei- 
farbenkameras fur einmalige Exposition 
u. a. — Die Dufay-Platte. illus. (Jahr- 
buch fur Photographie und Reproductions- 
technik fur 1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 
23, p. 170-176.) MFA 



1332. Die Omnicolor - Platte. (Photo- 
graphische Welt, Leipzig, April, 1909, 
Jahrg. 23, p. 49-51.) MFA 

Formulas for working. 

1333. The Omnicolore plate in practice. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 42-43.) MFA 

1334. The Omnicolore plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 4, 

1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) MFA 

1335. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 
7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 38-39.) MFA 

1336. The Omnicolore screen-plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 96.) MFA 

"It is very evident that omnicolore transparencies 
must be kept away from strong light if they are to be 
preserved." 

1337. Die Omnicolore-Platte fur Farben- 
photographie. (Photographische Mittei- 
lungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 74.) MFA 

1338. Palocsay, Albin von. Neue Erfah- 
rungen aus der Praxis des Autochrom- 
prozesses. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, Dec, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 
569-579.) MFA 

Apparatus for viewing. 

1339. Panchromatic collodion emulsion. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 16, 1909, v. 56, p. 557.) MFA 

Uses pinaverdol and ethyl violet. 

1340. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Color 
photography as a paying proposition. 
(American annual of photography for 

1910, New York, 1909, v. 24, p. 102-104.) 

MFA 

1341. Personnaz, Antonin. Apropos of 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 67-68.) MFA 

Defends autochromes as "art." 

1342. Pledge, John H. The properties of 
the Dufay dioptichrome screen-plate and 
the new Warner - Powrie screen - plate, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 81-83.) MFA 

1343. Poulenc Freres. Appareil pour l'ex- 
amen des vues par transparence et notam- 
ment des vues sur plaques autochromes. 
illus. (Societe francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1909, serie 2, tome 25, p. 
39-40.) MFA 

1344. Power, H. D'Arcy. Bromide prints in 
two or more colors, illus. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Oct., 1909, v. 16, p. 385-393.) 

MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



67 



1909, continued. 

1345. Simplified development of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 

Uses rodinal or amidol for the first development. 

1346. Powrie, John H. La "Florence helio- 
chromic plate." illus. (Societe frangaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1909, se- 
rie 2, tome 25, p. 386-393.) MFA 

1347. Practical methods of autochrome 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29—31.) MFA 

1348. Quentin, H. Color photography. 
The "omnicolor" plate. (Scientific Ameri- 
can supplement, New York, 1909, v. 67, p. 
359.) ft VA 

1349. Reproduction of screen - plate 

transparencies in paper. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 78-79.) 

MFA 

Three negatives are made from autochrome plate 
through appropriate screens and prints made by a 
method such as the three-color carbon process. 

1350. Renwick, F. F. Isolating the filter 
cuts of a screen-plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 95.) 

MFA 

1351. Reproductions of autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 96.) MFA 

Warns against entrusting autochromes to photo- 
engravers who are careless in regard to the heat from 
arc lights. 

1352. Revised prices of autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

Prices of different sized plates and of chemicals. 

1353. Scheffer, W. Further notes on the 
"omnicolore" plate, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 5, 
1909, v. 56, p. 18-19.) MFA 

1354. Notes on the degree of fineness 

of colour screen-plates, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 62-63.) MFA 

1355. Die Omnicolore - Platte, illus. 

(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 318-322, 482-484.) MFA 

1356. On a new type of Warner- 

Powrie screen-plate, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 4, 1909, 
v. 56, Colour photography supplement, p. 
43-44.) MFA 



1357. The structure and properties of 

the "omnicolore" plate, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 5, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11-13.) MFA 

1358. Schloemann, Eduard. Die neueren 
Forschungen in der Farbenphotographie 
nach Gabriel Lippmann. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 355- 
372, 407-414.) MFA 

Bibliography, p. 413-414. 

1359. Seyewetz, A. Die Autochromplatte. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 295-300, 309-312.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Congress of 
Applied Photography in Dresden. 

1360. Sforza, Francis. Autochromes and 
the Sterry method. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 95-96.) 

MFA 

States that the Sterry solution is useless as re- 
straining the development of autochrome plates. 

1361. Suggested processes of helio- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 

Hopes for "a sensitive film formed of a perfectly 
combined mixture of three emulsions sensitised for 
the three primary colours... to be developed by the 
most simple treatment." 

1362. Simplified treatment of autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 26.) MFA 

Suggestions by the Lumiere N. A. Co. 

1363. Smith, John H. Note on the influ- 
ence of the presence of photographic de- 
veloping agents in the bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23.) MFA 

1364. Printing frame for autochrome 

and other colour-screen positives, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 2-5.) MFA 

1365. Spots on autochromes. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 22, 1909, 
v. 56, p. 76.) MFA 

1366. Stereoscopic autochromes. (British 
' lurnal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 59.) MFA 

1367. Stobbe, Hans. Bleach -out colour 
photographs. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 56.) MFA 

Abstract of German patent. 

1368. Stolze, F. Belichtung fur die Schat- 
ten und Belichtungsverhaltnisse fur Drei- 
farbenfilter. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., March 3, 1909, Jahrg. 16, p. 117- 
118.) f MFA 



68 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1909, continued. 

1369. Streissler, Alfred. Ein neues Ras- 
ter fur die Farbenphotographie der Gebr. 
Lumiere. (Photographische Welt, Leip- 
zig, Aug., 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 121-122.) MFA 

D. R. P. No. 2077S0. 

1370. Szczepanik, Jan. Protective varnishes 
for the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1909, v. 
56, Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

1371. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 2, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 56.) MFA 

Extracts from instructions issued by the company. 

1372. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 66.) MFA 

Suggested development for new combined form of 
the plate. 

1373. The Thames colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1909, v. 
56, p. Ill, 150, 170, 186, 258.) MFA 

1374. Thames Colour Plate Company. 

Monochrome and colour results at one ex- 
posure. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 4, 1909, v. 56, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 

1375. The Thames Colour Plate Co. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 
1, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 80.) MFA 

Brief account of their exhibition. 

1376. The Thames Colour Plate, Ltd. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 96.) MFA 

Gives a list of the incorporators. 

1377. Thieme, Paul. Autochrom-Aufnah- 
men auf Reisen. (Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 81-84.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40, MFA. 

1378. Thovert, J. Instantaneous exposures 
on the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 2, 1909, v. 56, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 52-53.) 

MFA 

1379. Three - colour projection. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 3, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 72.) MFA 

The mirror in the Ives kromskop is replaced by a 
prism. 

1380. Toch, Maximilian. The Lumiere 
color process simplified. (American pho- 
tography, Boston, May, 1909, v. 3, p. 274- 
278.) MFA 

Suggestions for development. 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, July, 1909, v. 23, 
p. 20-23, MFA. 



1381. Valenta, Eduard. Einiges iiber Om- 
nicoloreplatte. (Photographische Korres- 
pondenz, Wien, May, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 234- 
236.) MFA 

For colored illustration showing grains of auto- 
chrome, omnicolore, Warner-Powrie, and Thames 
plates, see November number, opp. p. 552. 

1382. Meine Erfahrungen mit der 

"Omnicoloreplatte." (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 
graphic und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
1909, Halle a. S., 1909, Jahrg. 23, p. 150- 
153.) MFA 

1383. Die Thames Farbenplatte. illus. 

(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
Jan., 1909, Bd. 46, p. 32-35.) MFA 

1384. Vereinfachte Arbeitsanweisung fiir 
die Entwicklung der Autochromplatten. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1909, Bd. 46, p. 121.) MFA 

1385. Wall, Edward John. Photography 
in colours. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Nov., 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 379- 
380.) MFA 

Quotes from a four-page pamphlet in Spanish on 
the Seebeck process. 

1386. Warburg, J. C. Autochrome prices 
— a protest. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 7, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

1387. Ward, Henry Snowden. Orthochro- 
matics, light-filtering, color photography. 
(Photographic annual, London, 1909, 5th 
ed., p. 30-45.) MFA 

Recipes for various processes, including Lumiere, 
autochrome, omnicolore, Thames, and two-color helio- 
chromy. 

1388. Waterhouse, James. The photo- 
graphic work of Messrs. A. Lumiere et ses 
fils, of Lyons. (Photographic journal, 
London, March, 1909, new series, v. 33, p. 
143-145.) MFA 

1389. Wiinsch's researches on the pri- 
mary components of white light. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 34-36.) MFA 

1390. Watkins time thermometer for auto- 
chrome work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1909, v. 56, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 72.) MFA 

1391. Wentzel, Fritz. Experiments in col- 
our-sensitising chloride emulsions, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1909, v. 56, p. 5-7, 22-23, 41-44, 64-66.) 

MFA 

1392. Wiener, Otto Heinrich. Uber Far- 
benphotographie und verwandte naturwis- 
senschaftliche Fragen. Vortrag gehalten 
auf der 80. Naturforscherversammlung zu 
Coin a. Rh...am 24. September, 1908. 
Leipzig: J. A. Barth, 1909. 88 p., 3 pi. 8°. 

MFV 

Bibliography, p. 49-51. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



1909, continued. 

1393. Young, Sidney L. A three-lens one- 
exposure colour camera, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 2, 
1909, v. 56, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 

1394. Zavoda, Bohuslav. A daylight roll- 
holder for three-colour exposures, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 5, 1909, v. 56, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 87.) MFA 

1395. Zu den neuen Farbrasterplatten. 
illus. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 122-124.) MFA 

Autochrome, Omnicolore, Thames, Warner-Powrie 
plates. 

1396. Zur Entwicklung der Autochrom- 
platten. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 347-348.) MFA 



1910 

1397. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
On the extinction of colour by reduction 
of luminosity, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 30-32.) 

MFA 

1398. Autochrome reversing solution. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, p. 91-92.) MFA 

Reference to suggestion by Comte Dalmas. 

1399. Autochrome work. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 22, 1910, v. 
57, p. 563-564.) MFA 

Correspondence regarding dark spot in centre of 
picture. 

1400. Beach, F. C. A new system of color 
photography, illus. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, July, 1910, v. 4, p. 413-414.) 

MFA 

Frederic E. Ives's process. 

1401. Bennett, Colin N. Note on a pioneer 
screen - ruled roll - film, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 66-67.) MFA 

Describes a small sample which he thinks is of 
German origin. 

1402. On compensating screen-plates. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-19.) MFA 

1403. Bouldoyre, R. The use of ordinary 
plates in determining exposure for auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 86-87.) MFA 

1404. Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud. La pho- 
tographie stereoscopique en couleur et ses 
applications scientifiques. (Academie de 
sciences. Comptes rendus, Paris, May 30, 
1910, tome 150, p. 1424-1425.) * EO 



69 

1405. Braham, A. C. The Dufay diopti- 
chrome colour plate. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 78-79.) 

MFA 

Paper and discussion at the Royal Photographic 
Society. Working instructions are given. 

1406. Burnham, J. Appleton. Observations 
on the autochrome process. (Photo-era, 
Boston, May, 1910, v. 24, p. 197-201.) MFA 

1407. Casson, W. A. Exposure and de- 
velopment in colour work. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, 
v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
16.) MFA 

1408. Colour photography at the Royal 
Botanic Society. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 77.) 

MFA 

System attributed to Mr. E. T. Butler shown to be 
covered by an earlier patent. 

1409. Comley, Henry J. Color photogra- 
phy on paper as a commercial proposition, 
illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, July, 
1910, v. 17, p. 261-266.) MFA 

1410. Corke, H. Essenhigh. Direct color 
photography — newest color plate demon- 
strated, illus. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Dec. 28, 1910, v. 7, p. 433- 
434.) t MFA 

Dufay process. 

1411. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 5, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 57-58.) MFA 

Directions for working. 

1412. Screen-plate colour work. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, new 
series, v. 34, p. 4-9.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 10, 1909, v. 56, p. 959-960, MFA. 

1413. Coustet, Ernest. Photographie des 
couleurs; les plaques dioptichromes. (Re- 
vue scientifique, Paris, 1910, serie 5, annee 
48, semestre 1, p. 494-497.) OA 

1414. ■ Les plaques dioptichromes. illus. 

(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1910, annee 
20, p. 101-107.) . MFA 

Dufay process. 

1415. Cremier, Victor. Coucher de soleil 
sur autochromes. illus. (Photo - gazette, 
Paris, 1910, annee 21, p. 21-26.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 9-10, MFA. 

1416. Dalmas, R., comte de. Sujets en- 
cadres sur plaques autochromes. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 396-398.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 1911, 
annee 21, p. 187, MFA, and British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 7-8, MFA. 



70 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1910, continued. 

1417. Utilisation des plaques auto- 
chromes d'une anciennete relative de fabri- 
cation. (Societe frangaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1910, serie 3, tome 1, 
p. 102-103.) MFA 

Suggests much increased exposure. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32, MFA. 

1418. Dawson, Oliver S., and C. L. Finlay. 
Later modifications in the Thames colour 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, p. 42-43.) MFA 

1419. Didier, Leon. Paper prints from 
omnicolore plates by the pinatype process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

1420. Dillaye, Frederic. Les dioptichromes 
"Dufay." (In his: Les nouveautes photo- 
graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p. 130- 
145.) MFA 

1421. ficrans pour plaques auto- 
chromes exposees a la lumiere artif icielle. 
(In his: Les nouveautes photographiques 
1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p. 112-114.) MFA 

1422. Les omnicolores. (In his: Les 

nouveautes photographiques 1910. Paris, 
1910. 8°. p. 125-127.) MFA 

1423. Les plaques Thames a reseau 

polychrome. (In his: Les nouveautes 
photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. 
p. 127-129.) MFA 

1424. Reproduction par contact des 

chromotypes obtenus sur plaques auto- 
chromes, illus. (In his: Les nouveautes 
photographiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p. 
122-124.) MFA 

1425. Traitement simplifie des auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautes photo- 
graphiques 1910. Paris, 1910. 8°. p. 109- 
112.) MFA 

1426. D'Osmond, H. Instantaneous por- 
traiture on Lumiere autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 76-77.) MFA 

1427. Dufay, L. Les plaques dioptichromes. 
illus. (Societe frangaise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris„1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 177- 
181.) MFA 

1428. The Dufay colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 4, 
1910, v. 57, p. 847.) MFA 

Correspondence regarding time of exposure. 

1429. The Dufay dioptichrome colour plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 

An abridgment of instructions published by the 
makers. 



1430. Edridge - Green, Frederick William. 
The relation of photography to vision. 
(Photographic journal, London, Jan., 1910, 
new series, v. 34, p. 10-17.) MFA 

1431. Elliott & Fry. Exposures in studio 
portrait photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 24.) 

MFA 

State that long exposures are unnecessary. 

1432. Emmerich, Georg Heinrich, editor. 
Lexikon fur Photographie und Reproduk- 
tionstechnik. Wien & Leipzig: A. Hart- 
leben, 1910. xiv p., 1 1., 994 p., 35 pi., 1 port, 
illus. 4°. MFD 

Considerable space given to color photography. 
Biographies. 

Bound in two volumes; title-page in v. 2. 

1433. Estanave, E. Images changeantes a 
deux et trois aspects sur plaque auto- 
stereoscopique. (Academie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, Jan. 10, 1910, tome 
150, p. 93-95.) *EO 

1434. Evans, Frederick H. Colour pho- 
tography v. painting. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 96.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, March, 1911, 
v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. 

1435. Faupel, Fritz. A German patent for 
a screen-plate process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 

MFA 

Abstract. 

1436. Ford, A. D. The Dufay colour plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 88.) MFA 

Complains of poor rendering of greens. Editorial 

suggestions. 

1437. Friese, H. Der Dreifarbendruck 
unter besonderer Beriicksichtigung der 
Teilplatten nach Lumiereschen Auto- 
chrom - Diapositiven. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 584- 
588.) MFA 

1438. Gimpel, Leon. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 75-76.) MFA 

1439. Hanneke, Paul. Erfahrungen mit 
Dioptichromplatten. (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 257- 
262.) MFA 

1440. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 
photographischen Lichtfilter. Mit 5 Bei- 
lagen und 18 Abbildungen im Text. Halle 
a. S.: W. Knapp, 1910. viii, 109 p., 3 charts, 
4 pi. 8°. (Encyklopadie der Photographie. 
Heft 74.) PLC 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



71 



1910, continued. 

1441. The reproduction of auto- 
chromes and other screen-plate transpar- 
encies, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 59-61.) MFA 

Applies a simple geometrical method of investiga- 
tion to the conditions which prevail when copying one 
autochrome on another. 

1442. Husmk, Jaroslav. Ueber die Repro- 
duktion von Autochromaufnahmen im 
Dreifarbendruck. illus. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 34- 
36.) MFA 

1443. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new sys- 
tem of trichromatic photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 72.) MFA 

Tells how his system differs from Bennetto's. 

1444. A new system of trichromatic 

photography. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. Journal, London, May 16, 1910, 
v. 29, p. 542-544.) VOA 

Uses bichromate fish-glue on amylacetate collodion 
film; also dilute chromic dyes capable of local intensi- 
fication or reduction. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 49-51, MFA. 

1445. A new system of trichromatic 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 80, 88.) MFA 

Attacks Pfenninger's claims for Bennetto inven- 
tion. 

1446. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Some photo- 
graphic phenomena bearing upon disper- 
sion of light in space. (Astrophysical 
journal, Chicago, March, 1910, v. 31, p. 157— 
165.) OMA 

The Library also has a separate copy in PED 
p. v. 3, no. 15. 

1447. Klein, Henry Oscar. The applica- 
tions of collodion emulsion to three-colour 
photography, process work, isochromatic 
photography and spectrograph^ work... 
London: A. W. Penrose & Co., Ltd., 1910. 
125 p. 2. ed. enl. illus. 8°. MFKD 

1448. Koenig, Carl. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 67-68.) 

MFA 

Use of magnesium light as suggested by Lumiere 
and Seyewetz. 

1449. Koenig, Ernst. Colour sensitisers 
and filter dyes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) 

MFA 

1450. Dyes in photography. (British 

journal of photography, London, July 15, 
1910, v. 57, p. 529-530.) MFA 



1451. Kopierung von Farbenphotographien 
auf Autochromplatten im Kontakt. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1910, Bd. 47, p. 115-117.) MFA 

Review of work done in the Lumiere laboratory. 

1452. Lederer, Otto. Photo-micrography, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

1453. Lehmann, Johannes Moritz. Colour 
photography by the interference method 
with a solid metal mirror. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, 
v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
8.) MFA 

Abstract of a paper read in Germany. 

1454. Le Mee, Alexandre. Trichrome prints 
by a ferricyanide method. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 3, 1910, 
v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
41.) MFA 

1455. Limmer, Fr. Beitrage zum Farben- 
anpassungsverfahren. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1909, Bd. 46, p. 182- 
185, 280-282, 430-432; 1910, Bd. 47, p. 25- 
31, 70-73, 211-219, 286-291, 331-336, 532- 
536.) MFA 

1456. Verfahren zur Herstellung von 

Dreifarbenrasten fiir Farbenphotographie 
nach D. R. P. 216610, Fritz Faupel in Ber- 
lin, illus. (Photographische Chronik, 
Halle a. S., Aug. 10, 1910, Jahrg. 17, p. 399- 
400, 476-477.) f MFA 

1457. Liquid safe-lights for the dark-room. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 

Gives particulars of recent experiments with dyes. 

1458. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Kontaktkopien von Autochromaufnahmen. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1910, Bd. 47, p. 22-24.) MFA 

1459. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. Flash- 
powders for autochrome work. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 74-75.) MFA 

1460. Sur l'emploi des poudres eclairs 

comme source de lumiere artificielle dans 
la photographie sur plaques autochromes. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 285- 
288.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
Sept., 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 315-319, MFA, and 
Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, 
p. 324-327, MFA. 

1461. Maisch, Fred D. The autochrome 
plate in its relation to the colour-theory of 
Young and Helmholtz. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 5-6, 
13-14.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, 1909, v. 23, p. 
262-267; 1910, v. 24, p. 8-12, MFA. 



72 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1910, continued. 

1462. The Manipulation of autochromes 
when travelling. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 73-74.) 

MFA 

1463. Mayer, Emil. Notes on experience 
in the autochrome process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 43-44, 
52-53.) MFA 

Deals with under-exposure with a view to making 
hand camera exposures. 

1464. Mazo, E. The Tauleigne - Mazo 
stereo projection and three-colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 

1465. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
J. H. Pledge. On some experimental 
methods employed in the examination of 
screen-plates, illus. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, May, 1910, new series, v. 34, 
p. 197-221.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1910, v. 57, p. 45-48, 53-56, 62-64, 68-70, 

MFA. 

1466. Monpillard, Felix. A propos des 
autochromes: leur emploi pour la repro- 
duction des tableaux dans les musees; 
multiplication des epreuves autochromes 
par contact ou a la chambre noire. (So- 
ciete francaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 239-243.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 11-12, MFA. 

1467. On the causes of prevailing tints 

in autochromes. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 10-12, 22.) MFA 

1468. Sur un ecran pour autochromes 

permettant d'obtenir aisement les nuages 
dans le ciel d'un paysage. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 103-104.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32, MFA. 



1469. Sur l'utili 

autochromes avec les 
pour la photographie 
duction. (Societe fra 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, 
p. 104-112.) 

Also printed in British 
London, April 1, 1910, v. 
supplement, p. 25-27, MFA. 

1470. Moreels, R. Two-colour effects in 
prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, Julv 8, 1910, v. 57, p. 514-515.) 

MFA 



sation des plaques 
lumieres artificielles 
directe et la repro- 
ncaise de photogra- 
1910, serie 3, tome 1, 
MFA 

journal of photography, 
57, Colour photography 



1471. Namias, Rodolfo. Panchromatic 
sensitising of plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 1, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 28-29.) 

MFA 

1472. Newton, A. J. The evolution of 
photo-mechanical illustration, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1910, 
v. 57, p. 580, 878; 1911, v. 58, p. 160.) MFA 

1473. Novak, Franz. A dark-room light 
filter. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 18.) MFA 

Transmits green light for working red sensitive 
collodion emulsion. 

1474. Omnicolorplatten. (Photographische 
Welt, Leipzig, Nov., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 166- 
167.) MFA 

1475. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
Fortschritte und Erfahrungen betreffend 
die Photographie mit Farbenrasterplatten. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproductionstechnik fur 1910, Halle a. S., 
1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 177-210.) MFA 

Progress during year 1909. 

1476. Parker, G. H. Exposure of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 72.) MFA 

1477. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Colour 
photography as a paying proposition. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

1478. Pfaundler, Leopold. Studie iiber das 
Spektrum, Farbenkreise und neuere Dar- 
stellungsweisen der Farbenmischungsge- 
setze. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fur 1910, Halle 
a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 64-82.) MFA 

1479. Pfenninger, Otto. Kinematograph- 
ische Projektion in Farben. (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproductionstech- 
nik fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, 
p. 29-32.) MFA 

1480. ■ A new system of trichromatic 

photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, 1910, v. 57, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 80, 87-88.) MFA 

Discussion of the Ives-Bennetto claims. 

1481. Piper, Charles Welborne. Stereo- 
scopic colour transparencies. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12-13.) MFA 

1482. Practical application of interference 
colour photography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 83-86, 
92-95.) MFA 

Detailed description of_ Lippmann process with 
latest apparatus; also a bibliography. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



1910, continued. 

1483. Quentin, H. Colour effects in the 
spectroscope. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 20-21.) 

MFA 

1484. A new Krayn screen - plate. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 77-78.) MFA 

1485. ■ ■ Screen-plate colour photographs 

on paper. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Reference to patent of Julius Rheinberg. 

1486. A suggested new method of col- 
our photography direct at one exposure. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 

Experiments of R. Berthon with diaphragm plate 
provided with red, green, and violet screens. 

1487. The Tauleigne-Mazo process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
July 1, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51-52.) MFA 

1488. Recording the colours during ex- 
posure. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 79-80.) MFA 

Suggestions for marking slides. 

1489. Regni, pseud. A new system of tri- 
chromatic photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 64.) 

MFA 

Conflicting claims of J. W. Bennetto and F. E. 
Ives. 

1490. A Reservoir viewing instrument for 
autochromes. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 3, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

1491. Rheinberg, Julius. The Rheinberg 
colour paper. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

1492. S., G. L'amelioration des auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, July 25, 
1910, annee 20, p. 177-179.) MFA 

1493. Saal, Alfred. Autochromplatten. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, 
Jahrg. 24, p. 212-215.) MFA 

Autochromes in the tropics. 

1494. Scheffer, W. Notes on the Krayn 
new screen film, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 
57, Colour photography supplement, p. 89- 
90.) MFA 

1495. On the resolving power of the 

autochrome emulsion, illus. (British jour- 



73 

nal of photography, London, Sept. 2, 1910, 
v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 
70-72.) MFA 

1496. La photographie des couleurs 

avec les plaques a reseaux colores. (So- 
ciete franchise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 70-86.) MFA 

Discussion of different plates. 

1497. Uber das Auflosungsvermogen 

der Autochrom-Emulsion. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1910, 
Bd. 47, p. 588-592.) MFA 

1498. Schilling, Otto. Die Dioptichrom- 
Farbenrasterplatte (System Dufay). 
(Photographische Welt, Leipzig, Sept., 
1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 129-131.) MFA 

1499. Seyewetz, A. Copies of autochrome 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

1500. Sforza, Francis. A suggested method 
of preparing coloured prints by an indirect 
bleach-out process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 83.) 

MFA 

1501. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procede 
permettant la prise de vues instantanees 
sur plaques autochromes. (Societe fran- 
caise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1910, serie 3, tome 1, p. 275-278.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography- 
supplement, p. 65-66, MFA, Photographische Mit- 
tethmgen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 47, p. 292-295, MFA, 
and Photo-gazette, Paris, Sept. 25, 1910, annee 20, 
p. 214-218, MFA. 

1502. Smith, John H. The bleach - out 
process of colour-photography and Uto- 
color paper. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, April, 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 141— 
151.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-39, MFA. 

With discussion. 

1503. Some effects on stale and on fresh 
autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 4, 1910, v. 57, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 87.) 

MFA 

Found that old plates worked well and clearly. 

1504. Stenger, Erioh. Deutsche Farben- 
films (System Krayn) der Neuen photo- 
graphischen Gesellschaft. (Photograph- 
ische Chronik, Halle a. S., Nov. 20, 1910, 
Jahrg. 17, p. 575-577.) fMFA 

1505. Stenger, Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber. 
Destroyers of colour-sensitiveness as 
means for developing panchromatic plates 
in a bright dark-room light. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 28, 1910, 
v. 57, p. 61-63.) MFA 

The authors state that the use of metabisulphite 
or sulphuric acid as a preliminary bath is not of much 
service. 



74 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1910, continued. 

1506. Stobbe, Hans. Fulgide dyes in mak- 
ing colour prints by the bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 91-92.) MFA 

1507. Tauleigne, A. The Tauleigne proc- 
ess of trichromy. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

1508. Toch, Maximilian. The simplified 
autochrome process. (American annual of 
photography for 1910, New York, 1910, v. 
24, p. 245-246.) MFA 

1509. Villain, Alfred. On the reproduction 
of autochrome transparencies. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 1, 
1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 27-28.) MFA 

1510. Wall, Edward John. Screen plate 
color photography. illus. (In: Photo- 
graphic annual, London, 1910, 6th ed., p. 
9-53.) MFA 

Details for manipulating Autochrome, Omnicolore, 
Dufay, and Thames plates, with a note on the Aurora 
plate. 

1511. Wallace, Robert Jamesi Tri-color 
filters and their cut-outs, illus. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1911, New 
York, 1910, v.25, p. 272-282.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 5—7, MFA. 

1512. Weissermel, W. Die Autochrom- 
platte in der lichtarmen Jahrezeit. (Photo- 
graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1910, Bd. 
47, p. 5-8.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-10, MFA. 

1513. Winter, G. Duplicates of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 7, 1910, v. 57, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 75.) MFA 

1514. Worel, Karl. Farbenphotographie 
durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1910, Halle a. S., 1910, Jahrg. 24, p. 3-7.) 

MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Dec. 2, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 90, MFA. 

1515. X. La reproduction des couleurs des 
photographies en couleurs. (Photo-ga- 
zette, Paris, Jan. 25, 1910, annee 20, p. 46- 
49.) MFA 

Messrs. Gimpel and Villain took first prizes in 
picture contest by the journal La Vulgarisation scien- 
tifique. In this article they explain their methods. 

1516. Yerbury, S. G. The making of por- 
traits in colors. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, Aug., 1910, v. 17, p. 315-318.) MFA 



1911 

1517. Abney, Sir William de Wiveleslie. 
Colour blindness and the trichromatic 
theory of colour-vision. illus. (Royal 
Society of London. Proceedings, London, 

1910, series A, v. 83, p. 462-473; 1911, se- 
ries A, v. 84, p. 449-464.) * EC 

Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
July, 1910, new series, v. 34, p. 278-287; Aug., 1911, 
new series, v. 35, p. 281-296, MFA. 

1518. Adrien, Charles. Essais d'hyper- 
sensibilisation au trempe des plaques auto- 
chromes. (Societe franchise de photogra- 
phie. Bulletin, Paris, Dec, 1911, serie 3, 
tome 2, p. 400-402.) MFA 

Uses Thovert formula. 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12, MFA. 

1519. Albert, August. Farbenlichtdruck 
und Farbenaufnahmen mit Autochrom- 
platten usw. (Jahrbuch fiir Photographie 
und Reproductionstechnik fiir 1911, Halle 
a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 103-104.) MFA 

1520. Alteneder, J. V. Paper prints from 
autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1911, New York, 1910, v.25, 
p. 128.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 7, MFA. 

1521. Antoine Lumiere. (Societe francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, se- 
rie 3, tome 2, p. 195-196.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

1522. Balmitgere, C. A stereoscope for the 
direct observation of colour transparencies 
without reversal, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, March 3, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
22-23.) MFA 

1523. Bellieni, H. Utilisation, pour la 
photographie ordinaire, des ecrans desti- 
nes aux plaques autochromes. (Societe 
franchise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 

1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 82-83.) MFA 

1524. Bennett, Colin N. Filter absorptions 
for two-colour. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 7, 1911, v. 58, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 45.) MFA 

1525. Benoist, L. Sur les contre-ecrans 
renforcateurs en photochromie. (Societe 
frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 229-234.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 65-67, MFA. 

1526. Two hints on the autochrome 

process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 7.) MFA 

Recommends white glazed paper against sensitive 
film; also permanganate solution after second develop- 
ment. 



■ 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



75 



1911, continued. 

1527. Blackburn, H. E. The Krayn color 
screen film process. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Aug., 1911, v. 18, p. 369-372.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 67-68, MFA. 

1528. The Tripak system in brief. 

illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1911, v. 18, p. 221-224.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 42—43, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 228-231, MFA. 

1529. A Blue cast on autochromes. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, 1911, v. 54, p. 191, 265.) f MFA 

1530. Boucher, L. Le "Monobloc," appa- 
reil stereo-panoramique, muni d'un dis- 
positif special facilitant la photographie 
en couleurs. illus. (Societe franchise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, serie 
3, tome 2, p. 108-111.) MFA 

1531. Butler, Edwin T. Mr. E. T. Butler's 
methods of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 3, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 14-16.) MFA 

Paper read before the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. 

1532. Carpenter, Ford Ashman. Photo- 
graphing "red snow" in natural colors. 
San Diego: San Diego Society of Natural 
History, 1911. 108-111 p., 1 pi. 4°. 

QEI p.v. 19, no. 11 
Repr. : San Diego Society of Natural History. 
Transactions, v. 1, no. 3, 1911. 

1533. Chataux, P. S. A note on the de- 
velopment of autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 2, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 43.) MFA 

Uses pyro for developer. 

1534. Clerc, Louis Philippe. A frequent 
cause of failure in three-colour synthesis: 
excess of red. illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 35-37.) 

MFA 

1535. Colour photographs of Saturn. 
(Nature, London, Nov. 2, 1911, v. 88, p. 20.) 

OA 

Belopolsky's results with plates prepared by M. 
Tikhoff. 

1536. Colour prints on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 39-40.) MFA 

Secret method worked out by A. Hamburger. 

1537. Corke, H. Essenhigh. A new color 
printing process. (Bulletin of photogra- 
phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 22, 1911, v. 9, p. 
341-342.) f MFA 

Utocolor. 



1538. Coustet, Ernest. La photographie 
instantanee des couleurs. (Revue scien- 
tifique, Paris, 1911, v. 49, p. 239-240.) OA 

1539. Cremier, Victor. L'automne et l'auto- 
chrome. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Nov. 25, 
1911, annee 22, p. 11-15.) MFA 

1540. Experiments with the diopti- 

chrome colour screen-plate. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 5, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
37-38.) MFA 

1541. Ordinary negatives from auto- 
chrome and other screen-plate transpar- 
encies. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 7, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 28-29.) MFA 

1542. A Curious case of frilling with auto- 
chromes. illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 52, 55-56.) MFA 

An inquiry by Sir W. Herschel answered by sev- 
eral correspondents. 

1543. Dalmas, R., comte de. Du developpe- 
ment des plaques autochromes en voyage. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 106- 
108.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 34-35, MFA, and Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 177-179, MFA. 

1544. Observations sur le nouvel em- 

ballage des plaques autochromes. (Societe 
franqaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 271-272.) MFA 

1545. Death of M. Antoine Lumiere. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 5, 1911, v. 58, p. 343.) MFA 

1546. Doglibert, F. Suggestion for a new 
photographic colour screen plate. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
24.) MFA 

Prismatic surfaces moulded on celluloid. 

1547. Estanave, E. Photographies a cou- 
leurs changeantes. (Academie des sciences. 
Comptes rendus, Paris, May 1, 1911, tome 
152, p. 1158-1159.) *EO 

1548. Evans, C. Willard. Developing auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 19U, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 52.) MFA 

Formula for tank development. 

1549. Farmer, Howard. Autochromes and 
their reproduction on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 3-4.) MFA 

1550. Flash-light autochrome portraits. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 3, 1911. v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 

Brief description of process used by B. J. Falk. 



76 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1911, continued. 

1551. Franck, Charles E. Frilling of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 64.) MFA 

1552. Gebhard, Kurt. Theoretical notes on 
the bleachout process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 50-51, 
54-55.) MFA 

1553. liber die Veranderung von Farb- 

stoffen im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 634-637.) 

MFA 

1554. Gimpel, Leon. Amelioration dans 
la reproduction et l'agrandissement des 
plaques en couleurs. (Societe frangaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1911, serie 
3, tome 2, p. 101-103.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 1, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 53-54, MFA. 

1555. Les anaglyphes sur autochromes. 

(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 211- 
212.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 51, MFA. 

1556. La photographie en couleurs sur 

papier a la portee de tous. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 407-411.) MFA 

Utocolor process. 

1557. Gravier, Charles. Plates for colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

Deals principally with development of autochromes. 

1558. La trichromie en 1911. (Societe 

frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 411-412.) MFA 

1559. Green spots on autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Sept. 
22, 1911, v. 58, p. 735.) MFA 

1560. Greene, J. Edward B. Pinachrome 
for color values. (American annual of 
photography for 1912, New York, 1911, 
v. 26, p. 207-208.) MFA 

1561. Hanneke, Paul. Farbenausbleichver- 
fahren. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 337-340.) MFA 

1562. Die neuen deutschen Farben- 

films. (Photographische Mitteilungen, Ber- 
lin, 1911, Bd.48, p. 8-10.) MFA 

N. P. G. color films. 

1563. Hinterberger, Hugo. Neuerungen in 
der Fabrikation der Dioptichromplatten 
und der deutschen Farbenfilms. (Photo- 
graphische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 12, 
1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 130.) f MFA 



1564. A note on making photo-micro- 
graphs of colour screen-plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 60.) MFA 

1565. Die polychromen Streifenraster 

und die neueste Dioptichrom-Dufayplatte. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
Jan. 29, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 58-59.) f MFA 

1566. Die tonrichtige Aufnahme von 

Farbrastern. illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photo- 
graphie und Reproductionstechnik fur 
1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 158- 
161.) MFA 

1567. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Colour paper 
prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Explains adaptation of Tripak process. 

1568. Ives' tripak plate pack. (British 

journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 

1569. The Ives tripak process of col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 

MFA 

1570. Tripak color photography. 

(Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 1911, 
v. 18, p. 219-220.) MFA 

1571. Ives' Inventions, Ltd. The Ives tri- 
pak system of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 19-22.) MFA 

Copy of working directions issued by the firm. 

1572. J., M. J. Dufay colour plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 64.) MFA 

Editorial reply to questions concerning troubles. 

1573. Jones, Chapman. On the relation- 
ship between the size of the particle and 
the colour of the image. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1911, v. 58, p. 
339-343, 381-384.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographic journal, London, 
April, 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 159-174, MFA. 

1574. Klein, E. Suggested methods of di- 
rect colour photography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 4, 1911, v.. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 49- 
50.) MFA 

Development of H. Vollenbruch's theory that a 
silver halide precipitate along with the dye is capable 
of retaining certain coloring matters throughout de- 
velopment, fixing, and washing. 

1575. Kropf, Fritz. Possible methods of 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 40.) 

MFA 

Observations on methods suggested by R. Luther. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



77 



1911, continued. 

1576. Kuemmell, G. Die Beschleunigung 
des Ausbleichens von Farbstoffen durch 
aromatische Verbindungen. (Zeitschrift 
fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Pho- 
tophysik und Photochemie, Leipzig, 1910, 
Bd. 9, p. 54-64.) PLC 

Translation in British journal of photography, Nov. 
4, 1910, v. 57, Colour photography supplement, p. 81- 
82, MFA. 

1577. Kunz, William H. Color photogra- 
phy. (American annual of photography 
for 1912, New York, 1911, v. 26, p. 28-32.) 

MFA 

Describes briefly processes in use. 

1578. Lack of register in tri-colour filters. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 27, 1911, v. 58, p. 69.) MFA 

1579. Legeret, E. Using autochrome plates 
in a changing box. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 2, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

MFA 

1580. Leiber, Ferdinand. Making the best 
of under-exposed autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 57.) MFA 

1581. Le Mee, Alexandre. Paper colour 
prints from screen-plate transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 7, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30.) MFA 

1582. The Light of Egypt: natural colour 
photographs of the glorious effects of 
Egyptian sunsets and sunrise, illus. (Il- 
lustrated London news, London, Feb. 25, 
1911, v. 138, supplement.) * DA 

Six pictures by Gervais-Courtellement. 

1583. Limmer, Fr. Das Farbenanpassungs- 
verfahren (Ausbleichverfahren) eine M6- 
glichkeit der direkten Korperfarben Pho- 
tographie. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Jan., 1911, new series, v. 35, p. 16-18.) 

MFA 

1584. ■ Zur Geschichte des Ausbleich- 

verfahrens. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 307-311.) MFA 

1585. Lueppo - Cramer. Das Silber als 
Farbstoff. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 184-188.) MFA 

1586. tiber die Farben der Photoha- 

loide. (Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 33-37.) MFA 

1587. Weitere Untersuchungen uber 

die Polychromie des Silbers. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1911, 
Bd. 48, p. 403-409.) MFA 

1588. Zur Farbenanpassung der Pho- 

tohaloide. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 270-275.) MFA 



1589. Luther, R. Possible methods of col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 17-19.) 

MFA 

Suggestions by himself and Herr Sforza. 

1590. The Manners process of three-colour 
printing with carbon tissues. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 7, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 46.) MFA 

British patent no. 25646 of 1910. 

1591. Mareschal, G. Le cinematographe 
en couleurs. illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, 
Oct. 25, 1911, annee 21, p. 221-224.) MFA 

Processes of Geisler and Friese-Greene. 

1592. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
effect of colour filters upon the definition 
of a lens. (Knowledge, London, April, 
1911, new series, v. 8, p. 155.) OA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 28, 1911, v. 58, p. 330, MFA. 

1593. — — The relation between the colour 
of silver images, and the size of the par- 
ticles which compose them. (Knowledge, 
London, April, 1911, new series, v. 8, p. 
154-155.) OA 

1594. Miethe, Adolf, and B. Seegert. Uber 
qualitative Verschiedenheiten des von den 
einzelnen Teilen der Mondoberflache re- 
flektieren Lichtes. illus. (Astronomische 
Nachrichten, Kiel, 1911, Bd. 188, p. 10-11, 
239-246.) OMA 

See colored illustration opp. p. 356. 

1595. Monpillard, Felix. Simultaneous 
opening of shutter and firing of flash- 
powder in autochrome photography, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Mav 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

1596. Moreels, R. Two-colour and three- 
colour photography in two exposures of 
the same time, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 7, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 25-28.) 

MFA 

Camera provided with a dark-slide allowing the 
plates to be rapidly exchanged. 

1597. Namias, Rodolfo. Some notes on 
autochrome work. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 38-39.) 

MFA 

Suggestions for development and after treatment. 

1598. Natural colour photography: remark- 
able results and how they are obtained. 
(Illustrated London news, London, 1911, 
v. 139, supplement to issue of Dec. 16.) 

* DA 

Has colored plate showing different stages. 

1599. Ein Neues Farbraster. illus. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., April 9, 
1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 180-181.) fMFA 

Ruth plate. 



78 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1911, continued. 

1600. A New colour paper. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, June 2, 1911, 
v. 58, Colour photography supplement, p. 
44.) MFA 

Denver company^ employs a machine which passes 
the paper through fifteen or more baths. 

1601. A New Uto paper. (British journal 
of photography, London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 62- 
64.) MFA 

Bleachout paper manufactured by Dr. J. H. Smith. 
Gives full instructions. 

1602. Novak, Franz. Gelbfilter fiir Auto- 
chromblitzlichtaufnahmen. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 
190.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 68, MFA. 

1603. An Open field for colour photogra- 
phers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1911, v. 58, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 

Difficulties to be overcome and helpful suggestions. 

1604. Le Palais de l'autochrome. illus. 
(Photo-gazette, Paris, April 25, 1911, an- 
nee 21, p. 117-118.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1911, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 51-52, MFA. 

Description of the studio of Gervais Courtellement, 
Paris, especially of the flashlight apparatus. 

1605. Palocsay, Albin von. Fremde und 
eigene Versuche zur Abkiirzung der Ex- 
positionzeit bei Autochromaufnahmen. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1911, Bd. 48, p. 483-494.) MFA 

1606. Shorter exposures with the auto- 
chrome plate. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

1607. Wichtiger Fortschritte und Er- 

fahrungen betreffend die Photographie mit 
Farbrasterplatten. illus. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fiir 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 194- 
228.) MFA 

1608. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Pictures 
from autochromes. (American annual of 
photography for 1912, New York, 1911, v. 
26, p. 121-122.) MFA 

Black and whites from autochromes. 

1609. Personnaz, Antonin. L'autochromie. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 58-61.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Photo-gasette, Paris, April 25, 
1911, annee 22, p. 107-110, MFA. 

1610. Pfenninger, Otto. Historisches iiber 
die Farbenkamera. (Jahrbuch fiir Photo- 
graphie und Reproductionstechnik fiir 
1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 11-13.) 

MFA 



1611. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. Gelbscheiben 
fiir Autochromplatten. (Photographische 
Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 294- 
298.) MFA 

1612. Quentin, H. Le procede Krayn. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 293- 
300.) MFA 

1613. Rheinberg, Julius. Suggestion for a 
new colour screen-plate to act by diffrac- 
tion. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1614. Suggestion for a new screen- 
plate. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Discussion of ideas of E. J. Wall, E. Doglibert 
and of the Frauenfelder patent. 

1615. Richard, A. Sur la photographie en 
couleur chez M. G. Marionez. (Societe 
d'emulation de Cambrai. Memoires, Cam- 
brai, 1911, tome 65, p. 485-498.) * EN 

1616. Russian colour-photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
17, 1911, v. 58, p. 129.) MFA 

Brief reference to Prokudin-Gorsky who claimed 
to have spent his entire fortune in experiments, and 
who petitioned the government to buy 2,000 of his pro- 
ductions. 

1617. Simmen, Charles. Nouveau procede 
permettant la prise de vues instantanees 
sur plaques autochromes. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 382-383.) MFA 

1618. Quelques mots sur l'hypersensi- 

bilisation des plaques autochromes. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, 1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 403-406.) 

MFA 

Abstract in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, May 3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 17-18, MFA. 

1619. Starr, William Ireland. Why not 
make color photographs? (American an- 
nual of photography for 1912, New York, 
1911, v. 26, p. 228-234.) MFA 

Amateur's experience with autochrome and Dufay 
plates. 

1620. Stenger, Erich. Das "Weiss" auf 
Farbrasterplatten und weisse Farbraster. 
(Photographische Chronik, Halle a. S., 
May 17, 1911, Jahrg. 18, p. 247-248.) f MFA 



1621. Zur Kenntnis 

platte. (Photographisch 
a. S., 1907, Jahrg. 14, p. 
545, 605-607; 1908, Jahrg. 
137-140, 247-248, 259-261 
395-397, 432-435, 446-448 
617-619; 1909, Jahrg. 16, 
132-135, 182-185, 191-193 
325-327, 433-437, 469-471, 
1910, Jahrg. 17, p. 9-13, 



der Autochrom- 
e Chronik, Halle 
499-502, 527, 543- 
15, p. 9-11, 37-39, 
283-286, 360-363, 
569-572, 593-595, 
p. 97-99, 104-106, 
207-210, 317-319, 
481-483, 577-580; 
259-261, 283-285, 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



79 



1911, continued. 

331-334, 367-370, 515-518, 527-529; 1911, 
Jahrg. 18, p. 25-26, 35-37, 46-49, 206-208, 
264-266, 307-308, 315-316, 331-332.) f MFA 

After the first few numbers the title reads: Zur 
Kenntnis der Autochromeplatte und ahnlich gearter 
Erzeugnisse. An excellent review of progress. 

1622. Switkowski, Josef. Three - colour 
prints by the oil process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 
58, Colour photography supplement, p. 12- 
13.) MFA 

1623. "Tabloid" chemicals for screen-plate 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1911, v. 58, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Produced by Burroughs, Wellcome & Co. 

1624. Thovert, J. Pinachrome as an extra 
sensitiser of autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 7, 
1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 47-48.) MFA 

Also printed in Societe franchise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris, 1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 383-389, 
MFA. 

1625. Sensibilisation de plaques auto- 
chromes: influence de la qualite de l'eclaire- 
ment sur la reproduction photographique 
des couleurs. (Societe frangaise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, 1911, serie 3, 
tome 2, p. 379-381.) MFA 

1626. Tikhoff. Colour photography on 
Mars. (Nature. London, Oct. 19, 1911, 
v. 87, p. 529.) OA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 64, MFA. 

1627. Uto photographic paper. (Nature, 
London, Nov. 9, 1911, v. 88, p. 50.) OA 

1628. Valenta, Eduard. tiber die "Deutschen 
Farbrasterfilms auf Krayn-Raster" der 
Neuen photographischen Gesellschaft in 
Berlin-Steglitz. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 41-44.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 11, 1911, v. 58, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30-31, MFA. 

1629. Zur Kenntnis des "Utacolorpa- 

pieres." (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 624-627.) MFA 

1630. Vallot, fimile. Hypersensibilisation 
des plaques autochromes. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1911, serie 3, tome 2, p. 389-391.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 369-371, MFA. 

1631. A Vertical developing dish for auto- 
chrome plates, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 40.) 

MFA 

Designed by Seyewetz and sold by M. Leune, Paris. 



1632. Wall, Edward John. Die Farbe 
photographischer Bilder. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproductionstechnik 
fur 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, Jahrg. 25, p. 38- 
41.) MFA 

1633. ■ Suggestion for a new colour 

screen-plate, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 

MFA 

Reply to F. Doglibert. Cites United States patent 
no. 747961 of Frauenfelder. 

1634. Weimann, Arthur. Monochrome 
Vergrosserung von Autochromen usw. 
(Photographische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 
1911, Bd. 48, p. 215-219.) MFA 

1635. Winter, G. Hints on working the 
autochrome process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1911, v. 58, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 

MFA 

1636. Worel, Karl. Fortschritte in der 
Farbenphotographie im vorigen Jahre. 
(Jahrbuch fur Photographie und Repro- 
ductionstechnik fin- 1911, Halle a. S., 1911, 
Jahrg. 25, p. 3-5.) MFA 

1637. Wychgram, Engelhard. Uber neuere 
Farbraster. illus. (Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1911, Bd. 48, p. 102-104.) 

MFA 

Dufay and Krayn plates. 



1912 

1638. Autochrome light filter. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 3, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 

Accurate filters made by Dallmeyer. 

1639. Baker, Thomas Thorne. Colour pho- 
tography by artificial light. Notes on the 
screening of artificial illuminants. illus. 
(Amateur photographer & photographic 
news, London, March 4, 1912, v. 55, p. 221— 
222.) f MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, Nov., 1912, 
v. 29, p. 240-241, MFA. 

1640. Balagny, Georges. Application du 
diamidophenol en liqueur acide au de- 
veloppement des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe frangaise de -photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 371- 
378.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 6—8, MFA. 

1641. Bartlett, John. Autochromes and 
art. (Bulletin of photography, Philadel- 
phia, Sept. 11, 1912, v. 11, p. 373-374.) 

f MFA 



80 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1912, continued. 

1642. Bennett, Charles W. _ Glycerol as 
sensitizer. (Eighth International Congress 
of Applied Chemistry, Washington and 
New York, 1912. Original communica- 
tions, v. 20, section 9, Photochemistry, p. 
121-122.) PKR 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 3, MFA. 

1643. Bergeron. Bichromatic reversing 
bath. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Suggested formula for autochromes. 

1644. Blackburn, H. E. The Dufay diopto- 
chrome plate. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, May, 1912, v. 19, p. 215-220.) MFA 

1645. The Krayn colour films. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Feb. 
2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 8.) MFA 

Corrects a misprint in above periodical of Decem- 
ber 8, 1911. 

1646. Boucher, L. Renforcement des auto- 
chromes. (Photo-gazette, Paris, June 25, 
1912, annee 22, p. 157-158.) MFA 

1647. Brandlmayr, Georg. tJber Dreifar- 
bengravure. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1912, Bd. 49, p. 553-555.) MFA 

1648. Broum, Karl H. Die Autotypie und 
der Dreifarbendruck. Die Anwendung des 
Rasters zur Herstellung von Klischees fur 
den ein- und- mehr-farbigen Buchdruck, 
nebst Anhang: Rastertiefdruck. Halle a. 
S.: W. Knapp, 1912. vi, 192 p., 5 pi. 8°. 

MDS 

1649. Burchardt, Ernest A. Three-colour 
printing by the bichromated size process. 
("British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-28.) MFA 

1650. Busy, L. L'autochromie en voyage 
de France au Tonkin. (Photo-gazette, 
Paris, July 25, 1912, annee 22, p. 177-178.) 

MFA 

1651. Color photography in relation to new 
art movement in photography. (Bulletin 
of photography, Philadelphia, Oct. 16, 
1912, v. 11, p. 573.) f MFA 

1652. Colour prints from autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31.) MFA 

Commercial apparatus of Messrs. Balfour and 
Hitchins briefly referred to. 

1653. Colour prints on paper: a simple 
process in practical form. (British jour- 
nal of photography, Aug. 30, 1912, v. 59, 
p. 669-670.) MFA 

Paget screen-plate process explained. 



1654. A Colour transparency competition. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Conditions of the Societe franchise de photographie. 

1655. Corke, H. Essenhigh. The auto- 
chrome process. (Photographic journal, 
London, Dec, 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
338-345.) MFA 

1656. Cousin, Ernest. The development of 
colour and other plates exposed through 
a screen. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 

Paper read before the Societe francaise de photo- 
graphie. 

1657. Cremier, Victor. Hypersensibilisa- 
tion simplified des autochromes. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, July 25, 1912, annee 22, p. 
171-176.) MFA 

1658. Cust, Leopold. Notes upon the work- 
ing of autochromes. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-3, 5-7.) MFA 

1659. Dalmas, R., comte de. Enlevement 
des points noirs sur plaques autochromes. 
(Societe francaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 158— 
159.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 36, MFA. 

1660. David, Albert. Chromium intensifi- 
cation of autochromes. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 
59, Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

MFA 

1661. Intensification of autochromes. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 

1662. Dillaye, Frederic. L'autochromo- 
scope Elge. illus. (In his: Les nouveau- 
tes photographiques 1911-1912. Paris, 
1912. 8°. p. 113-115.) MFA 

Viewing apparatus. 

1663. Developpement des plaques 

autochromes en lumiere rouge tres vive. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 68-71.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 2, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 37-38, MFA. 

Also in his Les nouveautes photographiques 1911— 
1912, Paris, 1912, p. 115-125, MFA. 

1664. L'ecran jaune des plaques auto- 
chromes. (In his: Les nouveautes photo- 
graphiques 1911-1912. Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 
104-109.) MFA 

1665. Les grands contrastes avec 

plaques autochromes. (In his: Les 
nouveautes photographiques 1911-1912. 
Paris, 1912. 8°. p. 102-104.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



81 



1912, continued. 

1666. Direct colour photography. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, Oct. 28, 1912, v. 56, supplement, 
p. 3-4.) MFA 

General article on lens and filter. 

1667. The Dufay dioptichrome plate. 
(Amateur photographer & photographic 
news, London, Jan. 22, 1912, v. 55, p. 80.) 

MFA 

1668. Evans, Ulick R. An attachment for 
simultaneous exposure in an ordinary 
camera as a means of making the three 
component negatives for the subtractive 
processes of colour photography, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 45-48, 51-52; 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 4, 12.) MFA 

1669. Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr. Color- 
photography of luminescence. (Eighth 
International Congress of Applied Chem- 
istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 
Original communications, v. 20, section 9, 
Photochemistry, p. 137-138.) PKR 

Use of Dufay plates. 

1670. Finlay, C. L. Lantern slides in nat- 
ural colour by the Paget duplicating 
method. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 49-51.) MFA 

1671. Flashlight for screen colour plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

Formula for screen liquid to be used with "Agfa" 
blitzlicht powder. 

1672. Florence. Ueber die optische Aus- 
riistung fur Autochrom und andere Farb- 
rasterplatten - Verfahren. (Photograph- 
ische Chronik, Halle a. S., March 27, 1912, 
Jahrg. 19, p. 165-167.) f MFA 

1673. G., G. S. A method of retouching 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 55.) MFA 

1674. Gaumont, Leon. Vues cinemato- 
graphiques en couleurs naturelles. (So- 
ciete francaise de photographic Bulletin, 
Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 370-371.) 

MFA 

1675. Gebhard, Kurt. Zusammenhang 
zwischen Lichtempfindlichkeit und Kon- 
stitution von Farbstoffen. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
fiir 1912, Halle a. S., 1912, Jahrg. 26, p. 51- 
67. ) MFA 

1676. Gimpel, Leon. Le verachromoscope. 
illus. (Societe francaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 229- 
232.) MFA 



1677. Grant, Thomas K. Extra-sensitised 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

Tells how he worked the Siramen process. 

1678. Hernandez - Mejia, Arturo. The 
colorgraph process of colour cinematogra- 
phy, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 8, 1912, v. 59, p. 805- 
807.) MFA 

1679. Colour cinematography. (British 

journal of photography, London, Sept. 6, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44.) MFA 

Abstract from the Morning telegraph. His inven- 
tion known as the cinecolorgraph. 

1680. Hilliard, F. M. Color photography 
by flashlight. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p. 21-22.) MFA 

1681. Hollyer, Frederick T. The use of 
grey in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) MFA 

1682. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
production of pure whites in autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 

1683. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Tripak 
color-photography. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Feb., 1912, v. 28, p. 57-58.) MFA 

1684. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The present 
condition of color photography. (Eighth 
International Congress of Applied Chem- 
istry, Washington and New York, 1912. 
Original communications, v. 26, appendix, 
sections 6a-llb, p. 447-452.) PKR 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 21-22, 26, MFA, and in Journal of physical chem- 
istry, Ithaca, N. Y., 1913, v. 17, p. 41-46, PA A. 

1685. Johnson and Sons. Correcting col- 
our-rendering in autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 1, 
1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12.) MFA 

Unexposed gelatine plate is developed and dyed in 
"photo-tints," and used as a cover glass for the auto- 
chrome. 

1686. Knott, L. E. Colour plates and the 
holiday. (Amateur photographer & photo- 
graphic news, London, July 8, 1912, v. 56, 
p. 47-48.) f MFA 

Equipment for tour with no special plates mentioned. 

1687. Koenig, Ernst. Die Farben-Photo- 
graphie. Eine gemeinverstandliche Dar- 
stellung der verschiedenen Verfahren 
nebst Anleitung zu ihrer Ausfuhrung. 
Berlin: Union deutsche Verlagsgesell- 
schaft, 1912. 3 p.l., 102 p., 2 pi. 3. ed. 8°. 
(Photographische Bibliothek. Bd. 19.) 

MFV 



82 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1912, continued. 

1688. Leffmann, Henry. Color photogra- 
phy. (Photo-era, Boston, June, 1912, v. 28, 
p. 237-239.) MFA 

Experiences with photomicrographs. 

1689. Leggett, George H. Three - colour 
negatives at one exposure. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, 
v. 59, Colour photography supplement, p. 
54-55; Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

1690. Leiber, Ferdinand. Three - colour 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 

1691. Le Mee, Alexandre. The new Uto- 
color paper. (Photo-era, Boston, April, 

1912, v. 28, p. 145-147.) MFA 

1692. Lewis, Alfred Holmes. The auto- 
chrome in winter. (Photo-era, Boston, 
Jan., 1912, v. 28, p. 10-12.) MFA 

1693. Lobley, Frank J. Screen-plate col- 
our photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Abstract of lecture delivered to the Chichester 
Photographic Society. 

1694. Lovelace, Marcus G. Screenless 
color photography. (Wilson's photo- 
graphic magazine, New York, 1912, v. 49, 
p. 531-536.) MFA 

Directions for Lippmann process. 

Also printed in American annual of photography, 

1913, New York, 1912, v. 27, p. 9-20. 

1695. Lucas, E. G. Handel. The use of 
grey in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1912, v. 
59, Colour photography supplement, p. 43- 
44, 55-56.) MFA 

1696. Mcintosh, J. The autochrome proc- 
ess. (Photographic journal, London, Nov., 
1912, new series, v. 36, p. 320-329.) MFA 

1697. Mackenstein iStablissements. Chro- 
moscope classeur. illus. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 40.) MFA 

1698. Mairot, F. Developing autochromes 
in green light. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

1699. Maleve, L. To determine the ex- 
posure of autochrome plates, illus. (Bul- 
letin of photography, Philadelphia, May 1, 
1912, v. 10, p. 578-580.) f MFA 

1700. Mareschal, G. Le verachromoscope. 
illus. (Photo-gazette, Paris, May 25, 1912, 
annee 22, p. 136-138.) MFA 

1701. Marino, Algeri. Transmission des 
photographies et des images a distance, 



systeme Marino, illus. (La Lumiere elec- 
trique, Paris, 1912, serie 2, tome 19, tri- 
mestre 3, p. 261-265.) VGA 

Translated abstract in Scientific American, New 
York, March 22, 1913, v. 108, p. 273, VA. 

Deals with transmission of photographs in color. 

1702. Messer, H. C. Showing autochrome 
transparencies. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Dec. 6, 1912, v. 59, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 54.) MFA 

1703. Miethe, Adolf. Farbenphotographie 
des Vollmondes. illus. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 357- 
359.) MFA 

Colored illustration opp. p. 356. 

1704. Monpillard, Felix. fhude micro- 
graphique du reseau des plaques omni- 
colores. (Photo-gazette, Paris, Aug. 25, 
1912, annee 22, p. 190-192.) MFA 

1705. L'hypersensibilisation pratique. 

(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1912, serie 3, tome 3, p. 126— 
133.) MFA 

1706. More points in autochrome work. 
(Amateur photographer & photographic 
news, London, Nov. 11, 1912, v. 56, supple- 
ment, p. 3-4.) f MFA 

Loading and exposure. 

1707. Das Neue Utocolor - Rapid - Papier. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 



MFA 

(Photo- 
S., 1912, 
MFA 



1912, Bd. 49, p. 308-310.) 

1708. Neues Utocolor - Papier, 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. 
Bd. 49, p. 160.) 

Formula for fixing bath. 

1709. A New colour photography. With a 
non-screen plate and one exposure. (Ama- 
teur photographer & photographic news, 
London, April 8, 1912, v. 55, p. 356.) f MFA 

Rheinberg process. 

1710. A New method of color photography. 
(Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 1912, 
v. 19, p. 277-278.) MFA 

Process of the Brothers Rheinberg. 

1711. Newton, A. J. The use of grey in 
three-colour printing. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1912, v. 59, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 48, 56.) MFA 

1712. Newton, A. J., and A. J. Bull. The 
testing of lenses for three - colour and 
process work. (Photographic journal, 
London, March, 1912, new series, v. 36, p. 
91-98.) MFA 

Also printed in British Journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 14-15, MFA. 

1713. Palocsay, Albin von. Wichtigere 
Fortschritte und Erfahrungen, betreffend 
die Photographie mit Farbrasterplatten. 
illus. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie und 
Reproduktionstechnik fur 1912, Halle a. S., 
1912, Jahrg. 26, p. 250-276.) MFA 

Progress from March, 1911 to April, 1912. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



83 



1912, continued. 

1714. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The 
color plate in geology. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Jan., 1912, v. 19, p. 35.) MFA 

1715. Prilejaeff, Alexandre. The choice 
and preparation of compensating light- 
filters for the autochrome plate, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 

1911, v. 58, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 58-59, 61-62; 1912, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 

For a correction of typographical error see above 
periodical, v. 58, Nov. 3, 1911, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 64. 

1716. Le Procede diachrome. (Photo- 
gazette, Paris, April 25, 1912, annee 22, p. 
110-113.) MFA 

1717. Recapitulation of direct color process 
by photography. (Bulletin of photogra- 
phy, Philadelphia, Nov. 6, 1912, v. 11, p. 
686-687.) f MFA 

1718. Rheinberg, Julius. The micro-spec- 
tra method of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 
3, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 

Corrects a statement that Drac's process is similar 
to his own. 

1719. Rheinberg, Julius, and Ernest Rhein- 
berg. The micro-spectra method of colour 
photography by prismatic dispersion, illus. 
(Photographic journal, London, April, 

1912, new series, v. 36, p. 162-191.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 19-24, 28-31, 33-36, 38-40, MFA, and in Zeit- 
schrift fiir wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 

1913, Bd. 12, p. 373-408, PLC. 

1720. Schmidt, Fritz. Farbenphotogra- 
phie; eine Sammlung von Aufnahmen in 
natiirlichen Farben. Heft 1. Leipzig: 
E. A. Seemann tl912?]. illus. f°. f MFV 

Attractive photographs. 

1721. Starr, William Ireland. Colour pho- 
tographs on the Dufay dioptichrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 1, 1912, v. 59, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 10-11.) MFA 

Instructions in detail. 

1722. Str. Das Utocolorverfahren. (Pho- 
tographische Chronik, Halle a. S., July 3, 
1912, Jahrg. 19, p. 333-335.) f Mp A 

1723. Thieme, Paul. Autochromaufnahmen 
bei natiirlichem und kiinstlichem Licht. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1912, Bd. 49, p. 135-137.) MFA 

1724. Thovert, J. Hypersensitizing auto- 
chrome plates. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, June 19, 1912, v. 10, p. 829- 
833.) t MFA 



1725. Valenta, Eduard. Die Photographie 
in natiirlichen Farben, mit besonderer Be- 
riicksichtigung des Lippmannschen Ver- 
fahrens sowie jener Methoden, welche bei 
einmaliger Belichtung ein Bild in Farben 
liefern. Halle a. S.: W. Knapp, 1912. xi, 
180 p., 6 pi. 2. ed. 8°. (Encyclopadie der 
Photographie. Heft 2.) MFV 

1726. Uber das Utocolorrapidpapier. 

(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1912, Bd. 49, p. 361-362.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Rundschau, Halle 
a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 341-342, MFA. 

1727. Le Verachromoscope. illus. (La 
Nature, Paris, 1912, tome 40, semestre 2, 
supplement, p. 19.) OA 

1728. Wall, Edward John. The micro- 
spectra method of colour photography by 
prismatic dispersion. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 7, 1912, v. 59, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 32.) 

MFA 

Claims that Charles Cros outlined the process in 
1869. 

1729. Weissermel, W. Autochrome ex- 
posures by flashlight. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 5, 1912, v. 59, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 18-19.) 

MFA 

Uses a pyrocatechin developer. 

1730. ■ Zur Farbenphotographie mit 

Autochromplatten u. a. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1912, Bd. 49, p. 58- 
59.) MFA 

Autochrome, Dioptichrome, Omnicolore, N. P. G. 
plates. 

1731. Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm. Far- 
bige Kinematographie. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1912, 
Bd. 49, p. 436-440.) MFA 

Briefly describes various processes. 

1732. Wood, Robert Williams. Selective 
absorption of light on the moon's surface 
and lunar photography. (Astrophysical 
journal, Chicago, July, 1912, v. 36, p. 74— 
84.) OMA 

Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 44, MFA. 

1733. Worel, Karl. Mein verbessertes Ver- 
fahren der Photographie in Korperfarben 
durch Farbenanpassung. (Jahrbuch fiir 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
fiir 1912, Halle a. S., 1912, Jahrg. 26, p. 8- 
15.) MFA 

1734. Das Utocolorpapier. (Photo- 
graphische Kunst, Miinchen, 1911-12, 
Jahrg. 10, p. 203-204.) f MFA 



84 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1913 

1735. Adrien, Charles. Notes sur la pho- 
tographic en couleurs dans les glaciers. 
(Societe frangaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1913, serie 3, tome 4, p. 59-60.) 

MFA 

1736. Bawtree, A. E. A new colour trans- 
parency process, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 41-44, 48.) 

MFA 

Uses sensitized fish-glue solution. 
Abstract in Amateur photographer &■ photographic 
news, London, Nov. 10, 1913, v. 58, p. 430, ^MFA. 

1737. Berger, Arthur. Uber die Farben- 
wiedergabe durch die Autochromplatte. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 357-358.) MFA 

1738. Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice Audi- 
bert. Das Kineidochrom. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 391-396.) MFA 

Authors' process of color kinematograpby. 

1739. Blaauw, A. H. De tropische natuur 
in schetsen en kleuren... Amsterdam: 
Koloniaal Instituut, 1913. 3 p.l., (i)x-xi, 
185 p., 28 col'd pi., 4 maps, illus. 8°. BFK 

■ Amsterdam: Koloniaal Insti- 
tuut, 1917. xi, 191 p. 2. ed. illus. 8°. 

BFK 

1740. Brown, George Edward. All about 
color photography, illus. (Photo-minia- 
ture, New York, July, 1913, v. 11, p. 373- 
411.) MFA 

General article describing well-known processes. 

1741. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler tri- 
colour single exposure camera. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 6, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 22-23.) MFA 

1742. Calmels, H. Le temoin de selection 
trichrome de Wratten & Wainwright. 
illus. (Societe frangaise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1913, serie 3, tome 4, p. 157— 
159.) MFA 

1743. Cobenzl, A. Farbenraster-Photogra- 
phie. illus. (Photographische Korrespon- 
denz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 242-247.) MFA 

Compares various plates used for color photography. 

1744. ■ Farbige Photographien. (Pho- 
tographische Kunst, Munchen, 1912-13, 
Jahrg. 11, p. 284-287.) f MFA 

Comparison of Autochrome, Dufay, Omnicolore, 
and Thames plates. 

1745. Coker, Ernest George. Colour pho- 
tography of internal stress in bodies of 
engineering form, illus. in color. (West 
of Scotland Iron & Steel Institute. Journal, 
Glasgow, 1913, v. 20, p. 81-104.) VIA 

1746. Colour photography by the Paget 
duplicating method. (British journal of 



photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 15-16.) 

MFA 

1747. Cominetti, Annibale. Farbige Kino- 
aufnahmen und deren Projektion. illus. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 231-234.) MFA 

Berthon & Audibert patent. 

1748. Coonoor, pseud. On working the 
autochrome plate in India. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, 
v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 
3-4.) MFA 

1749. Cooper, James. Amateurs and the 
autochrome. (Photo-era, Boston, Aug., 
1913, v. 31, p. 80-85.) MFA 

Has table and abacus for exposures. 

1750. Cousin, Ernest. Contribution a l'ob- 
tention des reproductions d'autochromes 
sur autochromes. (Societe frangaise de 
photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, serie 
3, tome 4, p. 330-335.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 7, MFA, and in Photographische Mit- 
teilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 373-374, MFA. 

1751. Developing autochromes by ruby- 
light. (Photo-era, Boston, Oct., 1913, v. 31, 
p. 213.) MFA 

From circular issued by the Gaumont Co. 

1752. Drake-Brockman, H. G. A drying 
cupboard for hyper - sensitised screen- 
plates, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 7, 1913, v. 60, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 9-11.) 

MFA 

1753. Eder, Josef Maria. Quellenschriften 
zu den fruhesten Anfangen der Photogra- 
phie bis zum xviii. Jahrhundert . . mit fiinf 
heliographischen Portraten, zwei Licht- 
drucktitelblattern und diversem Buch- 
schmuk. Halle a. S.: Wilhelm Knapp, 
1913. 1 p.l., 187(1) p., 5 ports, illus. 4°. 

f PKB 

Facsimiles of papers by Fabricius, Croll, Boyle, 
Balduin, Schulze, Hellot, Scheele, and Beccaria on 
the chemical action of light. Interesting introduction. 

1754. Enlarged negatives from auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

1755. Fallowfield, Jonathan. Autochrome 
correcting screens. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 32.) 

MFA 

For sale by the above firm. 

1756. Foersterling, K. Lichtfortpflanzung 
in inhomogenen Medien; Theorie der Lipp- 
mannschen Farbenphotographie. (Physi- 
kalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913, Jahrg. 
14, p. 265-270.) PAA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



85 



1913, continued. 

1757. Gebhard, Kurt. Notes on the chem- 
istry of the bleaching-out of dyes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 

3, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 38-40.) MFA 

1758. Veranderung organischer Farb- 

stoffe im Licht. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 118- 
130.) MFA 

1759. Zur Theorie des Ausbleichver- 

fahrens (Utocolorpapier). (Photograph- 
ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. SO, 
p. 76-77.) MFA 

1760. Gerard, Louise. La retouche des 
autochromes. (Societe frangaise de photo- 
graphic Bulletin, Paris, 1913, serie 3, tome 

4, p. 337-338.) MFA 

1761. Grange. Black and green spots on 
autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 

1762. Grove, J. M. C. Prismatic fantasies 
of colour on autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 4.) MFA 

1763. Heyne, W. Zur Kinematographie 
in natiirlichen Farben. ("Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 22- 
26.) MFA 

1764. Hind, H. Lloyd, and W. B. Randles. 
Handbook of photomicrography. New 
York: E. P. Dutton & Co. [1913.] xii, 292 
p., 44 pi. 8°. OCG 

See chapter 9: Colour screens and colour sensitive 
plates; chapter 13: Colour photomicrography. Good 
reproductions of autochromes. 

1765. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. The 
Christensen (Agfa) screen-plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 4.) MFA 

Suggestions as to light filter and reversing bath. 

1766. The correction of prevailing 

tints in autochromes by coloured screens. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

1767. Gelbscheiben fur Autochromauf- 

nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 79.) MFA 

1768. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit 

der Autochromplatte. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 81.) 

MFA 

1769. Ihran, R. Sensitising methylene blue 
for bleach - out pictures in the camera. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 11-12.) MFA 



1770. Intensifying autochromes. (Photo- 
era, Boston, Aug., 1913, v. 31, p. 105.) MFA 

Agfa intensifier. 

1771. Just, Alexander. Neuere Erfahrungen 
auf dem Gebiete des Ausbleichverfahrens. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 168-179.) MFA 

Thiosinamine derivatives as sensitisers. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-27, MFA. 

1772. Koenig, Ernst. Farben - Kinemato- 
graphie. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 3-5.) MFA 

Kinemacolor and colorgraph processes. 

1773. Ein neues Farbrasterverfahren. 

(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1913, Bd. 50, p. 277-278.) MFA 

Paget plate. 

1774. Ein vereinfachtes Kopierver- 

fahren mit Pinatypiefarbstoffen. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 325-326.) MFA 

1775. Kuemmell, G. Weitere Untersu- 
chungen iiber die Beschleunigung des Aus- 
bleichens von Farbstoffen. (Zeitschrift 
fur wissenschaftliche Photographie, Leip- 
zig, 1912, Bd. 11, p. 133-136.) PLC 

Translation in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Sept. 6, 1912, v. 59, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 41-42, MFA. 

1776. Le Mee, Alexandre. Colour prints 
on opal. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 19-20.) MFA 

1777. The Leto Photo Materials Co. A 

new colour screen - plate — "The Leto." 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 

1778. Lueppo-Cramer. On reversal of the 
image in making screen-plate colour trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Oct. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 

Abstract in Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1914, serie 3, tome 5, p. 171-172, MFA. 

1779. Lugdunensis, pseud. A one-exposure 
three-colour camera, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, ' London, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 27, 32.) 

MFA 

1780. Manners, Samuel. Colour prints by 
the Raydex process. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 4, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 

MFA 

1781. Martin, Karl. Ueber verbesserte Fil- 
ter fur Autochromaufnahmen: (Jahrbuch 
fur Photographie und Reproduktionstech- 
nik fur 1913, Halle a. S., 1913, Jahrg. 27, 
p. 103-104.) MFA 



86 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1913, continued. 

1782. Meesterwerken der kleuren - photo- 
graphic Eene verzameling van opnamen 
in de natuurlijke kleuren door middel van 
Lumieres autochroomplaten. Leiden: A. 
W. Sijthoff [1912-13]. 12 parts in 1 v. 
col'd illus. 4°. ffMFV 

60 mounted plates and illustrated articles by Fritz 
Schmidt and others. 

1783. Monjauze, G. Emploi des lampes 
electriques , a incandescence pour le por- 
trait sur autochromes. illus. (Societe 
franqaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1913, serie 3, tome 4, p. 203-204.) MFA 

1784. Monochrome prints from colour 
negatives. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Special reference to Paget plates. 

1785. Monpillard, Felix. Colour rendering 
with extra-sensitised autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 18.) MFA 

1786. Extra sensitising of autochromes 

in practice. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

1787. Morton, Arthur E. Conversion of 
autochromes into Paget colour slides. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 5, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 

1788. Exposure of colour plates: some 

notes preparatory to a demonstration. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 2, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 

Describes his process for exposing autochrome, Du- 
fay, and Paget plates. 

1789. Influences modifying colour 

rendering. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 

Importance of reflection and colour contrasts. 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Nov., 
1913, v. 20, p. 535-536, MFA. 

1790. Namias, Rodolfo. Bemerkungen 
und Beobachtungen aus der Praxis der 
Autochromphotographie. (Jahrbuch fur 
Photographie und Reproduktionstechnik 
fur 1913, Halle a. S., 1913, Jahrg. 27, p. 
162-167.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era, Boston, June, 1914, v. 32, 
p. 230-282, MFA. 

1791. Fehler bei Autochromaufnahmen 

und deren Abhilfe. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 47- 
48.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Feb. 9, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 71-73, fMFA. 



1792. Eine Neue Farbenrasterplatte. (Pho- 
tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 144.) MFA 

Leto plate. 

1793. Photographs that have been made in 
natural colors. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, Dec. 31, 1913, v. 13, p. 835- 
836.) f MFA 

Brief early history. 

1794. Piper, Charles Welborne. The func- 
tions of black and white in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 

1795. Pledge, John H. The Christensen 
screen-plate, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 3, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 4.) 

MFA 

Photomicrographs of above plate and autochrome. 

1796. The Paget screen-plate, illus. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1797. Renger-Patzsch, Robert. Die Far- 
benplatte der Paget Co. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 
363-364.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Chronik, Halle a. 
S., Nov. 12, 1913, Jahrg. 20, p. 613-614, '{MFA. 

1798. Rypinski, M. C. Color photography. 
(American annual of photography for 1914, 
New York, 1913, v. 28, p. 116-126.) MFA 

Briefly describes Dufay, Paget, and Autochrome 

processes. 

1799. Schrott, Paul, Ritter von. Abschwa- 
chen von Autochromplatten. (Photogra- 
phische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1913, Bd. 
50, p. 397-400.) MFA 

Also printed in Societe franchise de photographie. 
Bulletin, Paris, 1914, serie 3, tome 5, p. 170-171, 

MFA. 

1800. Schwarzer, Ed. Grenzen des Auto- 
chromverfahrens. (Photographische Welt, 
Leipzig, Nov. 15, 1913, Jahrg. 27, p. 161- 
162.) MFA 

1801. Smith, John H. Recent investiga- 
tions in the bleachout process of colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 1, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 

Also printed in Photographische Korrespondenz, 
Wien, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 400-405, MFA, Photo- 
graphische Mitteilungen, Berlin, 1913, Bd. 50, p. 255- 
257, 267-268, MFA, and Societe francaise de photo- 
graphie. Bulletin, Paris, 1913, serie 3, tome 4, p. 
267-275, MFA. 

1802. Smitten, Howard M. Color plate 
exposures. illus. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, Oct., 1913, v. 20, p. 475-476.) 

MFA 

Dial designed for use with the Wynne meter. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 15, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



87 



1913, continued. 

1803. Sparkle in colour transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 7, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Suggestion for obviating. 

1804. Spoerl, Hans. Utocolor-Rapidpapier. 
(Photographische Kunst, Munchen, 1912— 
13, Jahrg. 11, p. 173-174.) f MFA 

1805. Steigerung der Empfindlichkeit der 
Autochromplatte. (Photographische Chro- 
nik, Halle a. S., April 23, 1913, Jahrg. 20, 
p. 214.) f MFA 

Von Hiibl's method. 

1806. Stenger, Erich. The history of the 
reversal process as used in screen-plate 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 5, 1913, v. 60, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 35-36.) 

MFA 

1807. Streissler, Alfred. Das Paget-Far- 
benverfahren. (Photographische Welt, 
Leipzig, Oct. 15, 1913, Jahrg. 27, p. 146- 
148.) MFA 

1808. Das Rheinbergsche Verfahren 

der Farbenphotographie. (Photogra- 
phische Welt, Leipzig, May 15, 1913, Jahrg. 
27, p. 67-68.) MFA 

1809. Substituting white paper for black 
behind autochrome plates. (Photo-era, 
Boston, Feb., 1913, v. 30, p. 95.) MFA 

1810. Thoerner, W. A simple viewing 
cabinet for autochromes. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 1, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 

1811. Tobler, Friedrich. Einige Erfah- 
rungen bei Autochromaufnahmen in den 
Tropen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1913, Bd. 50, p. 297-300.) MFA 

1812. Union photographique industrielle 
iStablissements Lumiere & Jougla reunis. 

Sensibilisieren von Ausbleichschichten. 
(Chemisch-technisches Repertorium, Co- 
then, May 17, 1913, Jahrg. 37, p. 276.) VOA 

D. R. P. 258241. Abstract only. Translation in 
British journal of photography, London, June 6, 1913, 
v. 60, Colour photography supplement, p. 24, MFA. 

1813. Utocolour bleachout paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 5, 
1913, v. 60, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 36.) MFA 

Brief reference to improved paper. 

1814. Wallace, Robert James. Plain 
versus color-sensitive plates. . . Questions 
answered by the director of the Research 
Laboratory of the G. Cramer Dry Plate 
Co. (Camera craft, San Francisco, Feb., 
1913, v. 20, p. 66-68.) MFA 



1815. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of col- 
our plates. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 6, 1913, v. 60, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Criticises Morton's exposure scheme. 

1816. The Watkins colour plate meter. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 4, 1913, v. 60, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

1817. Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Fin- 
lay. A demonstration of the Paget colour 
plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
April, 1913, new series, v. 37, p. 142-148.) 

MFA 

With discussion. 

1818. Why are color plates not artistically 
satisfactory? (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, July 23, 1913, v. 13, p. 111- 
112.) fMFA 

1819. Wychgram, Engelhard. Autochrome 
Tierphotographie an der Nordsee. (Pho- 
tographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1913, 
Bd. 50, p. 229-231.) MFA 



1914 

1820. Barker, J. W. The Paget color proc- 
ess — making the positive. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 408- 
409.) MFA 

1821. Barton, E. A. A note on exposure 
of autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 24.) 

MFA 

1822. Bawtree, A. E. Lead intensification, 
illus. (Amateur photographer, London, 
May 25, 1914, v. 59, p. 497-498.) f MFA 

Partly reprinted in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1914, v. 21, p. 295-296, MFA. 

1823. Biermann, E. A. Individualised auto- 
chromy. (Amateur photographer & pho- 
tographic news, London, July 20, 1914, v. 
60, p. 56.) f MFA 

Suggestions for exposure. 

1824. Brand, John. The Raydex process 
of colour photography on paper. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 6, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9.) MFA 

1825. Breton, Andre. Photographies en 
couleurs pouvant etre reproduites. Le 
procede Paget. (La Nature, Paris, 1914, 
annee 42, semestre 2, p. 148-151.) OA 

1826. Brizet, Andre. Exposure and de- 
velopment of autochromes. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 1, 1914, 
v. 61, Colour photography supplement, p. 
19-20.) MFA 



88 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1914, continued. 

1827. Broum, Karl H. Einiges zur Drei- 
farben-Autotypie. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1914, Bd. 51, p. 450-451.) 

MFA 

1828. Burton,, H. M. Hints for new colour- 
plate workers. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 37-38.) 

MFA 

1829. The Business aspect of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25-26.) MFA 

1830. Calmels, H. Procede Paget - Color 
pour la photographie des couleurs a un 
nombre illimite d'exemplaires. (Societe 
francaise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 
1914, serie 3, tome 5, p. 186-197.) MFA 

1831. Carr, Sydney Herbert. Notes on ex- 
posure, etc., in the autochrome process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 48.) MFA 

1832. Carrara, Achille. A new quick-dry- 
ing sensitiser for three colour and ordinary 
carbon tissues. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4.) 

MFA 

Ammonium bichromate and ethyl alcohol. 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1914, v. 21, p. 293-294, MFA. 

1833. Reproduction of autochromes 

on paper by three-colour carbon printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 10.) MFA 

/Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Aug., 
1914, v. 21, p. 407-408, MFA. 

1834. Cremier, Victor. Chloranol as a de- 
veloper for autochrome plates. (British 
journal of photography, London, July 3, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 26-27.) MFA 

1835. Dawson, Alfred. Three-colour cam- 
eras. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Endeavors to explain lack of symmetry in images. 

1836. Dearden, W. Autochrome hints. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1837. The Evolution of screen-plate colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 

1838. An Exhibition of the work of Louis 
Ducos du Hauron in colour photography. 



(British journal of photography, London, 
June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 23-24.) MFA 

Gives a list of early negatives and prints. 

1839. Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist. Uber 
die Bildung von Farbstoffen durch Oxyda- 
tion mittels belichteten Halogensilbers. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1914, Bd. 51, p. 18-22, 208-211.) MFA 

1840. Foersterling, K. Zur Theorie der 
Lippmannschen Farbenphotographie. 
(Physikalische Zeitschrift, Leipzig, 1913- 
14, Jahrg. 14, p. 265-270; Jahrg. 15, p. 225- 
234, 940-952.) PAA 

1841. Gebhard, Kurt. Bildung und Zersto- 
rung von Farbstoffen im Licht. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1914, Bd. 51, p. 384-385.) MFA 

1842. H., P. Zur Paget-Farbrasterplatte. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1914, Bd. 50, p. 124.) MFA 

1843. Hamburger, Aron. The polychro- 
mide colour process. (Photographic jour- 
nal, London, Nov., 1914, new series, v. 38, 
p. 288-294.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 45-47; Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 4, MFA, Amateur pho- 
tographer & photographic news, London, Nov. 2, 1914, 
v. 60, p. 419, MFA, Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Feb., 1915, v. 22, p. 82-83, MFA. 

1844. Hamburger, W. S. Autochrome 
flashlight portraiture. (American photog- 
raphy, Boston, Aug., 1914, v. 8, p. 514-516.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-35, MFA. 

1845. Hargreaves, F. J. Focussing screens 
for color screen plates. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Aug., 1914, v. 21, p. 409- 
410.) MFA 

1846. A new use for the Paget method 

of color photography. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 140-141.) 

MFA 

For testing and demonstrating the orthochromatic 
properties of plates and the efficiency of light filters. 

1847. Hess, Henry. Direct colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

An appreciation of the work of F. E. Ives. 

1848. Hess-Ives Company. Three colour 
prints. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Abstract of French patent no. 461078 of Aug. 4, 
1913. 

1849. Heydecker, W. A. Reproduction tri- 
chrome d'autochromes. (Societe francaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, 1914, 
serie 3, tome 5, p. 172.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



89 



1914, continued. 

1850. Hitchins, Alfred Bishop. Some notes 
on autochrome work in professional prac- 
tice. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 22-23, 27.) MFA 

Also printed in Wilson's photographic magazine, 
New York, 1914, v. 51, p. 15-17, MFA. 

1851. Honore, C. Halet. Three colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Discusses lack of symmetry in images. 

1852. Ihran, R. Bleachout dyes. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 5, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 

1853. Ives, Frederick Eugene. Three- 
colour cameras. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 27.) MFA 

Defends his patent against claims of Pfenninger. 

1854. Three-colour prints. (British 

journal of photography, London, Aug. 7, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 32.) MFA 

From negatives made at one exposure in trichro- 
matic cameras patented by the author. 

1855. Judging the quality of natural color 
photography. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, July 8, 1914, v. 15, p. 48-49.) 

f MFA 

1856. Karl Wilhelm Wolf-Czapek. port. 
(Photographische Kunst, Miinchen, 1913- 
14, Jahrg. 12, Tafel 78, opp. p. 249.) f MFA 

1857. Kein, Wold. Retuschieren von Auto- 
chrombildern. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p. 17.) MFA 

1858. Koenig, Ernst. A new colour sensi- 
tiser. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 13-14.) MFA 

A red which is readily miscible with other cyanine 
sensitisers with less prejudicial effect upon the whole 
mixture. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1914, v. 21, p. 243-245, MFA. 

1859. Simplified pinatype. (British 

journal of photography, London, May 1, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 20.) MFA 

1860. Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de. A 
system of colour photography. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 

The colors are filtered and selected by means of a 

three-color diaphragm placed in the lens and by aid 

of a half-tone screen placed immediately in front of 
the sensitive panchromatic plate. 



'1861. Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere. 
Color photography. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, June, 1914, v. 8, p. 358-364.) 

MFA 

Cros — Ducos du Hauron and Autochrome proc- 
esses. 

1862. Colour screen-plates. (British 

journal of photography, London, Oct. 2, 
1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 40.) MFA 

Abstract of their French patent no. 467128 of 
March 21, 1913. 

1863. McCord, Bennett. Why not the auto- 
chrome? (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1914, 
v. 18, p. 679-682.) MFA 

Advantages and drawbacks. 

1864. Mcintosh, J. Some special methods 
of dealing with screen plate transpar- 
encies. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan., 1914, new series, v. 38, p. 5-13.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Abstract in British journal of photography, London, 
March 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 11-12, MFA. Last part of this abstract in 
Camera craft, San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 
139-140, MFA. 

1865. Mann, A. Colour photography 
simply explained. A series of articles for 
the beginner on the theory and practice 
of colour photography. (Amateur pho- 
tographer & photographic news, London, 
1914, v. 60, p. 36-37, 60-61, 84-85.) f MFA 

Different processes explained. 

1866. Massiot, G. La lanterne "Frigida," 
son but, son utilite pour la projection des 
autochromes. illus. (Societe frangaise de 
photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1914, serie 3, 
tome 5, p. 224-226.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40, MFA. 

1867. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
triple projection process of colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 

1868. Miethe, Adolf. Zur Asthetik photo- 
graphischer Farbenaufnahmen. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1914, 
Bd. 51, p. 293-294.) MFA 

1869. Monpillard, Felix. A cabinet for the 
drying of hypersensitised autochrome 
plates, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

1870. Morton, Arthur E. On tour with 
screen-plates. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 30.) MFA 

1871. Sunrise and sunset effects. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 4. 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 47.) MFA 



90 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1914, continued. 

1872. Murdoch, Helen M. [Colour photog- 
raphy.] (British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

Exposure and development in India. 

1873. Colour photography in Ceylon. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

Exposure and development. 

1874. A New Paget process for colour 
prints on paper. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 

1875. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Telepho- 
tography with autochrome plates. (Photo- 
era, Boston, July, 1914, v. 33, p. 17-20.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 31-32, 33-34, MFA. 

1876. Pfenninger, Otto. Three - colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 5, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Claims that Ducos du Hauron's patent 2973 of 

1876. and that of Cros, 9012 of 1892 are the bases 
for Ives patent (4606 of 1892). 

1877. Piper, Charles Welborne. The ray- 
dex colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
p. 5-6.) MFA 

1878. The Polychromide process of colour 
photography on paper. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 

MFA 

1879. Potonniee, G. Biographie de Louis 
de Ducos du Hauron. (Societe francaise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1914, se- 
rie 3, tome S, p. 149-163.) MFA 

Includes bibliography of works and patents. 

1880. Power, H. D'Arcy. Experiences 
with the Paget color plate. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, March, 1914, v. 21, p. 107- 
109.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, May 1, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 17-18, MFA. 

1881. Further notes on the Paget 

color plate. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
April, 1914, v. 21, p. 193-194.) MFA 

1882. The Reproduction of direct colour 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 7, 1914, v. 61, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 29.) MFA 

Reproduction by photo-engraving process. 

1883. Rigg, Gilbert. Color photography 
applied to the demonstration of the micro- 
structure of ores. (Metallurgical and 
chemical engineering, New York, Jan., 
1914, v. 12, p. 30-31.) VOA 

Abstract. 



1884. Rypinski, M. C. Color photography. 
(Illuminating Engineering Society. Trans- 
actions, New York, 1914, v. 9, p. 579-592.) 

VOK 

Brief historical review and details of development. 
Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, Feb. 27, 1915, v. 79, p. 134-135, VA. 

1884a. Schultess- Young, H. S. Some notes 
on the autochrome and Paget colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 41-42, 48.) MFA 

Also printed in The Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, 
v. 19, p. 191-192, MFA. 

1885. Sheahan, David J. The making of 
autochromes. (American annual of pho- 
tography for 1915, New York, 1914, v. 29, 
p. 284-286.) MFA 

1886. Stands for the exhibition of colour 
transparencies, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 4, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 35-36.) 

MFA 

1887. Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch. 
Bleach-out process. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 6, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 12.) 

MFA 

Abstract of German patent 264207 of Sept. 10, 1912. 

1888. Thieme, Paul. Die Paget - Prize- 
Platte vom Standpunkte des Amateurs. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1914, Bd. 51, p. 65-67.) MFA 

1889. Tobler, Friedrich. The autochrome 
process in the tropics. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 3, 1914, v. 61, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 16.) 

MFA 

Discusses keeping qualities of plates and develop- 
ment. 

1890. Valette, T., and R. Feret. Colour 
prints on fabrics. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 7.) MFA 

Abstract of French patent no. 457446 of May 3, 
1913. 

1891. Wall, Edward John. Autochrome 
formulae. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 42-44.) MFA 

1892. The present status of color pho- 
tography. (Photo-era, Boston, 1914, v. 33, 
p. 126-129, 171-176.) MFA 

1893. The structure of screen-plates. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 4.) , MFA 

1894. Zur Geschichte der Farbenpho- 

tographie. (Jahrbuch fur Photographie 
und Reproduktionstechnik fur 1914, Halle 
a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 127-129.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



91 



1914, continued. 

1895. Watkins, Alfred. Exposure of auto- 
chrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 27.) MFA 

1896. Weidmann, U. Autochrom-Teleauf- 
nahmen. (Photographische Mitteilungen, 
Berlin, 1914, Bd. 51, p. 204.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 27-28, MFA. 

1897. Weissermel, W. Das neue Pinatypie- 
verfahren. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1914, Bd. 51, p. 72-73.) MFA 

1898. Wenz, Smile. Pavilion pour exposer 
les plaques autochromes. illus. (Societe 
francaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
1914, serie 3, tome 5, p. 127-129.) MFA 

1899. Whatmough, W. A. The Raydex 
process at the Society of Colour Photog- 
raphers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 6, 1914, v. 61, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

1900. Wilkinson, W. T. Dark-room hints 
for panchromatic plates and autochrome 
development. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 3, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

1901. Woodhead, A. E. Photography in 
colour. (Society of Dyers and Colourists. 
Journal, Bradford, 1914, v. 30, p. 78-84.) 

f VLG 

1902. Worel, Karl. Das neue, verbesserte 
Utocolorpapier. (Jahrbuch fiir Photogra- 
phic und Reproduktionstechnik fiir 1914, 
Halle a. S., 1914, Jahrg. 28, p. 35-36.) MFA 

1903-1904. Wright, H. W. Canning. The 
raydex colour process. (British journal 
of photography, Jan. 2, 1914, v. 61, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 



1915 

1905. Aeonchrome colour plate. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 48.) MFA 

Brief announcement of company's organization. 

1906. Allan, Sidney. The new kodachrome 
process of color photography. (Bulletin of 
photography, Philadelphia, May 26, 1915, 
v. 16, p. 654-655.) f MFA 

1907. Arch, John C. Hints on making ray- 
dex colour prints. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 25-26.) 

MFA 

1908. Aron, Reinhold. Uber die Farben- 
wiedergabe mit der Lippmannschen 
Methode. illus. (Zeitschrift fiir wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 
15, p. 65-78, 97-125.) PLC 



1909. Biermann, E. A. Autochrome work. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

Paper read before the Birmingham Photographic 
Society. Shows departures from established practice. 

1910. Autochromy up to date. (Ameri- 
can annual of photography for 1916, New 
York, 1915, v. 30, p. 170-173.) MFA 

1911. Black, Adam. Colour vision. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
3, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 48.) MFA 

1912. Degeneration of panchromatic 

plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 

1913. Objections to panchromatic 

plates, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 45-47.) MFA 

1914. ■ Some notes on the working of 

autochromes. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

1915. Blochmann, Richard. Zur deutschen 
Farbenplatte. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 53, p. 74-77.) 

MFA 

Amateur's experience with Agfa plates. 

1916. Brown, George Edward. The koda- 
chrome process of colour portraiture. 
(Photographic journal, London, April, 1915, 
new series, v. 39, p. 141-143.) MFA 

1917. Burton, H. M. Making natural col- 
our lantern slides by the Paget process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 

1918. Carr, Sydney Herbert. The latitude 
of the autochrome plate. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photographv supplement, p. 8.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1915, v. 22, p. 204-205, MFA, and in Photo-era, 
Boston, May, 1915, v. 34, p. 216, MFA. 

1919. Notes on exposure in the auto- 
chrome process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 4.) MFA 

1920. Croughton, G. Hanmer. The East- 
man colour transparency process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 3.) MFA 

1921. Davidson, P. G. The pigment diffi- 
culty in the three-colour processes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 7, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 20.) MFA 



92 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1915, continued. 

1922. Davis, Vivian P. Notes on the im- 
proved raydex colour-print process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 1, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 1-2.) MFA 

1923. The raydex process. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, Nov., 1915, new 
series, v. 39, p. 266-272.) MFA 

1924. Dr. Kurt Gebhart. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 63- 
64.) MFA 

Portrait and obituary notice. 

1925. Domony, R. B. An exposure meter 
for colour and ordinary plates. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

Wynne Hunter instrument. 

1926. Donaldson, Charles. Portraits in 
color, illus. (American annual of photog- 
raphv for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 
78-83.) MFA 

1927. Eder, Josef Maria. Uber farbenemp- 
findliche Platten zur Spektrumphotographie 
im Infrarot, Rot, Gelb und Griin. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1915, Bd. 52, p. 271-277.) MFA 

1928. Fingerhuth, C. Schwarzweisskopien 
von Autochromaufnahmen. (Photograph- 
ische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 52, 
p. 81-82.) MFA 

1929. Gamble, E. H. The difficulty in the 
three-colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 5, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 12.) 

MFA 

Discussion between author and C. Welborne Piper. 

1930. The pigment difficulty in the tri- 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

1931. Genthe, Arnold. Some remarks on 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 39-40.) 

MFA 

Comments on artistic and commercial possibilities. 

1932. Hanneke, Paul. Zur Photographie 
mit farbenempfindlichen Platten. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
Bd. 52, p. 167-169.) MFA 

1933. Hess-Ives color photography. (The 
Camera, Philadelphia, 1915, v. 19, p. 725- 
726.) MFA 

1934. Hess-Ives Corporation. The Hicro 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raph}', London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 

From booklet issued by the company. 



1935. Hofrat Prof. Dr. J. M. Eder. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 
52, opp. p. 100.) MFA 

Portrait. 

1936. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Three- 
colour photography: with special reference 
to three-colour printing and similar proc- 
esses. Translated by Henry Oscar Klein. . . 
London: P. Lund, Humphries & Co., Ltd., 
1915. 138 p., 2 col'd pi., 3 col'd diagrs. 
illus. 8°. MFV 

The Library also has edition of 1904 published in 
London by A. W. Penrose & Co. 

1937. An Important development in color 
photography. (Scientific American, New 
York, 1915, v. 112, p. 341, 350.) VA 

Kodachrome process. 

1938. Jones, Chapman. On colour sensi- 
tised plates, illus. (Nature, London, 1915, 
v.94, p. 676-677, 701-703.) OA 

Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, April 10, 1915, v. 79, p. 240, VA. 

1939. Jones, L. A. Colour analyses of two 
component mixtures, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 6-8, 11, 
13-14.) MFA 

1940. Jones, L. A., and others. Relative 
photographic and visual efficiencies of illu- 
minants. illus. (Illuminating Engineering 
Society. Transactions, New York, Dec. 30, 
1915, v. 10, p. 963-986.) VOK 

A study upon ordinary and color-sensitive plates of 
various light sources. 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 42-44, 47-48; v. 63, 1916, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 8, MFA. 

1941. Kine-Chromo, pseud. The difficulties 
of colour cinematography. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 38-39.) 

MFA 

1942. Kodachrome. (Camera craft, San 
Francisco, June, 1915, v. 22, p. 248.) MFA 

1943. The Kodachrome process of colour 
portraiture, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 7, 1915, v. 62, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 17-20.) 

MFA 

Description and official directions. 

1944. Koenig, Ernst. Farbenempfindliche 
Platten. illus. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 52, p. 125-127.) 

MFA 

1945. Liesegang, Raphael Ed. Uber ein 
Badeverfahren zur Herstellung von Lipp- 
mann-Platten. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1915, Bd. 52, p. 198-200.) 

MFA 

1946. tlber die Polychromie des Sil- 

bers. (Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche 
Photographie, Leipzig, 1915, Bd. 14, p. 343- 
346.) PLC 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



93 



1915, continued. 

1947. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenempfindlich- 
keit und Tiefenentwicklung. illus. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1915, 
Bd. 52, p. 225-227.) MFA 

1948. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
kodachrome process of color portraiture. 
(American annual of photography for 1916, 
New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 9-21.) MFA 

1949. Ein Neues Patent fur ein altes Kon- 
trollverfahren fur die subtraktive Mehrfar- 
benphotographie. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1915, Bd. 52, p. 115-118.) 

MFA 

Comments on D. R. P. 276,645, Dec, 1912, to 
Bauge, Dumez and Seauve. 

1950. Pan Chromo, pseud. Control in tri- 
chromy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 38.) MFA 

1951. The supports of colour photo- 
graphs. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 30-31.) MFA 

Urges experiments to secure an improvement upon 
glass. 

1952. Penrose, Frank. The use of auto- 
chromes in bird photography with examples 
of protective coloration, etc. (Photographic 
journal, London, June, 1915, new series, v. 
39, p. 215-218.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 27-28, MFA. 

1953. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Interiors 
in natural colours by reflected light. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
4, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 22-24.) MFA 

Adaptation of autochromes for the work. 

1954. Pfenninger, Otto. The polychromide 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Jan. 1, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 3-4.) MFA 

1955. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour in 
photography and in vision. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1915, 
v. 62, Colour photography supplement, p. 
41-42.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, Jan., 

1916, v. 23, p. 29-30, MFA. 

1956. ■ — - — Colour rendering in colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 26-27.) MFA 

Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 
1915, v. 22, p. 371-373, MFA. 

1957. Exposure with screen plates. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 31-32.) MFA 



1958. The pigment difficulty in the 

three-colour process. (British journal of 
photography, London, 1915, v. 62, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5-6, 15-16.) 

MFA 

1959. Pope, Sir William Jackson. Colour 
photography. (Engineering, London, 
March 12, i915, v. 99, p. 304-305.) VDA 

General lecture. 

Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, June 12, 1915, v. 79, p. 381, VA. 

1960. Power, H. D'Arcy. Color in pictorial 
photography, illus. (American annual of 
photography for 1916, New York, 1915, v. 
30, p. 106-117.) MFA 

Relation of color photography to color vision. 

1961. Process for producing colored photo- 
graphic prints, illus. (Scientific American, 
New York, Dec. 11, 1915, v. 113, p. 524.) 

Process of Frederic E. Ives. VA 

1962. Professor Dr. Richard Neuhauss. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1915, Bd. 52, p. 45^6.) MFA 

Obituary notice. 

1963. Schultess- Young, W. A. Color pho- 
tography at its best. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, Dec, 1915, v. 9, p. 668-676.) 

MFA 

Brief directions for Paget and Autochrome plates. 

1964. Sheahan, David J. The autochrome. 
Possibilities of its use as a pictorial medium. 
(American annual of photography for 1916, 
New York, 1915, v. 30, p. 188-196.) MFA 

Abridgment in British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 15, MFA. 

1965. The Society of Colour Photographers. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1906, v. 53, p. 831-832, 849, 936; 1907, v. 54, 
p. 725, 767, 813, 828, supplement, p. 6, 30, 46, 
54, 71, 73; 1908, v. 55, p. 288, supplement, p. 
88; 1910, v. 59, supplement, p. 24, 40; 1911, 
v. 58, p. 88; 1912, v. 59, supplement, p. 12, 
16, 25-26; 1913, v. 60, supplement, p. 12, 14, 
23-24, 27-28, 32; 1914, v. 61, supplement, 
p. 20-22, 28; 1915, v. 62, p. 8.) MFA 

1966. Spiller, William H. Lantern slides in 
natural colors. (Photo-era, Boston, 1915, 
v. 34, p. 60-61, 113-11.6.) MFA 

Autochrome and Paget processes. 

1967. Two-colour photography in patent 
suit. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Account of setting aside of British patent 26671 
of 1906. 

1968. W., L. T. Colour slides in lantern 
lectures. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 5, 1915, v. 62, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Suggestions for overcoming contrast to the bril- 
liancy of the monochrome. 



94 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1915, continued. 

1969. Wall, Edward John. Kodachrome 
and other two-colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 6, 
1915, v. 62, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 29-30.) MFA 

1970. Weston, A. W. H. Autochromes in 
the reception room, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, June 4, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 21-22.) 

MFA 

1971. Xtensis, pseud. Panchromatic plates 
and colour ratios, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Sept. 3, 1915, v. 62, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 33.) 

MFA 



1916 

1972. Baum, Ernst. Aus der Praxis des 
Autochrom - Portrats vermittels Magne- 
sium-Blitzlicht. (Photographische Kunst, 
Miinchen, 1915-16, Jahrg. 14, p. 89-91.) 

f MFA 

1973. Biermann, E. A. The reproduction of 
colour-screen transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 7.) 

MFA 

1974. Black and white prints from auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1975. Brown, George Edward. Practical 
instructions in color-photography. illus. 
(Photo-miniature, New York, March, 1916, 
v. 13, p. 98-138.) MFA 

Autochrome, Paget, Hicro, and Kodachrome 

processes. 

1976. Cabinet experiments in colour photog- 
raphy, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 42-44, 47-48.) MFA 

1977. A Camera for two-colour photogra- 
phy, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, June 2, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 

Invention of Percy D. Brewster. 

1978. Capstaff, J. G. The kodachrome 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 30-31.) MFA 

Patent specifications. 

1979. Two-colour subtractive cinema- 
tography, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Sept. 1, 1916, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 34-36.) MFA 

Patent specification. 

1980. Cobenzl, A. Agfa - Farbenplatte. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. S3, p. 323-328.) MFA 



1981. Commercial colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 37-38.) MFA 

Some practical suggestions. 

1982. Darling, Lloyd. Photography in 
natural colors. illus. (Popular science 
monthly, New York, 1916, v. 89, p. 102- 
104.) * DA 

1983. The Death is announced of Herr Rob- 
ert Krayn. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 20.) MFA 

1984. Dr. Traubes neues Farbeverfahren 
fiir Diapositive. (Photographische Kunst, 
Miinchen, 1916, Jahrg. 15, p. 9.) fMFA 

1985. Donaldson, Charles. A bromoil trans- 
fer process of three-colour printing. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, July 7, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 25-26.) MFA 

1986. Three-colour bromoil transfers. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

1987. A Double-negative camera which re- 
produces images in natural colors, illus. 
(Scientific American, New York, May 6, 
1916, v. 114, p. 471, 495.) VA 

Apparatus of Percy D. Brewster. 

1988. Eldredge, Arthur G. Parallax in 
Paget plates. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

1989. Farbrasterplatten mit Glaskornern 
von MacDonough (1892) und ein verheim- 
lichtes Quellenzitat. (Photographische 
Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 23- 
25.) MFA 

1990. Festenb.erg, Hans. Einiges aus der 
Praxis der Pinatypie. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 25- 
27.) MFA 

1991. Fitzsimons, R. J., firm. Color pho- 
tography with autochrom plates... New 
York [1916,. 40 p. illus. 19. ed. nar. 16°. 

MFG p.v. 4, no. 7 

1992. Franck, Karl. Die Wirkungen der 
einzelnen Spektralfarben auf die verschie- 
denen lichtempfindlichen Schichten. illus. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. 53, p. 303-307.) MFA 

1993. Fraprie, Frank Roy, editor. How to 
make prints in colors... Boston: Ameri- 
can Photographic Publishing Co., 1916. 66 
p. 12°. (Practical photography, no. 4.) 

MFF (Practical v. 4) 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



95 



1916, continued. 

1994. Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. A 
ratiometer for use in colour reproduction 
work, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 9-11.) MFA 

Communication 35 from the Research Laboratory 
of the Eastman Kodak Co. 

1995. Graham, James. System in experi- 
mental work. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 27-28.) MFA 

1996. Hess-Ives color photography. (Amer- 
ican photography, Boston, Jan., 1916, v. 10, 
p. 35-36.) MFA 

1997. The Hess-Ives hiblock. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 40.) MFA 

Brief reference to this improvement. 

1998. Hewitt, C. H. Three-colour bromoil 
transfers. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

1999. Hnatek, Adolf. Versuche zur Anwen- 
dung strenger Selektivfilter bei spektral- 
photometrischen Untersuchungen. (Zeit- 
schrift fur wissenschaftliche Photographic, 
Leipzig, 1916, Bd. 15, p. 271-288.) PLC 

2000. Is this actual color in photography 
at last? (Popular science monthly, New 
York, 1916, v. 88, p. 417.) * DA 

2001. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Lippmann 
films as means for securing monochromatic 
light in photometry and optical pyrometry. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 48.) MFA 

2002. Ives, Herbert Eugene, and E. F. 
Kingsbury. The theory of the flicker photo- 
meter, illus. (Philosophical magazine & 
journal of science, London, Nov., 1914, se- 
ries 6, v. 28, p. 708-728; April, 1916, series 
6, v. 31, p. 290-321.) OA 

2003. Lectures on colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 41-42.) MFA 

Suggestions for giving lectures. 

2004. Lewisohn, John. A phantasy about 
color-photography and colors. (American 
annual of photography for 1917, New York, 
1916, v. 31, p. 182-187.) MFA 

Suggestions for possible improvements. 

2005. Luckiesh, Matthew. A filter for 
spectro-photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 31-32.) 

MFA 



2006. Making trichrome negatives. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 5, 
1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 17-18.) MFA 

Practical instructions. 

2007. Marshall, Andrew. Lecturing with 
colour slides. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 

Practical suggestions. 

2008. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. The 
kodachrome process of color photography. 
(Bulletin of photography, Philadelphia, Jan. 
26, 1916, v. 18, p. 101-105.) f MFA 

2009. Morris, Wayne. Color photography. 
(American annual of photography for 1917, 
New York, 1916, v. 31, p. 55-57.) MFA 

Compares autochrome and Paget processes. 

2010. Painter, F. W. The compensating 
light - filter in the autochrome and other 
screen plate processes. (British journal of 
photography, London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 11-12.) 

MFA 

2011. Perkins, Henry Farnham. Methods 
of exhibiting color-photographs. illus. 
(Photo-era, Boston, March, 1916, v. 36, p. 
103-105.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, April 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 

2012. Pfenninger, Otto. Colour sensitizing. 
(Penrose's annual, London, 1916, v. 21, p. 
37-40.) MDSA (Penrose) 

2013. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
vision. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 

2014. ■ — — Criticism and colour perception. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Oct. 6, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 

2015. ■ The photography of soap bubbles. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
May 5, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 

2016. Power, H. D'Arcy. Colour in pictorial 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 4, 1916, v. 63, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 5.) MFA 

2017. A Review of methods of direct color 
photography. (Bulletin of photography, 
Philadelphia, 1915, v. 17, p. 644, 675-676, 
707-708, 739, 772; 1916, v. 18, p. 3-4, 35-36, 
67-68, 132, 163-164, 209-210, 227-228, 259- 
260,291.) f MFA 

2018. Rodman, G. H. The Paget colour 
plate. (Photographic journal, London, 
Dec, 1916, new series, v. 40, p. 256-262.) 

MFA 



96 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1916, continued. 

2019. Salt, E. A. Rational panchromatism. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 

2020. Smith, John H. A resume of the 
work on the bleach-out process of colour 
photography, illus. (Manchester Literary 
and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and 
proceedings, Manchester, 1917, v. 60, no. 9, 
p. 1-15.) *EC 

Bibliography. Pictures not given in the reprint. 

Also printed in British journal of photography , 
London, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 39-40, 44, MFA. 

2021. Thiem, W. Uber farbige Blitzauf- 
nahmen. (Photographische Rundschau, 
Halle a. S., 1916, Bd. 53, p. 196-201.) MFA 

2022. Thieme, Paul. Gedanken und Ver- 
suche uber die neue Agfa - Farbenplatte. 
illus. (Photographische Rundschau, 1916, 
Bd. 53, p. 61-66.) MFA 

2023. Valenta, Eduard. Die neue Farbras- 
terplatte der Aktiengesellschaft fur Anilin- 
fabrikation in Berlin, illus. (Photograph- 
ische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, 
p. 193-198.) MFA 

Describes Christensen patent (D. R. P. no. 224456 
of 1908, and 278043 of 1913) for the Agfa plate. 

2024. Villain, Alfred. Historique de la pho- 
tographic en couleurs sur tissus. (Associa- 
tion generale des chimistes de l'industrie 
textile. Bulletin, Paris, 1916, annee 1914, 
p. 15-99.) VLA 

Extensive bibliography, p. 58-59. 

2025. Vinzl, Hans. Wie ich meine Auto- 
chrome entwickle. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1916, Bd. 53, p. 288-296.) 

MFA 

2026. Vom Daguerreotyp zur farbenemp- 
findlichen Platte. Zur Geschichte der 
Vogel - Obernetter - Eosin - Silberplatte. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1916, Bd. 53, p. 20-23.) MFA 

2027. Wall, Edward John. Notes on the 
processes of cinematography. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 19-20, 
22-24.) MFA 

2028. Whidden, Guy C. Color photography 
achieved, illus. (Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 3-8.) MFA 

Hess-Ives process. 

2029. Wieland, H., and others. Ceramic 
colour screen plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 1, 1916, v. 63, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

Abstract of German patent 291575. MFA 

2030. Wilkinson, W. T. Colour prints on 
paper. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1916, v. 63, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 26-27.) MFA 



2031. Williams, A. D. Developing auto- 
chromes. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Jan., 1916, v. 23, p. 19-22.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 3, 1916, v. 63, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 12, MFA. 



1917 

2032. Anderson, Paul L. The Hess - Ives 
process of color photography. (American 
annual of photography for 1918, New York, 
1917, v. 32, p. 56-63.) MFA 

2033. Belden, Charles J. Making auto- 
chromes by artificial light. (American an- 
nual of photography for 1918, New York, 
1917, v. 32, p. 88-92.) MFA 

2034. A Bibliography on color for photog- 
raphers. (Motion picture news, New York, 
1917, v. 16, p. 298-300, 886.) fMFL 

Short list of selected books and papers, with com- 
ments. 

2035. Briant, Travers J. Colour vision. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 36, 40, 44.) MFA 

Reply to article by C. W. Piper. Discusses the 
meaning of "daylight." 

2036. Colour prints 'on silk fabrics. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 5, 

1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 4.) MFA 

Method of Vallette et Peret. 

2037. The Commercial side of colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, Mav 11, 1917, v. 64, p. 249-250.) 

MFA 

2038. Corbin, Thomas W. Marvels of sci- 
entific invention; an interesting account in 
non-technical language of the invention of 
guns . . . colour photography, and many 
other recent discoveries of science. . . Lon- 
don: Seeley, Service & Co., Ltd., 1917. 1 
p.L, 5-251(1) p., 16 pi. diagrs. 8°. V 

Color photography, p. 212-219. 

2039. Davis, Vivian P. A modification of 
the raydex process. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 4, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 17.) 

MFA 

A reply to H. E. Rendall. 

2040. Deisch, Noel. Illumination of the 
subject in determining the colour quality 
of autochromes. (Photographic journal of 
America, Philadelphia, Nov., 1917, v. 54, 
p. 467-469.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 2, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30-31, MFA. 

Abstract in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 

1918, v. 25, p. 244-246, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



97 



1917, continued. 

2041. A Device for testing photographic 
color-filters. (Motion picture news, New 
York, Aug. 4, 1917, v. 16, p. 887-888.) fMFL 

Spectrum projector of the Bausch & Lomb Optical 
Company. 

2042. Eder, Josef Maria. Colour sensitis- 
ing dyes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, June, 
1917, v. 24, p. 254-255, MFA. 

2043. Fundamental hue scale for scientific 
colour designation, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, July 6, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 25-27.) 

MFA 

Result of experiments by the Eastman Kodak 
Company. 

2044. Grabado fotografico en colores. (So- 
ci'edad de fomento fabril. Boletin, Santiago, 
Chile, 1917, ano 34, p. 444-452.) VA 

2045. Haines, Robert Thorne. Color pho- 
tography. (Photo-era, Boston, Dec, 1917, 
v. 39, p. 290-291.) MFA 

Possibility of coloring salts by cathode rays. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 2, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-30, MFA. 

2046. Hirshberg, Leonard Keene. Color 
photography. (American magazine of art, 
Washington, 1917, v. 8, p. 281-283.) MAA 

2047. Hodgman, Charles D. Color and 
color photography. (Cleveland Engineer- 
ing Society. Journal, Cleveland, 1917, v. 10, 
p. 127-141.) VDA 

Also printed in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, Dec. 22, 1917, v. 84, p. 399-400, VA. 

2048. Ilford, Ltd. Working formulae for 
the new sensitol colour - sensitising dyes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 2, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 7-8.) MFA 

2049. Ives, Herbert Eugene. Hue differ- 
ence and flicker photometer speed, illus. 
(Philosophical magazine and journal of sci- 
ence, London, Aug., 1917, series 6, v. 34, 
p. 99-112.) OA 

2050. A polarization flicker photometer 

and some data of theoretical bearing ob- 
tained with it. illus. (Philosophical maga- 
zine and journal of science, London, April, 
1917, series 6, v. 33, p. 360-380.) OA 

2051. Visual diffusivity. illus. (Philo- 
sophical magazine and journal of science, 
London, Jan., 1917, series 6, v. 33, p. 19-33.) 

OA 

2052. Kilmer, T. W. Photography in 
colors — the visual index. (Photo-era, 
Boston, Dec, 1917, v. 39, p. 294-296.) MFA 

Suggestions for making autochromes with soft 
focus lens. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 25-26, MFA. 



2053. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Notes from the research laboratory, East- 
man Kodak Co. (Franklin Institute. Jour- 
nal, Philadelphia, 1917, v. 184, p. 311-312.) 

Photomicrographs in color. VA 

2054. ■ Photo-micrographs in colour. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 4, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

Communication no. 50 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 

Also printed in American photography, Boston, 
Aug., 1917, v. 11, p. 448-453, MFA. 

2055. Merillat, Lou. Color photography. 
(Photo-era, Boston, April, 1917, v. 38, p. 
183-186.) MFA 

General principles with brief descriptions of the 
newer processes. 

2056. Photo-micrographs in color. (Mining 
and scientific press, San Francisco, Oct. 27, 
1917, v. 115, p. 610.) VA 

2057. Piper, Charles Welborne. Colour 
vision and colour photography. The spec- 
trum and the Young - Helmholtz theory. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1917, v. 64, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 9-10, 21-23, 29-31, 36, 40, 44.) 

MFA 

2058. The development of the science 

of colour. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 5, 1917, v. 64, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

Historical review. 

2059. Press, A. How are photographs made 
in natural colors? illus. (Popular science 
monthly, New York, 1917, v. 90, p. 254- 
255.) * DA 

2060. The Prizma four - colour process of 
colour cinematography. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 6, 

1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 14.) MFA 

2061. Le Procede versicolor Dufay pour la 
photographie des couleurs. illus. (La 
Nature, Paris, Nov. 10, 1917, v. 45, p. 292- 
294.) OA 

Translation in Scientific American supplement, 
New York, April 13, 1918, v. 85, p. 237, VA. Ab- 
stract in British journal of photography, London, 

1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, p. 4, 
20-22, MFA. Partial translation in Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Oct., 1918, v. 25, p. 415, MFA. 

2062. Rendall, H. E.' A modification in the 
raydex process. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, April 6, 1917, v. 64, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13.) 

MFA 

For a reply by Vivian P. Davis see issue of May 4, 
1917, Colour photography supplement, p. 17. 

2063. Struss, Karl. Colour photography. 
(American photography, Boston, Aug., 
1917, v. 11, p. 437-444.) MFA 

Hess-Ives process. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1917, v. 64, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 33-34, 37-38, MFA. 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



98 

1917, continued. 

2064. The Technicolor process of two-col- 
our cinematography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Nov. 2, 1917, 
v. 64, Colour photography supplement, p. 
41-43.) MFA 

2065. Villain, Alfred. Color photography 
on fabrics. (Textile American, Boston, 
1917, v. 28, Nov., 1917, p. 21-22.) 3 - ft VLA 



1918 

2066. Additive and subtractive colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1919, v. 26, p. 119-120, MFA. 

2067. Austin, A. C. The autochrome plate 
in photo-lithography. (British journal of 
photography, London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14.) 

MFA 

2068. Bull, A. J. Some peculiarities of 
colour and their bearing on photographic 
work. (Photographic journal, London, 
Jan., 1918, new series, v. 42, p. 9-13.) MFA 

With discussion. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 1, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 5-6, MFA, and in Scientific American 
supplement, New York, 1918, v. 86, p. 69, VA. 

2069. Colour photography of the battlefield. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 7, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Account of the work of F. Hurley in Flanders and 
Palestine. 

2070. Decennia practica — colour photogra- 
phy, illus. (British journal of photography, 
London. 1917, v. 64, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 2-7, 11-12, 14-16, 18-20, 23- 
24, 27-28, 31-32, 35-36, 38-39, 43-44, 46-48; 
1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 3-4, 6-8, 12, 14, 18-20, 23-24, 26-27, 31-32, 
35-36, 39-40, 42-44, 47-48; 1919, v. 66, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 3-4, 7-8, 
11-12, 20, 27-28.) MFA 

Brings together extracts from the British journal 
almanac of the years 1906 to 1915 covering important 
developments during that time. 

2071. The Douglass process of cinematog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

2072. Fischer, Otto. Beitrag zur Kenntnis 
der Chinocyanine (Pinacyanole, Dicya- 
nine). (Journal fur praktische Chemie, 
Leipzig, 1918, N. F. Bd. 98, p. 204-232.) 

PKA 



2073. Fox method of preparing positives 
for subtractive two-color cinematography. 
(Motion picture news, New York, April 6, 
1918, v. 17, p. 2110-2112.) MFL 

2074. Hess - Ives Corporation. Dichroic 
films for selective transmission and reflec- 
tive of colour rays. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, March 1, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 9-11.) 

MFA 

Abridgment of their patent specification 110089 of 
Feb., 1917. 

2075. Ives, Herbert Eugene. The resolu- 
tion of mixed colours by differential visual 
diffusivity. illus. (Philosophical magazine 
and journal of science, London, May, 1918, 
series 6, v. 35, p. 413-421.) OA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 33-35, 38-39. MFA. 

2076. Meggers, W. F. Wave-length meas- 
urements in spectra from 5600 to 9600 A. 
illus. (United States. — Standards Bureau. 
Bulletin, Washington, June 24, 1918, v. 14, 
p. 371-395.) VBDA 

See p. 376-377 for dyes used in photographing red 
and infra red. 

2077. A Pioneer in colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 5, 1918, v. 65, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

Refers to Henry Collen. See entry under his name. 

2078. Piper, Charles Welborne. Some 
thoughts on coloured photographs and pho- 
tographs in colour. (British journal of 
photography, London, May 3, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 17-18.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Sept., 1918, v. 25, p. 370-372, MFA. 

2079. Prizma two-colour cinematography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 1, 1918, v.. 65, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 8.) MFA 

Comments on article by A. S. Cory in Motion pic- 
ture news of Jan. 12, 1918. 

2080. Rounds, Will. Avoiding pitfalls in 
making autochromes. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 7, 1918, v. 65, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 22-23.) 

MFA 

2081. Rundle, B. Autochrome frames and 
a few hints, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 1, 1918, v. 65, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 

MFA 

2082. Seyewetz, A. Dyes in colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 6, 1918, v. 65, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 46-47.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



99 



1918, continued. 

2083. Storr, B. V. Photographic materials 
and processes. (Society of Chemical In- 
dustry. Reports of the progress of applied 
chemistry, London, v. 1, 1916, p. 298-315; 
v. 2, 1917, p. 495-509; v. 3, 1918, p. 457-466.) 

VOA 

Reviews progress in color processes and cinema- 
tography, especially with reference to patents. 

The ahove are reprinted in British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1917, v. 64, p. 353-356, 364-366; 

1919, v. 66, p. 13-15, 27-28, 605-608, MFA. 

2084. Warburg, Agnes B. "War - type" 
(Bromoil - transfero - collotype). (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 4, 
1918, v. 65, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 37-38.) MFA 

2085. Wilkinson, W. T. New method of 
producing tri-color prints. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, April, 1918, v. 25, p. 157- 
159.) MFA 



1919 

2086. Belden, Charles J. Autochrome pho- 
tography by artificial light. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, July 4, 1919, 
v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
25-26.) MFA 

2087. ■ Color photography by artificial 

light. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1919, v. 
23, p. 246-249.) MFA 

2088. Books on colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 24.) MFA 

2089. Butler, C. P. The bleachout process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 4, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

2090. Butler, Edwin T. The Butler three- 
colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

2091. A Combined transparency viewing 
apparatus and retouching stand. illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-24.) MFA 

2092. Douglass, L. F. Douglass two-colour 
cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 3, 1919, v. 66, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 2-3.) MFA 

Specification of his patent 117864 of 1918 
(British). 

2093. Expert, pseud. Dust and the Paget 
colour process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, March 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 12.) MFA 



2094. Fanstone, Robert M. Colour screen 
hints. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

Suggests greater care in calculating time of ex- 
posure. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Feb., 1920, v. 27, p. 68, MFA. 

2095. Essential features in apparatus 

for colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 

MFA 

Hints on cameras, lenses, filters, and exposure 
meters. 

2096. Lantern - slides by the screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 45-46.) MFA 

2097. Notes on the Paget process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 403-404, MFA. 

2098. Registering Paget transparencies. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

2099. Godbold, A. Vernon. Fourteen points 
on colour. (British journal of photography, 
London, 1919, v. 66, p. 261-262, 275-276.) 

MFA 

2100. The Gorsky colour process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Nov. 7, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 44.) MFA 

Brief reference. 

2101. Gross, Michael. The quest of color. 
(Photo-era magazine, Boston, Feb., 1919, 
v. 42, p. 64-68.) . MFA 

Historical. 

2102-2103. H. Essenhigh Corke. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, March, 1919, new 
series, v. 43, p. 102-103.) MFA 

Obituary. 

2104. Havelock, Bertram E. The light- 
filter in autochrome photography, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-23.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 402-403, MFA. 

2105. Ives, Frederic Eugene. A new pho- 
tographic mordant dye process. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 1-2.) MFA 

Has also specification of British patent no. 113617 
of 1918 granted to author and the Hess-Ives Corpora- 
tion. 



100 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1919, continued. 

2106. Koegel, P. R. Die Konstitution 
organischer Farbstoffe und ihre Lichtemp- 
findlichkeit unter dem Einfluss von Anethol 
und anderer Sensibilisatoren. (Photo- 
graphische Korrespondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 
56, p. 224-231, 258-270.) MFA 

2107. Die theoretischen Grundlagen 

eines neuen direkten farbenphotograph- 
ischen Verfahrens mittels Korperfarben. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1919, Bd. 56, p. 332-337.) MFA 

2108. Kropf, Fritz. Entwicklungsbilder 
und Farbenempfindlichkeit verschiedener 
Silbersalze. illus. (Photographische Kor- 
respondenz, Wien, 1919, Bd. 56, p. 33-42.) 

MFA 

Abstract translation in British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 36, MFA. 

2108a. Lucas, E. G. Handel. Three-colour 
photography. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 39-40.) MFA 

Suggests that tri-color photography must be de- 
veloped and not scrapped as a "blind alley." 

2109. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. A 
simplified method of developing autochrome 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 3, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 37.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Dec, 1919, v. 26, p. 478-479, MFA. 

2110. Lund, Carl H., and L. E. Wise. 
Intermediates used in the preparation of 
photosensitizing dyes. 2: Quaternary ha- 
lides. (Journal of industrial & engineering 
chemistrv, Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, 
p. 458-460.) VOA 

2111. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
H. T. Clarke. A new yellow dye and light 
filters made from it. illus. (Journal of 
industrial & engineering chemistry, Easton, 
Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 454-455.) VOA 

2111a. Meugniot. Une methode simplifiee 
de developpement des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe franchise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1919, serie 3, tome 6, p. 341- 
343.) MFA 

2112. Miethe, Adolf, and Erich Stenger. 
Ultraviolettdurchlassige Filter. illus. 
(Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche Photo- 
graphic, Photophysik und Photochemie, 
Leipzig, 1919, Bd. 19, p. 57-68.) PLC 

Has a list of references. 

2113. Mikeska, L. A., and others. Inter- 
mediates used in the preparation of photo- 
sensitizing dyes. 1 : Quinoline bases. (Jour- 



nal of industrial and engineering chemistry, 
Easton, Penn., May, 1919, v. 11, p. 456-458.) 

VOA 

2114. Namias, Rodolfo. Enciclopedia foto- 
grafica. Milano: II Progresso fotografico, 
1919. xxii, 1001 p. 6. ed. illus. 8°. MFD 

Chapter 57: La fotografia in colori col processo di 
tricromia fotografica. Chapter 58: La fotografia in 
colori col processo di autocromia Lumiere e processi 
analoghi. 

2115. Newens, Frank R. A demonstration 
of "Raydex." (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Dec, 1919, new series, v. 43, p. 238- 
241.) MFA 

2116. Nicholson, John William. Energy 
distribution in spectra. (Nature, London, 
Aug. 21, 1919, v. 103, p. 495^98.) OA 

2117. Paget colour process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 4, 1919, 
v. 66, Colour photography supplement, p. 
14.) MFA 

Suggestions for keeping screens and filters clean. 

2118. Pope, Sir William Jackson. The pho- 
tography of coloured objects. (Manchester 
Literary and Philosophical Society. Me- 
moirs, Manchester, Oct. 24, 1919, v. 64, part 
2, p. xxviii-xxx.) * EC 

Abstract in Nature, London, Nov. 27, 1919, v. 104, 
p. 346, OA. Account of dyestuffs prepared under the 
author's direction. 

2119. Pseudo - colour processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 3, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 4.) Ml? A 



MFA 



Brief references to "Mars-Star" and Solgram proc 

es. 

2120. Rendall, H. E. Paget colour photog- 
raphy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 7, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

2121. A review of colour photography. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 31-34.) MFA 

Reviews paper printing processes. 

2122. Where we stand in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 6, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 

Brief account of developments during war time'. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Oct., 1919, v. 26, p. 399-401, MFA, and Photo-era 
magazine, Boston, Oct., 1919, v. 43, p. 186-188, MFA. 

2123. Williams, S. H. A new process of 
printing on paper in natural colours. (Pho- 
tographic journal, London, March, 1919, 
new series, v. 43, p. 88-95.) MFA 

Abstracts in Camera craft, San Francisco, May, 
1919, v. 26, p. 201-202, MFA, and Amateur photogra- 
pher, London, March 5, 1919, v. 47, p. 200, ^MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



101 



1919, continued. 

2124. Three-colour Bromoil enlarge- 
ments from negatives of the Joly type. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
1919, v. 66, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 15-16, 18-20.) MFA 

Paper read before the Royal Photographic Society. 
With discussion. 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Sept., 1919, v. 26, p. 359-361, MFA, without discus- 
sion. 

2125. Wise, Louis E., and others. Syn- 
thesis of photosensitizing dyes; pinaverdol 
and pinacyanol. (Journal of industrial and 
engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., May, 
1919, v. 11, p. 460-463.) VOA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34-36, MFA. 

2126. Yerbury, S. G. Is three-colour a blind 
alley? (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 5, 1919, v. 66, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 36.) MFA 

2127. Yoshida, Usaburo. Methyl-violet as 
a red sensitiser of the photographic plate, 
illus. (Kyoto Imperial University. — Col- 
lege of Science. Memoirs, Kyoto, 1917-19, 
v. 3, p. 69-71.) OA 



1920 

2128. Arch, John C. Making and printing 
carbon tissues for three-colour printing. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

2129. Arturo Hernandez. (British journal 
of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

Notice of his death. MFA 

2130. Autochromes of the lunar eclipse. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

40-minute exposure in telescopic camera of the 
Societe francaise de photographic 

2131. Barbier, H. Colorants sensibilisa- 
teurs derives des quinoleines, quinaldines et 
lepidines contenant les radicaux dimethyl- 
amino et diethylamino. (Societe chimique 
de France. Bulletin, Paris, 1920, serie 4, 
tome 27, p. 427-439.) PKA 

2132. Blueness of water effects in the Paget 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 15-16.) MFA 

2133. Burka, Samuel M. Hypersensitizing 
commercial panchromatic plates. illus. 
(Franklin Institute. Journal, Philadelphia, 
1920, v. 189, p. 25—46.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, 1920, v. 67, p. 479-481, 496-499, 514, MFA. 



2134. Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Bullock. 
A production of panchromatic sensitiveness 
without dyes, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 26, 1920, v. 67, 
p. 719-720.) MFA 

Communication no. 92 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Company. 

2135. Claudy, Carl Harry. Color photog- 
raphy. (The Camera, Philadelphia, 1920, 
v. 24, p. 406-411.) MFA 

Ives' processes of still and moving pictures. 

2136. -The romance of invention. Fred- 
eric E. Ives, wizard of color and light, and 
father of the half-tone. port. (Scientific 
American, New York, July 31, 1920, v. 123, 
p. 104, 112, 114.) VA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 34—36, MFA. 

2137. Colour photography; the autochrome 
and Paget methods described, and their 
applicability compared. Duplicating colour 
transparencies. Difficulties in the way of 
colour work on paper. (Amateur photog- 
rapher and photography, London, March 3, 
1920, v. 49, p. 173-174.) f MFA 

2138. Cremier, Victor. Developers for the 
autochrome plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 31.) MFA 

2139. Crowther, Raymond E. Photographic 
materials and processes. (Society of Chem- 
ical Industry. Reports of the progress of 
applied chemistry, London, v. 4, 1919, p. 
508-522; v. 5, 1920, p. 505-522.) VOA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Mav 28, 1920, v. 67, p. 327-332; 1921, v. 68, 
p. 478-480, 490-491, MFA. 

2140. Davidson, Winn W. The future of 
color photography. (Photo-era magazine, 
Boston, Feb., 1920, v. 44, p. 80-85.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 9-11, MFA. 

2141. Death of Sir William Abney. port. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 10, 1920, v. 67, p. 755-756.) MFA 

2142. Eastman Kodak Company. The pho- 
tography of colored objects. Rochester, 
N.Y.: Eastman Kodak Co., 1920. 102 p. 
illus. 4. ed. 8°. MFK 

2143. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting single 
metal slides for the Paget colour process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

2144. Binding Paget colour transpar- 
encies. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 4.) MFA 



102 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1920, continued. 

2145. Clearing autochromes and fixing 

after intensification. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 44.) 

MFA 

2146. ■ Colour photography in portrai- 
ture. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 25-27.) MFA 

Suggestions as to lenses, backgrounds, and posing. 

2147. ■ The colour photography of 

stained glass by the screen plate process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 29-31.) MFA 

2148. Flower photography in natural 

colours by the screen-plate process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Nov. 
6, 1920, v. 67, p. 41-43.) MFA 

2149. ■ Identifying three-colour nega- 
tives. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 2, 1920, v. 67, p. 16.) MFA 

Directions for marking films. 

2150. The intensification of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 5, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

2151. Lantern slides from Paget col- 
our negatives. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, p. 20.) 

MFA 

2152. Monochrome prints from Paget 

colour negatives. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 4.) MFA 

2153. A simple holder for three-colour 

light-filters, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, May 7, 1920, v. 67, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 17-18.) 

MFA 

2154-[2155]. Subject and lighting in 

screen-plate colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 6, 
1920, v. 67, p. 7-8.) MFA 

2156. Herve. Le portrait sur autochromes 
a l'atelier et en plein air. (Societe frangaise 
de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1920, se- 
rie 3, tome 7, p. 34-36.) MFA 

Abstracted in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202-203, MFA. 

2157. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dye-toning 
with ferricyanide and chromic acid bleach. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 4, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

2158. A further development of Ives' 

mordant dye-image process. (British jour- 



nal of photography, London, Nov. 5, 1920, 
v. 67, Colour photography supplement, p. 
43.) MFA 

2159. Jove. Notes pratiques sur l'hyper- 
sensibilisation des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe frangaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, serie 3, tome 7, p. 198- 
199.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 4, MFA. 

2160. Knoche, Paul. Die physiologischen 
Grundlagen der Farbenphotographic 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1920, Bd. 57, p. 287-290.) MFA 

2161. Koegel, P. R. Dyes for the bleachout 
process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 6, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

2162. liber die Verwendung der Blii- 

tenfarbstoffe fiir die Farbenphotographie. 
(Photographische Korrespondenz, Wien, 
1920, Jahrg. 57, p. 86-91.) MFA 

2163. Louis Ducos du Hauron. port. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 1, 
1920, v. 67, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 38-39.) MFA 

Brief biography with chronological list of his inven- 
tions. 

2164. Lueppo-Cramer. Farbenempfindlich- 
keit und Entwicklungsart. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920, 
Bd. 57, p. 129-130.) MFA 

2165. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. Sur 
les proprietes sensibilisatrices d'une nou- 
velle serie de matieres colorantes. illus. 
(Societe frangaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, serie 3, tome 7, p. 182- 
184.) MFA 

2166. Mills, William Hobson, and P. E. 
Evans. The cyanine dyes. Part 2: The 
synthesis of O-aminocinnamylidenequinal- 
dine methiodide. (Chemical Society. Trans- 
actions, London, 1920, v. 117, p. 1035-1040.) 

PKA 

2167. Mills, William Hobson, and F. M. 
Hamer. The cyanine dyes. Part 3: The 
constitution of pinacyanol. (Chemical So- 
cietv. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
p. 1550-1562.) PKA 

2168. Mills, William Hobson, and Sir W. J. 
Pope. Studies in photographic sensitisers. 
illus. (Photographic journal, London, 1920, 
new series, v. 44, p. 183-202, 253-267.) 

MFA 

Part 1 : The isocyanine dyestuffs. 
Part 2: The carbocyanines. 

2169. Mills, William Hobson, and R. S. 
Wishart. The cyanine dyes. Part 1 : The 
constitution of the isocyanines. (Chemical 
Society. Transactions, London, 1920, v. 117, 
p. 579-587.) PKA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



103 



1920, continued. 

2170. Newens, Frank R. Raydex three- 
colour photographic printing process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 3, 1920, v. 67, p. 740.) MFA 

Abstract of paper read before the Croydon Camera 
Club. 

2171. Offer, Thomas J. Direct colour pho- 
tography of stage plays. (British journal 
of photography, London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 2-3.) 

MFA 

Practical suggestions. 

2172. Plotnikov, Ivan Stepanovich. Allge- 
meine Photochemie, ein Hand- und Lehr- 
buch fur Forschung, Praxis und Studium. 
Berlin: Vereinigung wissenschaftlicher 
Verleger, 1920. xiv, 729 p. illus. 8°. PLC 

See p. 689-699, 703: Farbenphotographie. Includes 
a chronology. For translation of section on the 
bleachout process, see British journal of photography , 
March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12, MFA. 

2172a. Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de. Impor- 
tance of colour photography for schools and 
the community in general. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, 1920, v. 67, 
p. 13-15, 19-20.) MFA 

2173. Rendall, H. E. Approximately cor- 
rect colour photography, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Dec. 3, 
1920, v. 67, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 45-46.) MFA 

Suggests use of two colors and of a black key plate. 

2174. Experiment in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 2, 1920, v. 67, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

Suggests lines of development. 

2175. Rimmer, John Brown. Simplified 
autochrome work. (American photogra- 
phy, Boston, Sept., 1920, v. 14, p. 516-519.) 

MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 1, 1920, v. 67, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 39-40, MFA. 

2176. Toulon, Pierre. Les projections ste- 
reoscopiques par la lumiere polarisee. illus. 
(Societe francaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1920, serie 3, tome 7, p. 112— 
117.) MFA 

2177. Vies, Guilliam de. Autochrome work 
in tropical Africa. (Amateur photographer 
and photography, London, March 24, 1920, 
v. 49, p. 236.) t MFA 

2178. W., L. T. Colour photography by 
the latest process, illus. (Work, London, 
1920, v. 58, p. 290.) VA 

Paget process. 

2179. Wall, Edward John. Truthful colour 
rendering. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 3, 1920, v. 67, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 36.) MFA 



2180. Wilcox, Walter Dwight. Autochrome 
photography... A paper read... at the 
annual meeting of the American Alpine 
Club January 3, 1920, and directed to be 
printed for distribution to the members. 
[Canada:] The American Alpine Club [1920]. 
6 p., 11. 8°. MFFp.v. 51, no. 11 



1921 

2181. Adrien, Charles. Note sur la desensi- 
bilisation des autochromes. (Societe fran- 
gaise de photographic Bulletin, Paris, 
April, 1921, serie 3, tome 8, p. 110-112.) 

MFA 

2182. Notes sur la stereoscopie auto- 
chrome sur plaques 9 X 12 et divers acces- 
soires de chambre noire. (Societe frangaise 
de photographie. , Bulletin, Paris, 1921, se- 
rie 3, tome 8, p. 24-26.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 8, MFA, and Camera craft, San Fran- 
cisco, March, 1921, v. 28, p. 94-95, MFA. 

2183. The Auto colour camera. (British 
journal of photography, London, March 4, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 11-12.) MFA 

Simplicity claimed for the apparatus of F. Donis- 
thorpe. 

2184. Bennett, Colin N. Principles of colour 
photography in simple language. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 6, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 19-20.) MFA 

Reprint of article in the Kinematograph weekly. 
Largely historical. 

2185. Burchardt, Ernest A. Negatives for 
three-colour printing from autochromes. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Sept. 2, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 33-34.) MFA 

2186. Clay, Reginald S. A suggestion for 
a new method of photography in colour, 
illus. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 9-10.) MFA 

Suggests a diffraction grating based upon Newton's 
rings. 

2187. A Colour camera. (British journal 
of photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 

MFA 

Brief reference to apparatus of Hiram C. Deeks. 

2188. Crabtree, J. I. A method of produc- 
ing reversed dye images. (Camera craft, 
San Francisco, Nov., 1921, v. 28, p. 374- 
377.) MFA 

Communication no. 97 from the Research Labora- 
tory of the Eastman Kodak Co. 



104 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1921, continued. 

2189. Davis, Raymond. A new method for 
the measurement of photographic filter fac- 
tors. Washington: Gov. Prtg. Off., 1921. 
1 p.L, 79-89 p. illus, 4°. (United States. 
— Bureau of Standards. Scientific papers, 
no. 409.) PAH (U. S.) 

2190. Desensitising autochrome plates. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 15, 1921, v. 68, p. 418.) MFA 

2191. Direct colour photography in medi- 
cine. (Lancet, London, May 28, 1921, v. 
200, p. 1146.) WAA 

Brief account of colored lantern slides at the Royal 
Society of Medicine. 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 28, MFA. 

2192. Eder, Josef Maria. Pinaflavol, ein 
neuer Sensibilisator fur Griin. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 
Bd. 58, p. 87-90.) MFA 

2193. Espitallier, M. R. Autochrome de- 
velopment. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 8.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
March, 1921, v. 28, p. 95, MFA. 

2194. F., W. B. William de Wiveleslie Ab- 
ney. port. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, Jan., 1921, new series, v. 45, p. 44-46.) 

Brief biography. MFA 

2195. Fanstone, Robert M. Autumn foli- 
age by the screen-plate processes. (British 
journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 37-38.) MFA 

2196. Clouds in autochromes. (British 

journal of photography, London, June 3, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 24.) MFA 

2197. Colour rendering in the screen- 
plate process. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 

Suggestions for overcoming defects. 

2198. Intensifying autochromes. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Dec. 
2, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 45-46.) MFA 

2199. Pictorial photography in colours. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 27-28.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., March, 1922, v. 48, p. 143-144, MFA. 

2200. Spotting and taking out defects 

from screen-plate colour transparencies. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 

Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
Aug., 1921, v. 28, p. 271-273, MFA. 



2201. Fielitz, Otto. Beitrage zur Frage 
des farbenphotographischen Papierbildes. 
(Photographische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 
1921, Bd. 58, p. 311-314, 329-331.) MFA 

2202. Gamble, W. Penrose. A new three- 
colour camera. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 48.) MFA 

Patent of A. Roland Trist. From Penrose's An- 
nual, 1922. 

2203. Gimpel, Leon. La projection en relief 
a la portee de tous par anaglyphes sur 
plaques autochromes. (Societe francaise de 
photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, 
tome 8, p. 194-204.) MFA 

2204. Hodgman, Charles D. Color filters 
for photographic uses. (Physical review, 
Lancaster, Penn., 1921, series 2, v. 17, p. 
246-249.) PAA 

Gives a long list of dye solutions. 

2205. Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von. Die 
Theorie und Praxis der Farbenphotogra- 
phie mit Autochrom- und anderen Raster- 
farbenplatten. Halle a. S.: W. Knapp, 1921. 
74 p. illus. 5. ed. 8°. (Enzyklopadie der 
Photographie. Heft 60.) MFV 

The Library also has 1st ed. (1908) and 2d ed. 
(1909). 

2206. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Dyeing sensi- 
tive films for relief prints. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 48.) 

MFA 

2207. New bleach formulae for the Ives 

mordant dye-toning process. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, 
v. 68, Colour photography supplement, p. 3.) 

MFA 

2208. Ives's medico-chromograms. (British 
journal of photography, London, April I, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p.16.) MFA 

A two-colour plus process for use in hospitals. 
Also printed in Camera craft, San Francisco, 
June, 1921, v. 28, p. 202, MFA. 

2209. Jones, Chapman. . Sir William de 
Wiveleslie Abney. (Photographic journal, 
London, July, 1921, new series, v. 45, p. 296- 
310.) MFA 

With bibliography. 

2210. Koenig, Ernst. Pinaflavol, ein neuer 
Sensibilisator fur Griin. (Photographische 
Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, Bd. 58, p. 80- 
81.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 16, MFA, and Camera craft, San 
Francisco, June, 1921, v. 28, p. 203-204, MFA. 

2211. Die Verwendung des Pinaflavols 

in der Farbenphotographie. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1921, 
Bd. 58, p. 193-196.) MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



105 



1921, continued. 

2212. Leventon, L. M. Improving auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

For weak negatives suggests binding them up with 
a second color screen. 

2213. Liabeuf, H. Appareil automatique de 
prise de vue par selection trichrome 13 x 18. 
illus. (Societe francaise de photographic 
Bulletin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, tome 8, p. 167— 
168.) MFA 

2214. Lighting and exposure in autochrome 
work. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 3, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 

2215. The Loudine colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 40.) MFA 

2216. Louis Ducos du Hauron. (British 
journal of photography, London, Jan. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 4.) MFA 

2217. Lumiere, Auguste, and others. De- 
sensitising autochromes before develop- 
ment. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., Dec, 1921, v. 47, p. 297-300, MFA. 

2218. Experiments on desensitisers. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
1921, v. 68, p. 351-354, 370-371.) MFA 

Portion dealing with, color-sensitive plates in 
Camera craft, San Francisco, Sept., 1921, v. 28, p. 
307-309, MFA. 

2219. Panchromatic sensitising dyes. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77.) MFA 

2220-21. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth. 
Color photography, illus. (Photo-minia- 
ture, New York, July, 1921, v. 16, p. 97- 
131.) MFA 

"Authoritative summary of progress made... with 
a clear explanation of the principles underlying the 
methods of today and tomorrow." 

2222. Namias, Rodolfo. The Bromoil proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, Feb. 11, 1921, v. 68, p. 77-78.) MFA 

2223. Newens, Frank R. Rambles with the 
Paget colour plate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Nov. 25, 1921, v. 68, p. 
709.) MFA 

Abstract of paper_ read before the Croydon Camera 
Club. Some corrections are made in the above jour- 
nal, Dec. 2, 1921, p. 724. 

2224. Paget Prize Plate Company. The 

Paget process of colour photography. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, p. 724.) MFA 

Some comparisons with the Uford and Wratten 
plates as to filters. 



2225. Parolini, C, and G. Perron. Colour 
cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 4.) MFA 

Abstract of their patent (not as yet accepted). 

2226. Power, H. D'Arcy. Inventors' re- 
wards in colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 3, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 24.) MFA 

2227. The Prizma process. (British journal 
of photography, London, Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 32.) 

Brief reference to camera invented by W. Van 
Dorn Kelley. 

2228. The Prizma process of colour cinema- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 18-19.) MFA 

2229. Rendall, H. E. Remarks on raydex. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 3, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 21-22.) MFA 

2230. Three-colour reflector cameras. 

illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 

Descriptions of patents of Walter White, J. W. 
Bennetto, and E. T. Butler. 

2231. Rose, S. W. Paget colour-screen 
plates. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 17, 1921, v. 68, p. 361.) MFA 

Abstract of paper and discussion before the Croy- 
don Camera Club. 

2232. Schitz, C. Determination automa- 
tique du temps du pose en autochromie. 
(Societe francaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, tome 8, p. 320- 
322.) MFA 

2233. Pour corriger la dominante bleue 

des autochromes. (Societe frangaise de 
photographic Bulletin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, 
tome 8, p. 22-24.) MFA 

2234. Screen - plate pictures of the "old 
masters." (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

Defects due to discoloration of the varnish. 

2235. Screen-plate renderings of fashion- 
able complexions. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Oct. 7, 1921, v. 68, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 40.) MFA 

Face powdering at Deauville. 

2236. Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller. 
Three-colour lantern transparencies, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
April 1, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15.) MFA 

2237. Triadochrome colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, May 6, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 20.) MFA 

Invention of J. F. Shepherd. No details given. 



106 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1921, continued. 

2238. Two-colour studio portraits. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Oct. 7, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 39-40.) MFA 

Process of J. Newlands Thomson. 

2239. The Uva-chrom process of color pho- 
tography. (Scientific American, New York, 
Sept. 24, 1921, v. 125, p. 225.) VA 

2240. Wagner, R. Pinatypie. (Photo- 
graphische Rundschau, Halle a. S., 1920. 
Bd. 57, p. 330-334.) MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., June, 1921, v. 46, p. 297-300, MFA. 

2241. Wall, Edward John. Clerk Maxwell's 
theory and practice. (British journal of 
photography, London, Dec. 2, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 47-48.) 

MFA 

2242. Colour sensitising by mineral 

salts. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 4, 1921, v. 68, p. 129-130.) 

MFA 

2243. ■ A forgotten page in the history 

of colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 7, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 1-3.) 

MFA 

A review of Levi L. Hill's work A treatise on helio- 
chromy. 

2244. Relief processes for colour work. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 5, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 30-32, 34-36.) MFA 

Three processes described in detail with biblio- 
graphical references. 

2245. Wallon, fitienne. L'oeuvre de Louis 
Lumiere. (Societe francaise de photogra- 
phic Bulletin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, tome 8, 
p. 225-249.) MFA 

p. 237-241: Photographie des couleurs. 

2246. Walters, Francis Marion, and Ray- 
mond Davis. Studies in color sensitive 
photographic plates and methods of sensi- 
tizing bv bathing. Washington: Gov. Prtg. 
Off., 1921. 1 p.l., 353-375 p. illus. 4°. 
(United States. — Bureau of Standards. 
Scientific papers, no. 422.) PAH (U. S.) 

2247. Watkins, H. S. Colour photography. 
(Photographic journal, London, June, 1921, 
new series, v. 45, p. 277-287.) MFA 

General principles. Paget, Dufay, Raydex, and 
Autochrome processes. Abstract in British journal 
of photography, London, May 6, 1921, v. 68, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 20, MFA. 

With discussion. 

2248. Watteville, C. de. Gabriel Lippmann. 
(Societe franchise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, 1921, serie 3, tome 8, p. 330- 
341.) MFA 

Frontispiece portrait. 

2249. A Whirler for autochrome plates, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 



London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 8.) MFA 
Description and diagram of drying apparatus. 

2250. Woods, L. Tennant. The Hillotype 
process of colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, Feb. 4, 
1921, v. 68, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 7.) MFA 

A review of criticisms. 

2251. Wright, H. W. Canning. Exposing 
autochrome plates on interiors in winter. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
March 4, 1921, v. 68, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 12.) MFA 

2252. Yerbury, S. G. Three - colour and 
direct heliochromy. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 4, 1921, v. 68, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 7-8.) 

MFA 

Refers to Hill process. 



1922 

2253. Adolf Miethe. port. (Zeitschrift fur 
wissenschaftliche Photographie. Leipzig, 
1922, Bd. 21, p. 193-196.) PLC 

A brief biography with list of his principal works. 

2254. Arch, John C. Three-colour repeat- 
ing backs, illus. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 21.) MFA 

2255. Campbell, H. J. Raydex three-colour 
printing. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1-3.) MFA 

2256. Carteron, J. Desensitising in the de- 
velopment of the autochrome plates. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 2, 
1922, v. 69, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 23-24.) MFA 

2257. Clerc, Louis Philippe. Colour pho- 
tography. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, p. 16.) MFA 

Development tests on autochromes by the Societe 
francaise de photographie. 

2258. Colour photography. (British 

journal of photography, London, July 14, 
1922, v. 69, p. 414-415.) MFA 

Brief notes on the exhibition of the Salon du Gout 
Frangais; the new process of the Dufay Company; 
and endeavors to purchase the Uvachrome process. 

2259. Colour cinematography with non- 
intermittent film, illus. (British journal 
of photography, London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 46^48.) 

Specification of fidouard Belin. MFA 

2260. Colour prints by dye conversion of 
screen-plate negatives. (British journal of 
photography, London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 29-30.) 

Obergassner's patent. MFA 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



107 



1922, continued. 

2261. Elmslie, E. K. Developer for auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 

2262. Fanstone, Robert M. Autochrome 
lantern slides. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 37.) MFA 

2263. ■ Colour photography in small 

sizes, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 43-44.) MFA 

2264. The display of screen-plate trans- 
parencies. (British journal of photography, 
London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 22.) MFA 

2265. * Garden photography by the 

screen-plate process. (British journal of 
photography, London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 

MFA 

2266. Making Paget colour negatives 

in a small roll-film camera, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, June 2, 
1922, v. 69, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 24.) MFA 

2267. A plate-holder for the Paget 

colour process, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 5-6.) 

MFA 

2268. Some causes of failure in auto- 
chrome work. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, May 5, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 17-18.) MFA 

2269. Gamble, William. A new method of 
making colour prints. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 7.) 

MFA 

Improvement of the Lewisohn process. 

2270. Gimpel, Leon. Le centieme de 
seconde en autochromie et l'instantane noc- 
turne sur plaques noires avec l'eclairage 
ordinaire par l'ultrasensibilisation de M. F. 
Monpillard. (Societe franchise de. photo- 
graphic Bulletin, Paris, May, 1922, serie 
3, tome 9, p. 130-145.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 26-27, MFA. 

2271. The Gorsky camera for colour cine- 
matography, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 42-43.) 

MFA 

2272. Hamburger, Aron. Three - colour 
cameras. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 147-148.) 

MFA 

Protests against statements made in the book Bye- 
paths of colour photography. 



2273. The Hamburger process of colour 
cinematography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, June 2, 1922, v. 69, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 23.) MFA 

2274. Herzberg, John.. Apparatus for the 
demonstration of additive colour mixture, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

2275. Hewitt, John Theodore. Synthetic 
colouring matters; dyestuffs derived from 
pyridine, quinoline, acridine and xanthene. 
London & New York: Longmans, Green & 
Co., 1922. xi, 405 p. 8°. (Monographs 
on industrial chemistry.) VOR 

2276. Ives, Frederic Eugene. Inventions in 
colour photography. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 27, 1922, v. 69, 
p. 58.) MFA 

Butler's application for patent on Kromoscope, 
already patented. 

2277. Johnson, George Lindsay. Photog- 
raphy in colours. . . London: G. Routledge 
& Sons, Ltd., 1922. xiv, 318 p. illus. 4. ed. 
rev. & enl. 12°. MFV 

Reviewed in British journal of photography, Lon- 
don, June 23, 1922, v. 69, p. 374, MFA. 

The Library also has 1st ed. (1911), 2d ed. (1914), 
new & rev. ed. (1917). 

2278. Koegel, P. R. The bleach-out process. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 28.) MFA 

2279. Lacroix, J. Autochromes and sun 
spots. (British journal of photography, 
London, Dec. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 48.) MFA 

2280. Ladd-Franklin, Christine. Tetrachro- 
matic vision and the development theory of 
color. (Science, Utica, N. Y., May 26, 1922, 
v. 55, p. 555-560.) OA 

2281. Massiot, G. Application a la projec- 
tion des autochromes de l'eclairage integral 
par incandescence. Lanterne "Cameleon." 
(Societe frangaise de photographic Bul- 
letin, Sept., 1922, serie 3, tome 9, p. 271— 
273.) MFA 

2282. Mees, Charles Edward Kenneth, and 
G. Gutekunst. Some new sensitizers for 
the deep red. (Journal of industrial and 
engineering chemistry, Easton, Penn., Nov., 
1922, v. 14, p. 1060-1061.) VOA 

2283. A Modified two-colour process. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, Jan. 6, 
1922, v. 69, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 3.) MFA 

Describes British patent 169533 to J. F. Shepherd 
and Colour Photography, Ltd. 

2284. Monpillard, Felix. Extra-sensitising of 
autochrome plates. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 25.) MFA 

Copy of a sealed note deposited with the Societe 
frangaise de photographie in 1913. 



108 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1922, continued. 

2285. Muller, Eugene. Blueness of auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 38-39.) MFA 

2286. Desensitising in the autochrome 

process. (British journal of photography, 
London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 44.) MFA 

2287. Offer, Thomas J. Colour photo- 
graphs of stage plays. (British journal of 
photography, London, Jan. 13, 1922, v. 69, 
p. 26-27.) MFA 

2288. A One-exposure three-colour camera, 
illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Sept. 1, 1922, v. 69, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 33-35.) MFA 

C. E. Bredon's specification. 

2289. Raleigh, Charles. Reminiscences of 
commercial colour cinematography — its 
possibilities. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, 1922, v. 69, Colour photogra- 
phy supplement, p. 30-32, 35-38.) MFA 

2290. Rendall, H. E. Facts and fallacies in 
colour photography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, March 3, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
9-10.) MFA 

Criticism of book by "O. Reg." 

2291. Screen -plate rendering of the sea. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
June 2, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 24.) MFA 

2292. Screen - plates with divisible colour 
elements. (British journal of photography, 
London, Aug. 4, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 32.) MFA 

S. Schapovaloff's specification. 

2293. Shepherd, J. F. Natural colour pho- 
tography. (Photographic journal, London, 
Aug., 1922, new series, v. 46, p. 373-374.) 

MFA 

Outline of physical principles of tricolor process. 

2294. Stoakley, F. J. Rise and progress of 
the technique of colour photography. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, March 
3, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 12.) MFA 

2295. Thiem, W. Die Farbenplatte und 
das Farbensehen. (Photographische Rund- 
schau, Halle a. S., 1920, Bd. 57, p. 169-180.) 

MFA 

Also printed in Photo-era magazine, Wolfeboro, 
N. H., 1922, v. 49, p. 28-31, 85-87, MFA. 

2296. Thovert, J. La photographie des cou- 
leurs. (Chimie & industrie, Paris, August, 
1922, v. 8, p. 312-315.) VOA 

Present condition of the art and possibilities. 

2297. Traube, Artur. The Uvachrome proc- 
ess. (British journal of photography, 
London, July 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 28.) MFA 



2298. The Triadochrome process of making 
three - colour prints. (British journal of 
photography, London, Feb. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 8.) 

MFA 

2299. Triadochrome three-colour prints by 
transfer and chemical toning. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, April 7, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
15-16.) MFA 

Describes British patent 175003 to J. F. Shepherd 
and Colour Photography, Ltd. 

2300. Triple composite plates for three- 
colour negative making. (British journal 
of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 40.) 

MFA 

E. A. Lage's specification. 

2301. The Trist three-colour camera, illus. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 6, 1922, v. 69, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 2>-A.) MFA 

2302. Tutton, Frederic G. Three-colour 
transparencies by combined chemical ton- 
ing and dye printing. (British journal of 
photography, London, Nov. 3, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 41-42.) 

MFA 

Correction in Dec. 1st number of above supplement, 

p. 48. 

2303. A Two-colour process of additive col- 
our cinematography, illus. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, Oct. 6, 1922, 
v. 69, Colour photography supplement, p. 
39-40.) MFA 

2304. Ultra-sensitising. (British journal of 
photography, London, June 16, 1922, v. 69, 
p. 349.) MFA 

Brief reference to Monpillard's process for auto- 
chromes. 

2305. A Variation of the screen-plate proc- 
ess, illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 7, 1922, v. 69, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 14-15.) MFA 

Invention of Miss Florence M. Warner. 

2306. Wall, Edward John. A chronology 
of the photochromoscope. illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, 1922, v. 69, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 13-14, 
18-20.) MFA 

2307. Leuco-bases in colour photogra- 
phy. (British journal of photography, 
London, March 10, 1922, v. 69, p. 146-147.) 

MFA 

Denies novelty for Didier's process (French patent 
524143, 1919). 

2308. ■ Practical color photography. 

Boston: American Photographic Publish- 
ing Co., 1922. vii, 248 p. diagrs. 8°. 

Bibliography, p. 238-240. MFV 
Reviewed in British journal of photography , Lon- 
don, Oct. 20, 1922, v. 69, p. 640, MFA. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



109 



1923 

2309. Adrien, Charles. Lanterne de projec- 
tion portative et ecran demontable pour 
autochromes. (Societe franchise de pho- 
tographic Bulletin, Paris, April, 1923, se- 
rie 3, tome 10, p. 114-116.) MFA 

2310. Backstrom, Helmer. Development 
of autochrome plates in white light with 
ferrous oxalate. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 2.) MFA 

2311. Bartlett, T. W. Notes on exposure 
and development of autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London, April 6, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 16.) MFA 

2312. Beardsley, A. H. Natural-color pho- 
tography for the amateur. (Photo -era, 
Wolfeboro, N. H., July, 1923, v. 51, p. 30- 
31.) MFA 

Raylo process. 

2313. Bidault des Chaumes, A. La photo- 
graphic en couleurs sur pellicules versi- 
colors par les procedes Louis Dufay. (Ge- 
nie civil, Paris, June 9, 1923, v. 82, p. 543- 
545.) VA 

^ 2314. Bullock, E. R. Chemistry of the 

kodachrome bleach. (British journal of 

photography, London, Aug. 10, 1923, v. 70, 

p. 491^192.) MFA 

2315. Carrara, Achille. Blueness in screen- 
plate photography. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Col- 
our photography supplement, p. 4.) MFA 

V/2316. DeMille, Cecil Blount. The chances 
of cinematography in natural colors. 
(American photography, Boston, Jan., 1923, 
v. 17, p. 14-16.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 7-8, MFA. 

2317. Fanstone, Robert M. Adapting a 
film pack adapter as a slide for the Paget 
colour process, illus. (British journal of 
photography, London, July 6, 1923, v. 70, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 28.) 

MFA 

2318. After-treatment of defective auto- 
chromes. (British journal of photography, 
London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 15.) MFA 

2319. Autochrome filter attachment. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 4.) MFA 

2320. Autochromes in the dark-room. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 12.) MFA 



2321. Colour contrast and exposure in 

screen-plate colour photography. (British 
journal of photography, London, May 4, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 20.) MFA 

2322. The lens and colour rendering. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 20.) MFA 

2323. Mounting commercial colour 

transparencies. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 16.) MFA 

2324. Supplementary filters and the 

colour rendering of the autochrome plate. 
(British journal of photography, London, 
Aug. 3, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 31.) MFA 

2325. Feulgen, R. Ein Verfahren zur Her- 
stellung verzerrungsfreier Gelatinereliefs 
nach dem Chrom-Gelatineverfahren, beson- 
ders fur die Zwecke der subtraktiven Drei- 
farbenphotographie. (Zeitschrift fur wis- 
senschaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, 
Bd. 22, p. 98-103.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, April 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 13-15, MFA. 

2326. Fouchet, J. La pose et le developpe- 
ment des autochromes. (Societe frangaise 
de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 1923, 
serie 3, tome 10, p. 19-23.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, p. 9-10, MFA. 

2327. Gamble, William. Photography in 
colours. (In: L. C. Martin, Colour, and 
methods of colour reproduction. . .with 
chapters on colour printing and colour pho- 
tography, by William Gamble. London: 
Blackie & Son, Ltd., 1923. 8°. p. 160- 
171.) PEX 

Reviews various processes. 

2328. Gannon, Joseph W. The Raylo proc- 
ess, illus. (Camera craft, San Francisco, 
July, 1923, v. 30, p. 305-310.) MFA 

Two samples of work shown. 

2329. Gimpel, Leon. Application du pro- 
cede Artigue (a deux plaques) a la repro- 
duction en noir des plaques autochromes. 
(Societe frangaise de photographie. Bul- 
letin, Paris, Jan., 1923, serie 3, tome 10, p. 
23-26.) MFA 

2330. Hourst, comte. Colour prints from 
autochrome transparencies. (British jour- 
nal of photography, London, May 4, 1923, 
v. 70, Colour photography supplement, p. 
19-20.) MFA 

2331. Houstoun, Robert Alexander. Colour 
photography and stereoscopy. (In his: 
Light & colour. London, 1923. 8°. p. 96- 
116.) PEX 



110 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



1923, continued. 

2332. Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Cie. Pro- 
cede de photographie et de cinematographic 
des couleurs K. D. B. illus. (Societe fran- 
chise de photographie. Bulletin, Paris, Jan., 
1923, serie 3, tome 10, p. 26-29.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, March 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 10-11, MFA. 

2333. Manners, Samuel, and H. E. Rendall. 
Raydex methods. (British journal of pho- 
tography, London, 1923, v. 70, Colour pho- 
tography supplement, p. 21-22, 25-26.) 

MFA 

2334. Muller, Eugene. Control methods in 
the development of autochromes. (British 
journal of photography, London. Feb. 2, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 8.) MFA 

2335. Multi-colour printing in a single emul- 
sion, illus. (British journal of photogra- 
phy, London, May 4, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 17-19.) MFA 

Patent of W. Van Doren Kelley. 

2336. Naumann, Helmut. Autochrom und 
Agfarraster. illus. (Zeitschrift fur wissen- 
schaftliche Photographie, Leipzig, 1923, Bd. 
22, p. 85-91.) PLC 

2337. A New method of copying auto- 
chromes on paper in colour, illus. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 34-36.) MFA 

Patent of fimile Bueno. 

2338. Newens, Frank R. Varying the com- 
pensation filter in screen-plate colour proc- 
esses. (British journal of photography, 
London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 5-6.) MFA 

2339. Northall- Laurie, D. Photomicro- 
graphs in colour taken with polarized light. 
(Photographic journal, London, Feb., 1923, 
new series, v. 47, p. 48-49.) MFA 

2340. A One-exposure camera for colour 
photography and projection, illus. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, June 
1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 23-24.) MFA 

Patent of Gioacchino Russo. 

2341. Rendall, H. E. Dye correction 
methods in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Aug. 3, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 32.) MFA 

2342. Variable compensation filters. 

illus. (British journal of photography, 
London, Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photog- 
raphy supplement, p. 1-2.) MFA 

2343. Rowe, Ernest H. He chased the 
rainbow — and put it to work. Frederic 
Eugene Ives, prolific inventor, father of 



half-tone engraving, illus. (Industry illus- 
trated, Cooperstown, N. Y., Aug., 1923, p. 
11, 63-72.) VA 

2344. Sectional colour sensitive films. (Brit- 
ish journal of photography, London, April 
6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography supple- 
ment, p. 16.) MFA 

2345. Three-colour prints by projection dye- 
printing, illus. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Feb. 2, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 6-7.) MFA 

Patent of H. C. J. Deeks. 

2346. Tutton, Frederic G. Dye correction 
methods in three-colour printing. (British 
journal of photography, London, Sept. 7, 
1923, v. 70, Colour photography supplement, 
p. 36.) MFA 

2347. Intensification of the colours in 

three-colour carbon transparencies, with its 
possibilities in three-colour prints. (Photo- 
graphic journal, London, July, 1923, new 
series, v. 47, p. 325-330.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, July 6, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 26-27, MFA. 

2348. The Paget colour process. 

(British journal of photography, London, 
Jan. 5, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography sup- 
plement, p. 3-4.) MFA 

2349. Ventujol, Emmanuel. Exposure of 
autochrome plates. (British journal of 
photography, London, Sept. 7, 1923, v. 70, 
Colour photography supplement, p. 33-34.) 

MFA 

2350. ■ L'heliochromie nouvelle. (So- 
ciete frangaise de photographie. Bulletin, 
Paris, July, 1923, serie 3, tome 10, p. 193- 
197.) MFA 

2351. Wall, Edward John. The chances of 
color photography in moving pictures. 
(American photography, Boston, March, 
1923, v. 17, p. 166-170.) MFA 

Also printed in British journal of photography, 
London, June 1, 1923, v. 70, Colour photography 
supplement, p. 22-23, MFA. 

2352. A new system of color photogra- 
phy, illus. (American photography, Bos- 
ton, July, 1923, v. 17, p. 402-410.) MFA 

Raylo process. 

2353. Three-colour prints by projection 

dye-printing. (British journal of photog- 
raphy, London, Aug. 3, 1923, v. 70, Colour 
photography supplement, p. 29-30.) MFA 

Raylo process. 

2354. Warburg, J. C. Possibilities in colour 
photography. (Photographic journal, Lon- 
don, April, 1923, new series, v. 47, p. 192- 
195.) MFA 

2355. Wastell, W. L. F. Colour photogra- 
phy, illus. (In: A. E. Conrady, Photog- 
raphy as a scientific implement. London, 
1923. 8°. p. 432-454.) *R-MFS 

Good review of various processes, with a color plate 
showing the autochrome principle. 



\ 



AUTHOR INDEX 



Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 



A 

Aarland, G., 625. 

Abney, Sir W. de W., 99-100, 107-108, 110, 121-122, 
126, 158, 268, 293-295, 323-325, 362-363, 397- 
398, 448, 484, 556, 626-627, 811, 1006, 1207, 
1397, 1517. 

Acland, S. A., 628. 

Adan, R., 1208. 

Adrien, Charles, 1518, 1735, 2181-2182, 2309. 

Albert, August, 1519. 

Albert, E., 813. 

Albert, Josef, 105. 

Allan, Sidney, 1906. 

Alteneder, J. V., 1520. 

Anderson, P. L., 2032. 

Antisell, Thomas, 45. 

Arch, J. C, 1907, 2128, 2254. 

Aron, Reinhold, 1908. 

Atkinson, E. H. C, 818. 

Aubuch, F. See Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch. 
Audibert, Maurice. See Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice 

Audibert. 
Auerbach, Herbert, 1007. 
Austin, A. C, 2067. 



B 

Backstrom, Helmer, 2310. 

Baker, T. T., 521, 558-560, 631, 698-699, 823, 1639. 
Balagny, Georges, 1009, 1640. 
Balfour, Graham, 159. 
Balmitgere, C., 1522. 

Barbier, H., 2131. See also Lumiere, Auguste, and 

others. 
Barbieri, D., 399. 
Bardorf, 824. 
Barker, J. W., 1820. 
Barker, Johnson, 632. 
Barrett, Thomas, 48. 
Barstow, Montagu, 449. 
Bartlett, John, 1641. 
Bartlett, T. W., 2311. 
Barton, E. A., 1821. 
Bauer, Otto, 825. 
Baum, Ernst, 1972. 
Bawtree, A. E., 1736, 1822. 

Bayley, R. C., 249-251, 826-827, 1010, 1212-1215. 
Beach, F. C., 1400. 
Beardsley, A. H., 2312. 
Beck, Conrad, 828. 
Beckers, Fritz, 633. 

Becquerel, Edmond, 13-14, 37, 79, 176-177, 364. 
Bedding, Thomas, 167. 
Belden, C. J., 2033, 2086-2087. 
Belin, fidouard, 700. 
Bellieni, H., 1523. 

Bennett, C. N., 1216-1217, 1401-1402, 1524, 2184. 
Bennett, C. W., 1642. 
Benoist, L., 1525-1526. 

Bercegol, R. de. See Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and 

R. de Bercegol. 
Berger, Arthur, 1737. 
Bergeron, 1643. 
Berget, Alphonse, 178-179. 



Berkeley, H. B., 127. 
Berthier, A. A., 252. 

Berton, Rudolf, and Maurice Audibert, 1738. 
Bevan, E. J. See Green, A. G., and others. 
Bidault des Chaumes, A., 2313. 
Biermann, E. A., 1823, 1909-1910, 1973. 
Blaauw, A. H„ 1739. 
Black, Adam, 1911-1914. 

Blackburn, H. E., 829-830, 1011, 1527-1528, 1644- 

1645. 
Blanc, A., 365. 
Blochmann, Richard, 1915. 
Boardman, F. R., 701. 
Bolas, T., 400, 412. 
Bonacini, Carlo, 296. 
Boothroyd, Jabez, 206, 366. 
Bordeaux, Jules, 1219. 
Bosch, A., 522. 
Bothamley, C. H., 269. 
Boucher, L., 1530, 1646. 
Bouldoyre, R., 1403. 
Bourke, Walter, 1220. 
Bourree, M. H., 1221. 
Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud, 1404. 
Bow, R. H., 93. 
Braham, A. C, 702-703, 1405. 
Brand, John, 1824. 
Brandlmayr, Georg, 1647. 
Brasseur, C. L. A., 450, 831. 
Breton, Andre, 1825. 
Brewster, Sir David, 6. 
Briant, T. J., 2035. 
Brizet, Andre, 1826. 
Brothers, Alfred, 367. 
Broum, K. H., 1648, 1827. 
Brown, E. L., 1012. 
Brown, G. E., 561, 1740, 1916, 1975. 
Bull, A. J., 562, 634, 2068. See also Newton, A. J., 

and A. J. Bull. 
Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley, 563. 
Bullock, E. R., 2314. See also Capstaff, J. G., and 

E. R. Bullock. 
Burchardt, E. A., 832, 1649, 2185. 
Burka, S. M., 2133. 
Burnham, J. A., 1406. 
Burton, H. M., 1828, 1917. 
Buss, Otto, 451. 
Busv, L., 1650. 
Butler, C. P., 2089. 

Butler, E. T., 635, 704-706, 1531, 1741, 2090. 



c 

C, R., 368. 

Cajal, S. R., 833-835. 

Calmels, H., 1013, 1222, 1742, 1830. 

Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc, 636, 836. 

Calvert, F. C, 61. 

Campbell, H. J., 2255. 

Campbell, James, 34-35. 

Capstaff, J. G., 1978-1979. 

Capstaff, J. G., and E. R. Bullock, 2134. 

Carpenter, F. A., 1532. 

Carpentier, J., 1015. See also Cros, Charles, and J. 
Carpentier. 



[ 111 ] 



112 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



Carr, S. H., 1223, 1831, 1918-1919. 
Carrara, Achille, 1016, 1832-1833, 2315. 
Carter, C. M., 1017. 
Carteron, J., 2256. 
Casson, W. A., 1407. 
Chaboseau, Robert, 1018. 
Chapelain, 564. 
Chataux, P. S., 1533. 

Cheron, Andre, 707, 837, 1019, 1224-1225. 

Chevreul, E., 62. 

Chevrier, Henri, 838-839, 1020. 

Clarke, H. T. See Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke. 
Clarke, S., 52. 

Claudy, C. H., 840, 1021, 2135-2136. 
Clay, R. S., 2186. 

Clerc, L. P., 369, 565, 841, 1534, 2257-2258. See 

also Calmels, H., and L. P. Clerc. 
Clifton, W. E., 1022. 
Cobenzl, A., 1743-1744, 1980. 
Coker, E. G., 1745. 
Collen, Henry, 63—64. 
Cominetti, Annibale, 1747. 
Comley, H. J., 711, 845-847, 1228, 1409. 
Coonoor, pseud., 1748. 
Cooper, James, 1749. 
Corbin, T. W., 2038. 

Corke, H. E., 523, 1027, 1229-1230, 1410-1412, 1537, 
1655. 

Cornu, A., 180-181. 
Courtellemont, G., 1028. 
Cousin, Ernest, 1656, 1750. 

Coustet, Ernest, 712-713, 849-850, 1029-1032, 1231, 

1413-1414, 1538. 
Crabtree, J. I., 2188. 

Cremier, Victor, 851, 1033, 1232-1234, 1415, 1539- 

1541, 1657, 1834, 2138. 
Cros, Charles, 82, 101, 111-112. 
Cros, Charles, and J. Carpentier, 123. 
Cross, C. F. See Green, A. G., and others. 
Croughton, G. H„ 1920. 
Crowther, R. E., 2139. 
Cundall, J. T., 405, 1034. 
Cust, Leopold, 1658. 



D 

Dalmas, R., comte de, 1235, 1416-1417, 1543-1544, 
1659. 

Dalziel, Harvey, 524. 
Damry, A., 1236. 
Darling, Lloyd, 1982. 
Daur, Guido, 1237. 
David, Albert, 1660-1661. 
Davidson, Lascelles, 639. 
Davidson, P. G., 1921. 
Davidson, W. W., 2140. 

Davis, Raymond, 2189. See also Walters, F. M., and 

Raymond Davis. 
Davis, V. P., 1922-1923, 2039. 
Dawson, Alfred, 1835. 
Dawson, George, 142. 

Dawson, O. S., and C. L. Findlay, 1035, 1418. 

Day, T. C, 715. 

Dearden, W., 1836. 

Debenham, W. E., 148. 

Deisch, Noel, 2040. 

De Mille, C. B., 2316. 

Didier, Leon, 852, 1038, 1419. 

Dillaye, Frederic, 226-227, 253, 640, 1039, 1240- 

1241, 1420-1425, 1662-1665. 
Doglibert, F., 1546. 
Domony, R. B., 1925. 
Donaldson, Charles, 1926, 1985-1986. 
Donath, Bruno, 526, 716. 
Doncaster, E. D., 1040. 
Donisthorpe, Wordsworth, 98. 



D'Osmond, H., 1242, 1426. 
Douglass, L. F., 2092. 
Dove, H. W., 53. 
Dowier, C. A., 1041. 
Downes, W. H., 1042. 

Drake-Brockman, H. G„ 1043-1045, 1243, 1752. 

Drecker, J., 452. 

Dubois, Louis, 453. 

Dubois-Raymond, CI., 254. 

Duchenne, Paul, 855-856. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 83. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, and R. de Bercegol, 857. 
Dufay, L., 1427. 
Dumoulin, Eugene, 102. 
Dunmore, Edward, 228. 



E 

Eastman Kodak Co., 2142. 

Eder, J. M., 129, 143, 168, 271, 488-489, 644-645, 

717, 1753, 1927, 2042, 2192. 
Edgson, Hugh, 1048. 
Edridge-Green, F. W., 1430. 
Eldredge, A. G., 1988. 
Elliott and Fry, 1431. 
Elmslie, E. K., 2261. 
vEmery, C. F., 1049. 
Emmerich, G. H., 1432. 
Engelken, 1245. 
Espitallier, M. R., 2193. 
Estanave, E., 1433, 1547. 
Evans, C. W., 1548. 
Evans, F. H., 1434. 

Evans, P. E. See Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans. 
Evans, U. R., 1668. 
Expert, pseud., 2093. 



F 

F., W. B., 2194. 
Fabry, Charles, 1053. 
Fairchild, T. J., 863. 
Fallowfield, Jonathan, 1755. 

Fanstone, R. M., 2094-2098, 2143-2155, 2195-2200, 

2262-2268, 2317-2325. 
Farmer, Howard, 454-455, 646, 718, 1249, 1549. 
Farmer, Howard, and Guy Symmons, 456, 567. 
Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr, 1669. 
Faupel, Fritz, 1435. 
Fawcett, E. D., 407, 457. 
Fenske, E., 1250-1251. 
Feret, R. See Valette, T., and R. Feret. 
Ferrars, Max, 1054-1055. 
Festenberg, Hans, 1990. 
Feulgen, R., 2325. 

Feytaud, J. See Bouton, L., and J. Feytaud. 
Fielitz, Otto, 2201. 
Fingerhuth, C, 1928. 

Finlay, C. L., 1056, 1670. See also Dawson, O. S., 
and C. L. Finlay; Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. 
Finlay. 

Fischer, Otto, 2072. 

Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist, 1839. 

Fitzsimons, R. J., 1991. 

Florence, 529, 1672. 

Foersterling, K., 1756, 1840. 

Ford, A. D., 1436. 

Forestier, E., 1253. 

Forrest, Mark, 408-409. 

Fouchet, J., 2326. 

Fourtier, H„ 229. 

Fowler, J. B., 89. 

Fowler, R. J., 65. 

Franck, C. E., 1551 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



113 



Franck, Karl, 1992. 
Frank, Max, 1255. 
Fraprie, F. R., 865, 1993. 
Frederking, H., 866. 
Freshwater, T. E., 647. 
Friedburg, L. H., 1256. 
Friese, H., 1437. 
Fritsch, Gustav, 490, 568. 
Fritz, Felix, 1257. 
Fuerst Brothers, 370. 

Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton, 1994. 



G 

G., G. S., 1673. 
Gaedicke, J., 169-170. 
Gage, F. B„ 54. 
Gamble, E. H., 1929-1930. 
Gamble, W. P., 2202. 

Gamble, William, 302, 329, 648, 867, 2269, 2327. 
Gannon, J. W., 2328. 
Gargam de Moncetz, 1257a. 
Garrod, Edward, 49. 
Gaumont, Leon, 1674. 

Gebhard, Kurt, 1258-1262, 1552-1553, 1675, 1757- 

1759, 1841. 
Geisler, Louis, 719-720, 868. 
Genthe, Arnold, 1931. 
Gephard, Karl, 1263. 
Gerard, Louise, 1760. 
Gibson, J. S., 272, 330. 
Gilchrist, C. A., 1264. 
Gill, William, 869. 
Gilles, E., 649. 

Gimpel, Leon, 1057-1059, 1438, 1554-1556, 1676, 

2203, 2270, 2329. 
Gitchell, Corwin, 230. 
Glan, Paul, 273. 
Godbold, A. V., 2099. 
Godde, G., 458. 
Goerz, 1060. 
Goethe, J. W. von, 3. 
Goldberg, E., 1061. 
Goldschmidt, Robert, 1062. 
Goldsmith, A. N., 1266. 
Gothard, Eugen von, 183. 
Goutcher, A. W., 1063. 
Graby, A., 303, 331, 410-411. 
Graham, James, 1995. 
Grange, 1761. 

Grant, T. K., 459, 870, 1064, 1677. 

Gravier, Charles, 332, 492, 532, 721, 871-871a, 1065, 

1267, 1557-1558 
Gray, Edward, 1066. 
Grebe, C., 371. 

Green, A. G., and others, 184. 
Greene, J. E. B., 1560. 
Grills, E., 872-874. 
Grimsehl, E., 1067. 
Gross, Michael, 2101. 
Grotthuss, Theodor von, 722. 
Grove, J. M. C., 1762. 
Gruen, E. F., 650, 723. 
Grun, Ernst, 569. 
Grune, Wilhelm, 84. 
Guebhard, Adrien, 875-876, 1068. 
Gunther, H. E., 171. 

Gutekunst, G. See Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst. 



H 

H., P., 1842. 
Haberkorn, Fritz, 724. 
Haines, R. T., 2045. 
Hale, W. H., 460. 
Hamburger, Aron, 1843, 2272. 



Hamburger, W. S., 1844. 

Hamer, F. M. See Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer. 

Hanneke, Paul, 493, 1439, 1561-1562, 1932. 

Hansen, Fritz, 651. 

Harberisser, 877. 

Harding-Warner, W., 160, 185. 

Hargreaves, F. J., 1845-1846. 

Harrison, W. H., 149. 

Harrison, W. J., 150. 

Hatzfeld, Albert, 186. 

Havelock, B. E., 2104. 

Heicke, Richard, 725. 

Henderson, Peter, 39, 66. 

Hernandez-Mejia, Arturo, 1678-1679. 

Herschel, A. S., 144. 

Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 7-9, 11, 73. 

Herschell, Sir W. J., 461. 

Herve, 2156. 

Herzberg, John, 2274. 

Hess, Henry, 1847. 

Hess-Ives Corporation, 1848, 1934, 2074. 

Hewitt, C. H., 1998. 

Hewitt, J. T., 2275. 

Heydecker, W. A., 1849. 

Heyne, W., 1763. 

Hill, L. L., 17-18. 

Hilliard, F. M., 1680. 

Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randies, 1764. 

Hinterberger, Hugo, 1563-1566. 

Hirshberg, L. K., 2046. 

Hitchcock, Romyn, 231, 462, 494. 

Hitchins, A. B., 1271, 1850. 

Hnatek, Adolf, 1999. 

Hodgman, C. D., 2047, 2204. 

Hollyer, F. T., 1681. 

Holme, Charles, 1069. 

Honore, C. H., 1851. 

Hopkins (?), 232. 

Houdaille, 1272. 

Hourst, comte, 2330. 

Houstoun, R. A., 2331. 

Howdill, C. B., 414, 463. 

Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 333, 415-416, 533, 570- 
571, 726-730, 878, 1070-1076, 1273-1277, 1440- 
1441, 1682, 1765-1768, 1936, 2205. 

Hunt, Robert, 20, 29, 38. 

Husnik, Jaroslav, 109, 464, 652, 1077-1078, 1442. 



I 

Ihran, R., 1769, 1852. 
Ilford, Ltd., 2048. 

Ives, F. E., 145-146, 161, 163-164, 172, 187-189, 
209, 221-222, 233-237, 257-258, 274, 304-305, 
334-335, 417, 465-466, 880, 1443-1445, 1567- 
1570, 1683, 1853-1854, 2105, 2157-2159, 2206- 
2207, 2276. 

Ives, H. E., 731, 881-882, 1080, 1446, 1684, 2001, 

2049-2051, 2075. 
Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kingsbury, 2002. 



J 

J., C., 883-884. 
J., M. J., 1572. 

Johnson, G. L., 495, 1278, 2277. 
Johnson & Sons, 1685. 

Jolley, A. C. See Bull, A. J., and A. C. Jolley. 
Joly, John, 239, 275, 336. 

Jones, Chapman, 374, 419, 573, 653, 1081-1083, 1573, 

1938, 2209. 
Jones, L. A., 1939-1940. 
Jones, T. H., 1084. 
Jougla, J., 885-886. 
Jougla, J., the younger, 1279. 
Jourdain. P. E. B., 338, 375-376, 420-421, 467. 



114 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



Jove, 2159. 

Juhl, Ernst, 1085. 

Just, Alexander, 1771. 



K 

Kaiserling, Carl, 535. 
Kauffmann, Hugo, 536. 
Kein, Wold, 1857. 

Keller-Dorian, Berthon et Oie., 2332. 
Kelvin (1st baron), William Thomson, 277. 
Kenah, A. V., 468-469. 
Kieser, Karl, 654. 
Kilmer, T. W., 2052. 
Kine-Chromo, pseud., 1941. 

Kingsbury, E. F. See Ives, H. E., and E. F. Kings- 
bury. 
Klein, E., 1574. 

Klein, H. O., 574, 655, 887, 1280, 1447. 
Knoche, Paul, 2160. 
Knott, L. E., 1686. 
Knowles, H. C, 1281. 

Koegel, P. R., 2106-2107, 2161-2162, 2278. 
Koenig, Carl, 1448. 

Koenig, Ernst, 575-579, 656-658, 732-733, 888-891, 
1086, 1449-1450, 1687, 1772-1774, 1858-1859, 
1944, 2210-2211. 

Krone, Hermann, 210. 

Kropf, Fritz, 1575, 2108. 

Kruegener, R., 894. 

Kuchinka, Eduard, 470, 581. 

Kuemmell, G., 659, 1576, 1775. 

Kunz, W. H., 1577. 



L 

L., 424. 
Labatut, 190. 
Lacan, Ernest, 67. 
Lacroix, J., 2279. 
Ladd-Franklin, Christine, 2280. 
Lambert, F. C, 308, 378. 
Lang, William, 151. 
Lasareff, P., 895. 

Lassus Saint-Genies, Jacques de, 1860. 

Laurvik, J. N., 1087. 

Law, E. F., 1088. 

Lea, M. C, 153-154. 

Lederer, Otto, 1452. 

Leffmann, Henry, 1688. 

Lefort, V., 1283. 

Legeret, E., 1579. 

Leggett, G. H., 1689. 

Legier, Alphonse, 735. 

Lehmann, J. M., 660, 736-737, 898-899, 1089-1091, 

1284-1286, 1453. 
Leiber, Ferdinand, 900, 1580, 1690. See also Stenger, 

Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber. 
Lelong, Adrien, 1287-1288. 
Le Mee, Alexandre, 1454, 1581, 1691, 1776. 
Leon, L. C, 1290. 
Le Roy, G. A., 901-902. 
Leto Photo Materials Co., 1777. 
Letouzey, V., 1291. 
Leventon, L. M., 2212. 
Levy, Max, 583. 
Lewis, A. H., 1692. 
Lewisohn, John, 2004. 
Liabeuf, H., 2213. 
Liesegang, R. E., 1093, 1945-1946. 
Limmer, Fr., 1094, 1292-1296, 1455-1456, 1583-1584. 
Lippmann, Gabriel, 191-192, 211-215, 241, 278-279, 

339, 379, 661-663, 738-739. 
Litchfield, Charles, 1095. 



Lobley, F. J., 1693. 
Locquin, Rene, 1096-1097. 
Loebel, Leopold, 585, 664. 
Loescher, Fritz, 425. 
Loewy, Alfred, 1297. 
Lohmeyer, R., 1098. 

Lohr, J. M. See Farnau, E. F., and J. M. Lohr. 
Lotus, H., 1298. 
Lovelace, M. G., 1694. 
Lucas, E. G. H. ( 1695, 2108a. 
Luckiesh, Matthew, 2005. 

Lueppo-Cramer, 426, 471, 903-904, 1585-1588, 1778, 

1947, 2164. 
Lugdenensis, pseud., 1779. 
Lumiere, Auguste, 666, 1299. 

Lumiere, Auguste, and Louis Lumiere, 259-260, 340, 
472, 586-588, 665, 905, 1099-1100, 1300-1301, 
1458, 1861-1862. 

Lumiere, Auguste, and others, 906-907, 1101-1102, 
1302-1303, 1459-1460, 2109, 2165, 2217-2219. 

Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise, 2110. 

Luther, R., 1103, 1304, 1589. 



M 

McCord, Bennett, 1863. 

McFarland, J. H., 261. 

Mcintosh, J., 1104-1105, 1696, 1864. 

Mackenstein, H., 910. 

Mackenstein Etablissements, 1697. 

Mairot, F., 1698. 

Maisch, F. D., 1461. 

Malby, H. T., and others, 1307. 

Maldiney, 667. 

Maleve, L., 1699. 

Mann, A., 1865. 

Manners, Samuel, 1780. 

Manners, Samuel, and H. E. Rendall, 2333. 
Mareschal, G., 224, 341, 428, 668, 741, 911, 1106- 

1108, 1308-1311, 1591, 1700. 
Marino, Algeri, 1701. 
Marriage, Ernest, 1109. 
Marshall, Andrew, 2007. 
Martel, Charles, 55. 
Martin, Karl, 1781. 

Martin-Duncan, F., 912-914, 1110-1111, 1312. 

Martiny, Gaston, 915. 

Mascart, E. E. N., 193. 

Massiot, G., 1112, 1866, 2281. 

Maxwell, J. C, 47, 56. 

Mayer, Emil, 1463. 

Mazo, E., 1464. 

Mees, C. E. K., 742, 916-917, 1113-1117, 1313-1316, 

1592-1593, 1867, 1948, 2008, 2053-2054, 2220. 
Mees, C. E. K., and H. T. Clarke, 2111. 
Mees, C. E. K., and G. Gutekunst, 2282. 
Mees, C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge, 918, 1465. 
Mees, C. E. K., and S. E. Sheppard, 743. 
Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wratten, 919, 1118. 
Meggers, W. F., 2076. 
Meister Lucius & Bruning, 589, 1317. 
Meldola, R., 282. 
Mente, Otto, 920. 

Merckens, W., 1318. See also Smith, J. H., and W. 

Merckens. 
Mercury, pseud., 30. 
Merillat, Lou, 2055. 
Meslin, G., 216. 
Messer, H. C, 1702. 
Meugniot, 2111a. 

Miethe, Adolf, 473, 498-499, 538, 590-594, 1319- 

1320, 1703, 1868, 2112. 
Miethe, Adolf, and B. Seegert, 1594. 
Mikeska, L. A., and others, 2113. 
Miller, E. E. See Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller. 
Miller, M. D., 1321. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



115 



Millochau, G., 921. 

Mills, W. H., and P. E. Evans, 2166. 
Mills, W. H., and F. M. Hamer, 2167. 
Mills, W. H., and Sir W. J. Pope, 2168. 
Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart, 2169. 
Monjauze, G., 1783. 

Monpillard, Felix, 343-344, 381, 430, 501, 595, 669- 
671, 744-745, 922, 1120-1121, 1322-1324, 1466- 
1469, 1595, 1704-1705, 1785-1786, 1869, 2284. 

Moreels, R., 1470, 1596. 

Morris, Wayne, 2009. 

Morse, S. F. B., 32. 

Morton, A. E., 1787-1789, 1870-1871. 

Mueller, Gustav, 1325. 

Muller, Eugene, 2285-2286, 2334. 

Munro, L. W., 1122. 

Murdoch, Helen M., 1872-1873. 



N 

N., A. J., 1326. 

Namias, Rodolfo, 382, 431-432, 672, 1123, 1327-1328, 

1471, 1597, 1790-1791, 2114, 2222. 
Naumann, Helmut, 2336. 
Neame, S. E., 746. 

Neuhauss, Richard, 262, 283, 345-347, 383, 474-475, 

502, 540, 596, 675, 747, 924-925. 
Newens, F. R., 2115, 2170, 2223, 2338. 
Newton, A. J., 749-751, 926, 1472, 1711. See also 

Furnald, S. M., and A. J. Newton. 
Newton, A. J., and A. J. Bull, 598, 1712. 
Nicholson, J. W., 2116. 

Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 22, 40, 57, 74-75. 
Niewenglowski, G. H, 242, 284, 384, 1330. 
Noack,. 349. 

Norman, Albert, 541, 752. 
Northall-Laurie, D., 2339. 
Novak, Franz, 753, 1473, 1602. 
Nutting, P. G., 503. 



o 

Obermayer, Albert, Edler von, 676, 928-929, 1127, 
1331. 

Obernetter, E., 165. 
Offer, T. J., 2171, 2287. 
Ogonowski, E., conte, 195. 



P 

Paage, A., 80. 

Paget Prize Plate Co., 2224. 
Painter, F. W., 2010. 

Palocsay, Albin von, 1338, 1475, 1605-1607, 1713. 

Pan Chromo, pseud., 1950-1951. 

Parker, G. H, 1476. 

Parolini, C., and G. Perron, 2225. 

Payne, Arthur, 677, 933. 

Pearce, C. E., 155. 

Peaucellier, A., 1128. 

Pector, S., 755. 

Penrose, Frank, 1952. 

Perkins, H. F., 1340, 1477, 1608, 1875, 1953, 2011. 
Perron, G. See Parolini, C., and G. Perron. 
Personnaz, Antonin, 1130, 1341, 1609. 
Pfaundler, Leopold, 477, 599, 756, 934, 1478. 
Pfenninger, Otto, 757-758, 1479-1480, 1610, 1876, 

1954, 2012. 
Pirn, Greenwood, 132. 

Piper, C. W., 937, 1481, 1794, 1877, 1955-1958, 2013- 

2016, 2057-2058, 2078. 
Plaskett, J. S., 505. 
Pie, Charles, 58. 



Pledge, J. H., 939, 1342, 1795-1796. See also Mees, 

C. E. K., and J. H. Pledge. 
Plotnikov, I. S., 2172. 
Poiree, Georges, 940. 
Poitevin, L. A., 69. 

Pope, Sir W. J., 1714, 1959, 2118. See also Mills, 

W. H., and Sir W. J. Pope. 
Potonniee, G., 1879. 
Poulenc freres, 1131, 1343. 

Power, H. D'A., 543-544, 600, 1132-1139, 1344-1345, 

1880-1881, 1960, 2016, 2226. 
Powrie, J. H., 679, 1140, 1346. 
Precht, J., 601-603, 680. 
Press, A., 2059. 
Pretzl, A. D., 311. 
Prilejaeff, Alexandre, 1611, 1715. 
Prokoudine-Gorsky, S. de, 760, 2172a. 
Pumphrey, Alfred, 545. 



Q 

Quentin, H., 434, 944-945, 1348-1349, 1483-1487, 
1612. 



R 

R., H., 604. 

Raleigh, Charles, 2289. 

Randies, W. B. See Hind, H. L., and W. B. Randies. 
Rawlins, G. E. H., 1141. 

Rayleigh (3d baron), J. W. Strutt, 162, 166. 
Raymond, R., 947, 1142. 
Reeb, Henri, 950. 
Regni, pseud., 1489. 
Reising, H., 681. 

Rendall, H. E„ 2062, 2120-2121, 2173-2174, 2229- 
2230, 2290, 2341-2342. See also Manners, Sam- 
uel, and H. E. Rendall. 

Renger-Patzsch, Robert, 1797. 

Renwick, F. F., 1350. 

Reynolds, E. J., 70. 

Rheinberg, Julius, 605, 761, 1491, 1613-1614, 1718. 

Rheinberg, Julius, and Ernst Rheinberg, 1719. 

Richard, A., 1615. 

Richard, G. A., 289. 

Rigg, Gilbert, 1883. 

Riley, P. M., 951. 

Rimmer, J. B., 2175. 

Rockwood, G. A., 1144. 

Rodman, G. H., 2018. 

Rood, O. N., 138. 

Rose, S. W., 2231. 

Ross, William, 41-42. 

Rothe, E., 606, 682, 952. 

Rounds, Will., 2080. 

Rowe, E. H., 2343. 

Rundle, B., 2081. 

Rypinski, M. C, 1798, 1884. 



s 

S., G., 1492. 

S., J. C, 1145. 

Saal, Alfred, 1493. 

Sacco, Giulio, 1146. 

Sachse, J. F., 290. 

Saint Florent, E. de, 94, 312, 607. 

Sallwuerk, Edmund von, 762. 

Salt, E. A., 2019. 

Sanger Shepherd & Co., 546. 

Satori, Karl, 608. 

Saville-Kent, W., 763. 



116 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



Sawyer, J. R., 124. 
Schaum, Karl, 1147. 

Scheffer, W., 1148-1149, 1353-1357, 1494-1497. 

Schilling, Otto, 1498. 

Schinzel, Karl, 683, 1150. 

Schitz, C, 2232-2233. 

Schloemann, Eduard, 1358. 

Schmidt, Hans, 684-685, 764-768, 953, 1151. 

Schmitz, Fritz, 1720. 

Schrott, Paul, Ritter von, 1799. 

Schuett, F., 291. 

Schultess-Young, W. A., 1884a, 1963. 

Schultz-Sellack, Carl, 86-87. 

Schwarzer, E., 1800. 

Scoble, W. A., 769. 

Scott, Albert W., 198. 

Seddig, M., 770. 

Seebeck, J. T., 4-5. 

Seegert, B. See Miethe, Adolf, and B. Seegert. 

Selle, Gustav, 609. 

Senior, Edgar, 412, 506, 610. 

Seyewetz, A., 1359, 1499, 2082. See also Lumiere, 

Auguste, and others. 
Sforza, Francis, 1360-1361, 1500. 
Sheahan, D. J., 1885, 1964. 
Shearer, J. S., 479. 

Shepherd, E. S., 387-389, 436, 507, 547. 
Shepherd, J. F., 2293. 

Sheppard, S. E., 955, 1152. See also Mees, C. E. K., 

and S. E. Sheppard. 
Shivas, E., 1153. 

Siegrist, H. See Fischer, R., and H. Siegrist. 
Simmen, Charles, 1154-1155, 1501, 1617-1618. 
Sims, W. A., 956. 
Smillie, T. W., 1156. 
Smith, G. A., 1157. 

Smith, J. H., 771, 957-958, 1158-1160, 1363-1364, 

1502, 1801, 2020. 
Smith, J. H., and W. Merckens, 772-773, 959. 
Smith, J. H., & Co., 774. 
Smith, Stephen, 313. 
Smitten, H. M., 1802. 
Snappschotte, J. Focus, pseud., 264. 
Snelling, H. H., 23-24. 
South, C. W., 611. 
Spiller, John, 95, 103. 
Spiller, W. H., 1966. 
Spoerl, Hans, 686, 1804. 
St., 508. 

Staats, Georg, 157. 
Stark, J., 961. 
Starr, W. I., 1619, 1721. 
Steadman, F. M., 962. 
Steichen, E. J., 1163-1164. 

Stenger, Erich, 687-689, 963-966, 1165-1168, 1504, 
1620-1621, 1806. See Precht, J. (entries 603, 
680); see Miethe, A. (entry no. 2112). 

Stenger, Erich, and Ferdinand Leiber, 1169-1170, 
1505. 

Stieglitz, Alfred, 1171. 
Stoakley, F. J., 2294. 
Stobbe, Hans, 1172, 1367, 1506. 
Stokes, G. G., 139. 

Stolze, F., 218, 549, 690, 1173-1174, 1368. 
Storr, B. V., 2083. 
Str., 1722. 

Streissler, Alfred, 1369, 1807-1808. 

Struss, Karl, 2063. 

Strutt, J. W., 71. 

Sutton, Thomas, 90. 

Swan, J. W., 353. 

Swinton, A. A. C, 125. 

Switkowski, Josef, 1622. 

Symmons, Guy. See Farmer, Howard, and Guy 

Symmons. 
Szczepanik, Jan, 612, 1175, 1370. 
Szczepanik, Jan, and F. Aubuch, 1887. 



T 

T., H., 480. 

Talbot, H. F., 12. 

Talboys, A. E., 550. 

Tallent, A. A. K., 354, 412, 481. 

Tauleigne, A., 1507. 

Taylor, J. T., 72. 

Teamer, C. K., and E. E. Miller, 2236. 
Testud de Beauregard, 44. 
Thames Colour Plate Co., 1374. 
Thiem, W., 2021, 2295. 

Thieme, Paul, 1178, 1377, 1723, 1888, 2022. 
Thoerner, W., 1810. 
Thomas, R. W., 85. 
Thorp, Thomas, 438. 

Thovert, J., 1378, 1624-1625, 1724, 2296. 

Thwing, C. B., 200. 

Tikhoff, 1626. 

Tillman, S. D., 59. 

Tilney, F. C, 969, 1180-1181. 

Tiphaigne de la Roche, C. F., 1. 

Tobler, Friedrich, 1811, 1889. 

Toch, Maximilian, 1380, 1508. 

Torchon, Paul, 1182-1183. 

Toulon, Pierre, 2176. 

Townsend, C. F., 693. 

Traube, Artur, 614, 694, 971-972, 2297. 

Traut, H., 1184. 

Trillat, A., 440. 

Triplice, 551. 

Tschoerner, Ludwig, 1185. 
Tutton, F. G., 2302, 2346-2348. 



u 

Union photographique industrielle etablissements Lu- 
miere & Jougla reunis, 1812. 
United States. — Patents Committee, 36. 



V 

Valenta, Eduard, 243, 355, 441, 615, 787, 973, 1187- 

1190, 1381-1383, 1628-1629, 1725-1726, 2023. 
Valette, T., and R. Feret, 1890. 
Vallot, fimile, 1630. 
Van Beek, H., 482. 
Van der Weyde, 81. 
Van De venter, J. G., 1191. 
Ventujol, Emmanuel, 2349-2350. 
Versnaeyen, M. K., 115-116. 

Vidal, Leon, 106, 117-118, 201, 219, 244, 314-317, 

356, 390-394, 512-513, 552, 788-789. 
Vies, Guilliam de, 2177. 
Vieuille, G., 357. 

Villain, Alfred, 1509, 2024, 2065. 
Vinzl, Hans, 2025. 

Vogel, H. W., 91, 96-97, 133-134, 140-141, 147, 174, 
202-203, 245, 317, 358-359. 



w 

W., A. J., 92. 
W., J., 790-791. 
W., L. T., 1968, 2178. 
Wagner, R., 2240. 

Wall, E. J., 265-266, 292, 483, 553-554, 616-619, 
792-802, 974-990, 1192-1195, 1385, 1510, 1632- 
2244, 2306-2308, 2351-2353. 

Wallace, R. J., 514, 991, 1196-1197, 1511, 1814. 

1633, 1728, 1891-1894, 1969, 2027, 2179, 2241- 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



117 



Waller, Augustus, 10. 

Wallon, Stienne, 318, 360, 442, 515, 621, 992-995, 

1198, 2245. 
Walter, Gustav, 803. 

Walters, F. M., and Raymond Davis, 2246. 

Warburg, Agnes B., 2084. 

Warburg, J. C, 1199, 1386, 2354. 

Ward, C. W., 246. 

Ward, H. S., 443, 1387. 

Ward, J. J., 1200. 

Warnerke, Leon, 225, 247. 

Wastell, W. L. F., 2355. 

Waterhouse, James, 104, 622, 1388-1389. 

Watkins, Alfred, 444, 996-997, 1202-1203, 1815, 1895. 

Watkins, H. S., 2247. 

Watteville, C. de, 2248. 

Weidert, Fr., 623. 

Weidmann, V., 1896. 

Weimann, Arthur, 1634. 

Weissermel, W., 1512, 1729-1730, 1897. 

Wentzel, Fritz, 1391. 

Wenz, £mile, 1898. 

Weston, A. W. H., 1970. 

Whatmough, W. A., 1899. 

Whidden, G. C, 2028. 

Whitfield, Geoffrey, and C. L. Finlay, 1817. 

Wieland, H., and others, 2029. 

Wiener, O. H., 175, 267, 361, 395, 1392. 

Wilcox, W. D., 2180. 

Wilkinson, W. T., 1900, 2030, 2085. 

Williams, A. D., 2031. 

Williams, S. H., 2123-2124. 

Wilson, E. L., 248. 

Winstanley, D., 204. 

Winter, G., 1513, 1635. 

Wise, L. E. See Lund, C. H., and L. E. Wise. 



Wise, L. E., and others, 2125. 

Wishart, R. S. See Mills, W. H., and R. S. Wishart. 

Wolf-Czapek, K. W., 998-1001, 1731. 

Wood, Sir H. T„ 320-322. 

Wood, R. W., 396, 445-446, 624, 1732. 

Woodhead, A. E., 1901. 

Woods, C. R., 135. 

Woods, L. T., 2250. 

Worel, Karl, 516, 555, 695, 804, 1002-1004, 1205, 

1514, 1636, 1733-1734, 1902. 
Wratten, S. H. See Mees, C. E. K., and S. H. Wrat- 

ten. 

Wratten & Wainwright, 1004. 
Wright, H. W. C., 1903, 2251. 
Wuensch, C. E., 2. 
Wychgram, Engelhard, 1637, 1819. 



X 

X., 1515. 

Xtensis, pseud., 1971. 



Y 

Yerbury, S. G., 805-806, 1516, 2126, 2252. 
Yoshida, Usaburo, 2127. 
Young, S. L., 1393. 



z 

Zander, C. G., 696, 807-808. 
Zavoda, Bohuslav, 1394. 
Zenker, Wilhelm, 205, 447. 



SUBJECT INDEX 



Numbers refer to entries, not to pages 



A 

Abney, Sir W. de W., 114, 128, 163, 548, 2141, 2194, 
2209. 

Abney's color disc, 699. 
Actinometers, 996-997. 
Additive process, 2066. 
Aeonchrome plate, 1905. 
Aerial photography, 1319. 

Agfa plate, 1765, 1795, 1915, 1980, 2022-2023, 2336. 
Albert, Joseph, 114, 120, 1184. 
Albumin, 123, 215. 
Allochrome plates, 697. 

Amateur work, 428, 469, 550, 617, 664, 679, 1066, 

1232, 1268, 1686, 1749, 1865. 
Anethol, 2106. 

Aniline. See Coal tar colors. 
Animals, photography of, 1819. 
Anti-frilling dish, 1014. 

Art and color photography, 159, 762, 817, 1017, 1283, 
1341, 1434, 1641, 1651, 1868, 1931. 

Astronomical uses, 1197, 1535, 1594, 1626, 1703, 1732, 
2130, 2279. 

Aurora plate, 1210, 1250, 1510. 

Autochromes, 586-588, 593, 621, 665-666, 668, 811, 
846, 849, 866, 870-871a, 884, 894, 909, 911-912, 
938, 948, 962, 964, 978-979, 994-995, 998-999, 
1012, 1015, 1018, 1029, 1055, 1068, 1070-1073, 
1078, 1134, 1137, 1144, 1175, 1190, 1192, 1196, 
1198, 1205, 1214, 1233-1234, 1280, 1307, 1321, 
1359, 1395, 1406, 1416, 1512, 1519, 1609, 1619, 
1621, 1655, 1696, 1730, 1737, 1798, 1800, 1850, 
1863, 1918, 1970, 1991, 2000, 2046, 2114, 2180, 
2247, 2355. 

Actinometers, 996. 

Anaglyphs, 1555. 

Backing, 1809. 

Blacks, 1153, 2329. 

Blacks and whites from, 1608, 1974. 

Bluish tones, 1039, 1044, 1271, 1529, 2233, 2285. 

Changing box, 1579. 

Cloud effects, 2196. 

Color, 1023, 1323, 1467, 1762. 

Comparison with other processes, 789, 897-898, 970, 
1003, 1086, 1213, 1744, 1861, 1884a, 2009, 2137, 
2336. 

Contrast, 1243, 1665. 

Dark room, 1131, 1297, 1900. 

Dark slide, 1265. 

Daylight development, 1065, 1106, 1287, 2310. 
Defects, 1220, 1290, 1659, 1791, 2268, 2318. 
Desensitizing, 2181, 2217, 2256, 2286. 
Deterioration, 1799. 
Difficulties, 915, 2080. 
Drying, 2249. 
Enlargements, 1634, 1754. 

Exposure, 862, 950, 1028, 1032-1033, 1052, 1054, 
1064, 1095, 1128, 1130, 1194, 1203-1204, 1232, 
1272, 1275, 1403, 1463, 1476, 1605-1606, 1699, 
1706, 1723, 1749, 1788, 1821, 1823, 1826, 1831, 
1895, 1919, 2214, 2232, 2311, 2349. 

Exposure in artificial light, 2033. 

Exposure (instantaneous), 1501, 1617, 2270. 

Fading, 1247. 

Filters, 1095, 1105, 1202, 1273, 1306, 1602, 1611, 
1638, 1715, 1766-1767, 2104, 2319, 2324. 



Autochromes, continued. 

Flashlight, 1324, 1459-1460, 1604, 1729. 

Flatness, 1200. 

Flowers, 864. 

Frilling, 1171, 1542, 1551. 

Grain, 828, 914, 939, 1021, 1148, 1381. 

Hypersensitization, 1518, 1618, 1624-1625, 1630, 

1657, 1677, 1724, 1768, 1785-1786, 1869, 2159, 

2284, 2304. 
Illumination of subject, 2040, 2086, 2214. 
Improvements, 2212. 

Intensification, 819, 1064, 1079, 108L 1223, 1236, 

1660-1661, 1770, 2145, 2150, 2198. 
Landscapes, 993, 1049, 1468. 
Lantern slides, 1010, 1109, 1966, 2262. 
Lens (soft-focus), 2052. 
Metallic screens, 1276. 
Mounting, 1020, 1060. 
Old plates, 1417, 1503. 
Optics, 1672. 
Outfits, 858, 1268. 
Packing, 1544. 
Pinatype prints, 1038. 

Portraits, 1242, 1550, 1783, 1844, 1972, 2156. 

Price, 1211, 1352, 1386. 

Printing frame, 1364. 

Projecting, 1284, 1866, 2203, 2281. 

Reproduction, 827, 937, 1142, 1170, 1215, 1249, 
1301, 1351, 1424, 1437-1438, 1466, 1499, 1509, 
1513, 1520, 1549, 1652, 1833, 1849, 2185, 2337. 

Residues, 819. 

Retouching, 1673, .1760, 1857. 

Reversing, 819, 875-876, 1141, 1235, 1398, 1643. 

Rock sections, 1024. 

Screens, 1664. 

Stains and spots, 819, 1064, 1129, 1143, 1161, 1365, 

1399, 1559, 1761. 
Stereoscopic, 851, 1366, 2182. 
Stripping, 1149. 
Sulphide toning, 1145, 1183. 
Sunsets, 1415. 
Telephotography, 1875. 
Theory, 1075, 1461. 
Thermometer, 1390. 
Underexposure, 1580. 

Use in ordinary photography, 1523, 1541. 
Varnish, 902, 927, 1370. 

Viewing, 859, 1096, 1164, 1275, 1300, 1338, 1343, 

1421, 1490, 1662, 1702, 1810, 1898, 2081. 
Washing, 1048. 
Whites, 941. 

Working of, 780, 820-821, 826, 838-840, 865, 901, 
905-908, 910, 943, 960, 985, 1009, 1022, 1028, 
1036-1037, 1041, 1045, 1048, 1050, 1063-1066, 
1074, 1077, 1084, 1097, 1100, 1102, 1106, 1108, 
1120-1121, 1132, 1136, 1138-1139, 1154, 1155, 
1162, 1164, 1182-1183, 1186, 1189, 1203, 1221, 
1228, 1232, 1240-1241, 1267, 1287, 1299, 1302- 
1303, 1308-1310, 1312, 1325, 1345, 1347, 1360, 
1362, 1380, 1384, 1396, 1425, 1492, 1495, 1497, 
1508, 1510, 1533, 1548, 1557, 1597, 1631, 1635, 
1640, 1646, 1658, 1663, 1685, 1698, 1751, 1790, 
1826, 1834, 1836, 1885, 1891, 1909, 1910, 1914, 
1963, 1975, 2025, 2031, 2109, 2111a, 2138, 2175, 
2193, 2205, 2257, 2261, 2311, 2320, 2326, 2334. 

Zeiss accessories, 1206. 



[ 118 ] 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



119 



Autochromes for amateurs, 1066, 1749. 
Autochroraes and art, 1042, 1341, 1956, 1964. 
Autochromes in astronomy, 2130, 2279. 
Autochromes from autochromes, 822, 1057-1059, 1441- 

1442, 1448, 1451, 1458, 1750. 
Autochromes in autumn, 1539. 
Autochromes of birds, 1952. 
Autochromes of interiors, 1953, 2251. 
Autochromes in microphotography, 1312, 1322. 
Autochromes in museums, 1466. 

Autochromes in travelling, 1028, 1043, 1107, 1377, 

1462, 1543, 1650. 
Autochromes in tropics, 1493, 1748, 1811, 1889, 2177. 
Autochromes in winter, 1692, 2251. 
Autochromoscope, 1662. 
Autotype, 702, 783, 1648, 1827. 

B 

Backs (repeating), 2254. 
Balduinus, C. Adolphus, 1753. 
Battlefield photography, 2069. 
Baumgartner's process, 298. 
Beccaria, Giovanni Battista, 1753. 

Becquerel's process, 15, 26, 35, 50, 68, 101, 136, 248, 

267-269, 282, 364, 467. 
See also Author index. 
Bennetto's process, 287-288, 310, 326-327, 402, 1443, 

1480, 1489. 
Berton and Gambs process, 849. 
Bibliography, 2034, 2088. 
Bichromated size process, 845, 1649. 
Bierstadt, E., 255. 
Bird photography, 1952. 

Black and white prints from autochromes, 1928, 1974. 
Blacks, 501. 

Bleachout process, 502, 516, 540, 555, 571, 596, 643, 
659, 675, 694, 713, 730, 747, 771, 773-774, 776, 
797, 849, 895, 924-925, 931, 957, 959, 1000- 
1003, 1094, 1117, 1160, 1218, 1230, 1258-1263, 
1292, 1294, 1296, 1318, 1363, 1367, 1455, 1500, 
1502, 1514, 1537, 1552, 1556, 1561, 1576, 1583- 
1584, 1601, 1627, 1629, 1691, 1707-1708, 1722, 
1726, 1733-1734, 1757, 1759, 1769, 1771, 1775, 
1801, 1804, 1812-1813, 1852, 1887, 1902, 2020, 
2089, 2161, 2278. 

Blue, 451, 919. 

Body colors, 361, 2107. 

Bonnaud's process, 115. 

Boyle, Robert, 1753. 

Brasseur and Sampolo's process, 299, 450, 476. 
Brewster's (P. W.) camera, 1977, 1987. 
Burroughs, Wellcome & Co., 1623. 
Butler's process, 435, 706, 1531, 1741, 2090, 2276. 



c 

Cadett plates, 387-388. 
Cajal's process, 849. 
Camera, History, 1610. 
Camera, Reflector, 757, 2230. 

Camera, Single-exposure, 635, 639, 683, 690, 706, 
710, 740, 758, 1006, 1113-1114, 1225, 1393, 1486, 
1668, 1689, 1709, 1779, 1854, 2288, 2340. 

Campbell, James, 26. 

Carbon processes, 513, 703, 766, 800, 830, 988, 2128. 

Catalysis, 1150. 

Cathode rays, 2045. 

Cellerier's process, 148, 152, 156. 

Celloidine paper, 312. 

Ceramic screen-plates, 2029. 

Cevlon, taking photographs in, 1873. 

Chamby, M., 77. 

Chassagne's process, 293, 297, 301-302, 320-321. 



Chloranol, 1834. 
Chlorophyl, 161. 

Christensen screen-plate. See Agfa plate. 
Chromodiascope, 1099, 1300. 
Chromoscope, 1697, 2276, 2306. 
Chronometre, 111. 

Cinematography, 401, 708, 1082, 1157, 1248, 1479, 
1591, 1674, 1678, 1679, 1731, 1738, 1747, 1763, 
1772, 1941, 2027, 2060, 2071, 2083, 2092, 2225, 
2259, 2273, 2289, 2316, 2332, 2351. 

Coal tar colors, 165, 184, 355. 

Collen, Henry, 2077. 
See also Author index. 

Collodion, 138, 570, 615, 1226, 1447, 1473. 

Color curves, 842. 

Color discs, 397. 

Color meters, 880. 

Color scale, 2043. 

Color sensitiveness, 471, 489, 743, 770, 965, 1947, 
1992, 2164. 

Color sensitizers, 437, 441, 464, 498, 610, 619, 622, 
636, 645, 654, 700, 728, 739, 823, 961, 977, 984, 
991, 1159, 1178, 1316, 1391, 1449, 1642, 1705, 
1724, 1786, 1805, 1832, 1858, 1938, 2012, 2106, 
2131, 2133, 2165, 2246, 2282, 2304. 
See also Dyes. 

Color theory, 2-3, 47, 55-56, 99, 104, 124, 158, 205, 
207, 218, 262, 295, 313, 324, 328, 362, 413, 415, 
419, 504, 568, 715, 722, 727, 756, 934, 1115, 1219, 
1314, 1389, 1397, 1430, 1478, 1911, 1939, 1955, 
1960, 2013-2014, 2035, 2047, 2051, 2068, 2075, 
2099, 2160, 2242, 2274, 2280, 2295. 

Comley's camera, 847. 

Cooper-Hewitt lamp, 569. 

Corke, H. E., 2102. 

Cornu, 338. 

Crime and color photography, 1025. 
Croll, Oswald, 1753. 

Cros's process, 82, 113, 116-117, 172, 332, 478, 551, 
640, 1728, 1861, 1876. 
See also Author index. 
Crum, Walter, 70. 
Crystalline reflection, 139, 162. 

Cyanin, 503, 579, 726, 973, 1118, 1152, 2072, 2166- 
2169. 



D 

Daguerrotype (colored), 81. 

Dansac-Chassagne process. See Chassagne's process. 
Dark rooms, 693, 714, 1297, 1457, 1473. 
Davidson, Lascelles, 401, 581. 
Daylight, 680. 

Deeks's process, 2187, 2345. 
De Lubicz's process, 449. 
Delvalez, 467. 

Desensitizers, 1159, 1505, 2181, 2190, 2217-2218, 

2256, 2286. 
Diachrome process. See Traube's process. 
Diaphragms, 609. 
Dichroic films, 2074. 
Dichrooscope, 53. 
Dicyanine, 745. 

Diffraction process, 375, 396, 445-446, 624, 731, 881. 
Direct processes, 270, 376, 379, 420, 452, 487, 493, 

502, 600, 738, 774, 853, 958, 1666, 1717, 1847, 

2017, 2171. 
Dittmar's process, 309, 348, 467. 
Donisthorpe printing process, 854, 2183. 
Drac process, 710, 781, 1718. 
Drying apparatus, 1752, 1869, 2249. 
Ducos du Hauron, Alcide, 1209. 

Ducos du Hauron, Louis, 537, 879, 1838, 1879, 2163, 
2216. 



120 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



Ducos du Hauron's process, 83, 116, 120, 140, 172, 
332, 357, 360, 428, 442, 470, 478, 515, 640, 849, 
857, 1861, 1876. 

Dufay process, 1046, 1244, 1331, 1342, 1405, 1410- 
1411, 1413-1414, 1420, 1427-1429, 1436, 1439, 
1498, 1510, 1540, 1563, 1565, 1572, 1619, 1637, 
1644, 1667, 1669, 1721, 1744, 1788, 1798, 2061, 
2247, 2258, 2313. 

Dyes, 108, 289, 371, 512, 533, 536, 559-560, 576, 903, 
955, 1047, 1172, 1187, 1237, 1277, 1317-1318, 
1449-1450, 1553, 1574, 1675, 1758, 1852, 2042, 
2048, 2082, 2105-2106, 2110-2111, 2113, 2118, 
2125, 2131, 2157-2158, 2161-2162, 2204, 2206- 
2207, 2219, 2275, 2341, 2346. 



E 

Eastman transparency process, 1920. 
Eclipse, 78, 782. 

Eder, Josef Maria, 467, 534, 1935. 
Educational uses, 2172a. 
Edward's process, 89. 
Egyptian scenes, 1320, 1582. 
Electric light, 1193. 
Enlargements, 725. 
Eosine, 130, 133. 

Exhibitions, 566, 718, 723, 793, 795, 861, 983, 1008, 
1051, 1180, 1199, 1227, 1239, 1255, 1375, 1886, 
2011, 2213, 2258, 2264. 

Exposure, 1407, 1895, 1919, 2094, 2311. 

Exposure meters, 1128, 1204, 1802, 1815-1816, 1925, 
2095. 

Exposures (instantaneous), 303, 331, 354, 764. 1242, 
1304, 1378, 1426, 1501, 1538, 1617, 2270. 



F 

Fabricius, Georgius, 1753. 

Fabrics, color prints on, 1890, 2024, 2036, 2065. 

Ferricyanide method, 1454. 

Film (screen-ruled), 1401. 

Films (colored), on metallic surfaces, 1330. 

Films (untoned), color of, 1147. 

Films, marking of, 2149. 
Pigment, 655. 

Filters, 374, 490, 499, 521, 538, 562-563, 580, 589- 
590, 598, 618, 669, 689, 698-699, 709, 753, 877, 
919, 942, 987, 1011, 1105, 1146, 1173, 1179, 1197, 
1202, 1273-1274, 1306, 1317, 1368, 1440, 1511, 
1524, 1592, 1602, 1638, 1781, 1846, 1999, 2005, 
2010, 2041, 2095, 2104, 2111-2112, 2153, 2189, 
2204, 2319, 2324, 2338, 2342. 

Fish glue, use of, 1736. 

Fixing, 51, 77. 

Flashlights, 990, 1252, 1324, 1459-1460, 1550, 1595, 

1604, 1671, 1680, 1729, 1844, 2021. 
Florence plate, 1346. 
Flowers, 864, 2148. 
Focussing screens, 1845. 
Foliage, 2195. 

Four-color process, 717, 721, 727, 807, 1254. 
Fraschbourg's process, 581. 
Freshwater, T. E., 328. 
Friese-Greene's process, 386, 1591. 
Fulgide, 1172, 1506. 



G 

Gaedicke, J., 171. 
Garchey's process, 435. 
Garden's, 2265. 
Gebhart, Kurt, 1924. 
Geisler's process, 341, 967, 1253, 1591. 
See also Nachet-Geisler process. 



Gelatin, color phenomena, 1174. 
Geology, use in, 1714. 
Gervais-Courtellement, 1582, 1604. 
Gilbert's process, 815. 
Giphantia (title), 1. 
Glaciers, 1735. 
Glycerol, 1642. 
Glycinroth, 433. 
Goethe, J. W. von, 491. 
Gorsky process, 2100, 2271. 
Gradation, 653, 1098. 

Grain structure, 393-394, 835, 939, 1381, 1573, 1593. 

Grating films, 438. 

Gray's process, 232. 

Grays, 501, 1681, 1695, 1711. 

Green, 392, 863, 2192. 

Grenier-Villard process, 352. 

Gum process, 777. 

Gurtner's process, 581. 



H 

Hallotype, 45-46. 
Hamburger's process, 1536. 
Heliochromes, 20, 22, 34. 
Hellot, Jean, 1753. 
Henberger's patent, 786. 
Henderson award, 1269. 
Henry, Charles, experiments, 300. 
Hering's theory, 934. 
Hernandez, Arturo, 2129. 
Herschel, Sir J. F. W., 68. 
Hesekiel's process, 424, 637. 

Hess-Ives process, 1933-1934, 1975, 1996-1997, 2028, 
2032, 2063. 

Hicro process. See Hess-Ives process. 

Hill process, 16-19, 21, 23-24, 26-28, 30-33, 36, 43, 
155, 528, 2243, 2250, 2252. 

History, 72, 102, 125, 127, 144, 150, 170, 177-178, 
186, 240, 245, 255, 308, 322, 367, 399, 412, 462, 
487, 495, 514, 543, 644, 712, 804, 970, 1007, 1083, 
1093, 1184, 1256, 1472, 1584, 1610, 1753, 1793, 
1806, 1837, 1884, 1894, 2017, 2026, 2058, 2070, 
2083, 2101, 2172, 2184, 2220, 2294, 2306. 

Hofmann's process, 439. 

Hollborn plate, 1295. 

Homocol sensitizer, 691. 

Huebl, Arthur, Freiherr von, 311, 520. 

Huebl's process, 652. 
See also Author index. 

Hunt, Robert, 68. 

See also Author index. 

Hydroquinone, 444. 



I 

Uluminants, 1940, 2040. 

Images (three-color), symmetry, 1835, 1851. 
India, Taking photographs in, 1872. 
Indirect processes, 376, 381, 450. 
Industrial applications, 453. 
Interference bands, 166. 
Interiors, 1953. 
Irradiation, 567. 
Isenmann's process, 630. 
Isochromatic plates, 1197. 

Ives, Frederic E., 203, 207-208, 220, 230, 238, 530, 
932, 1847, 1876, 2136, 2343. 
Processes, 209, 238, 266, 304-306, 316, 335, 367, 
373, 377, 418, 422-423, 461, 470, 1400, 1443- 
1445, 1480, 1489, 1961, 2135, 2158, 2207-2208. 
See also Author index. 
Ives, H. E., Duplication method, 968. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



121 



J 

Joly's process, 254, 266, 290, 307, 323, 329-330, 338, 
353, 405, 413, 427, 443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 
605, 673, 679, 951, 2124. 
See also Author index. 

Jougla process. See Omnicolor. 

Jumeaux process, 757. 

Jupiter lamp, 734. 



K 

Kitz, 467. 

Kodachrome process, 1906, 1916, 1937, 1942-1943, 

1948, 1969, 1975, 1978, 2008, 2314. 
Koenig's process, 616. 

See also Author index. 
Kopp's process, 217. 
Krayn, Robert, 1983. 

Krayn's process, 403, 849, 892-893, 974, 1165, 1257, 
1484, 1494, 1504, 1527, 1612, 1628, 1637, 1645. 



L 

Landscapes, 343, 556, 993, 1049, 1468. 

Lantern slides, 389, 1010, 1109, 1670, 1917, 1966, 

1968, 2007, 2096, 2236, 2262. 
Laroche's process, 92. 
Lea, Carey, 137, 151, 267, 292. 
Lead intensification, 1822. 
Lectures, suggestions for, 2003. 
Lehman's patent, 861. 

Lenses, 484, 582, 812, 940, 1092, 1289, 1592, 1712, 

2095, 2322. 
Lenses (soft-focus), 2052. 
Leto plate, 1777, 1792. 
Leuco bases, 576, 585, 1158, 1170, 2307. 
Lewisohn process, 2269. 
Lieber process, 975. 
Light: 

Chemical action, 4-12, 37-38, 40, 52, 69, 74, 79, 
86-87, 91, 93, 95-97, 121-122, 129, 141, 143, 
149, 157-158, 175, 190, 193, 402, 440, 503, 644, 
660, 680, 1585-1587, 1753, 1839, 1841. 
Dispersion, 1446. 
Polarized, 180, 2339. 
Lippmann, Gabriel, 246, 531, 2248. 
Lippmann process, 176, 178-179, 186, 189, 194, 196, 
197, 200, 202, 210, 216, 222, 224-225, 231, 235- 
236, 242-243, 249-253, 256, 262, 269, 277, 
282-283, 291-292, 317-318, 329, 345-347, 358, 
365, 370, 383, 385, 395, 405-407, 412, 420, 426, 
458, 461, 467, 474-475, 478, 496, 506, 584, 599, 
604, 606, 661, 676, 709, 736-737, 789, 802, 833- 
834, 898-899, 945, 952, 966, 968, 989, 1003, 
1080, 1089, 1091, 1358, 1453, 1482, 1694, 1725, 
1756, 1840, 1908, 1945, 2001. 
See also Author index. 
Loewenstamm and Hoffert, 641. 
London Camera Club, 507. 
Loundin's process, 1304, 2215. 
Lueppo-Cramer, 451. 

See also Author index. 
Lumiere, Antoine, 1521, 1545. 

Lumiere, Antoine, and Louis Lumiere, 962, 1388. 
Lumiere, Louis, 2245. 

Lumiere processes, 223, 225, 235-236, 247, 285, 459, 
480, 497, 740, 843, 1124-1126, 1329, 1369, 1862. 
See also Autochromes; also Author index. 
Luminescence, photographs of, 1669. 
Luther, R., methods, 1575. 



M 

McDonough's process, 263, 280-281, 408-409, 427, 

443, 457, 461, 468-469, 479, 494, 679, 1989. 
Manners' process, 1590. 
Marionez's process, 1615. 
Mars-Star process, 2119. 
Mascart, E. E. N., 338. 
Maxwell, J. C, 338, 413, 504, 2241. 
Medicine, use in, 2191, 2208. 

Meister Lucius & Pruning, 577, 595, 671, 678, 745. 
Melano's chromoscope, 380, 429, 442. 
Meslin, 467. 

Metallography, 1088, 1745, 1883. 
Methyl-violet, 2127. 
Meyer, Bruno, 594. 
Meyer's camera, 342. 
Mezaro's patent, 792. 

Microphotographs, 922, 1021, 1088, 1312, 1322, 1452, 
1564, 1688, 1704, 1764, 2053-2054, 2056, 2339. 
Micro-spectra process. See Rheinberg's process. 
Miethe, Adolf, 518, 557, 2253. 
Miethe's Egyptian scenes, 1320. 

Miethe's process, 485, 510, 519, 522, 525, 542, 549, 
561, 642. 
See also Author index. 



N 

N. P. G. process, 685, 765, 767, 1562, 1730. 
Nachet-Geisler process, 719, 868. 
Nachet's stereochromoscope, 266, 315, 391. 
Natural history records, 763, 1110-1111. 
Neuhauss, Richard, 1962. 
Neuhauss's process, 467, 486, 493. 
Newton's rings, 2186. 

Niepce de Saint Victor, C. F. A., 25-26, 35, 61-62, 
65, 68, 88, 136, 248. 
See also Author index. 
Niewenglowski's heliochromoscope, 266, 284. 

o 

Ocean photography, 2291. 
Oil of pinks, 60. 

Omnicolor, 824, 885-886, 920, 981, 1212, 1231, 1270, 
1279, 1282, 1305, 1313, 1332-1337, 1348, 1353, 
1355, 1357, 1381-1382, 1387, 1395, 1419, 1422, 
1474, 1510, 1730, 1744. 

One-plate processes, 930. 

Opal, photographs on, 1776. 

Optics, 417, 454-455, 465-466, 481, 483, 1278, 1672. 
Orthochromatic plates, 434, 890, 1123, 1846. 



P 

Paget process, 1653, 1670, 1746, 1773, 1784, 1787- 
1788, 1796-1798, 1807, 1817, 1820, 1825, 1830, 
1842, 1846, 1874. 1880-1881, 1884a, 1888, 1917, 
1963, 1966, 1975, 1988, 2009, 2018, 2093, 2097- 
2098, 2117, 2120, 2132, 2137, 2143-2144, 2151- 
2152, 2178, 2223-2224, 2231, 2247, 2266-2267, 
2317, 2348. 

Panchromatic plates, 433, 608, 664, 697, 890, 1016, 
1238, 1339, 1471, 1900, 1912-1913, 1971, 2019, 
2133-2134, 2219. 

Paper prints, 545-546, 553, 577, 592, 632, 772-773, 
1170, 1288, 1318, 1327, 1344, 1349, 1491, 1520, 
1536, 1581, 1600, 1653, 1833, 1874, 2030, 2121, 
2123, 2201, 2260, 2330. 

Penrose ratiometer, 887. 

Perscheid's process, 581. 

Pfenninger, Otto, 932, 1185, 1853. 

Photometry, 2001-2002, 2049-2050. 



122 



THE NEW YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY 



Photomicrographs. See Microphotographs. 
Pietzner's process, 803. 

Pinachrome, 575, 589, 597, 613, 633, 787, 888, 1560, 
1624. 

Pinacyanol, 658, 745, 787, 888, 2072, 2125. 
Pinaflavol, 2192, 2210-2211. 

Pinatype, 656, 657, 671, 678, 732, 741, 784, 788, 799- 
800, 829, 844, 852, 860, 872, 889, 891, 935, 936, 
1038, 1228, 1245, 1774, 1859, 1897, 1990, 2240. 

Pinaverdol, 2125. 

Plates, 145-146, 161, 165, 206, 265, 489, 499, 643, 
916, 1124, 1814, 1818, 1944. 

See also names of plates, as: Autochromes, Thames, 
Dufay, etc. 

Keeping properties, 888. 

Preservation, 760. 
Plates (composite), 2300. 
Poitevan's process, 67, 76, 169, 267, 904. 

See also Author index. 
Pollock's process, 435. 
Polychromide process, 1843, 1878, 1954. 
"Popular" works, 2038. 

Portraits, 539, 590, 692, 701, 746, 796, 1242, 1252, 
1324, 1431, 1516, 1550, 1844, 1926, 1972, 2146, 
2156, 2235, 2238. 

Positives on gelatine plates, 1251. 

Pouncy's process, 142. 

Powel, Samuel, 160. 

Powrie-Warner process. See Warner-Powrie process. 
Prieur and Dubois' process, 430, 581. 
Prismatic dispersion, 837, 944, 992, 1019. 
Prizma process, 2060, 2079, 2227-2228. 
Professional work, 646, 679, 869, 1340, 1409, 1477, 

1829, 1850, 1931, 1981, 2037. 
Projection apparatus, 526, 601, 674, 681, 1112, 1224, 

1284-1286, 1328, 1379, 1464, 1866-1867, 2176, 

2203, 2281, 2309. 
Prokudin-Gorsky's process, 1616. 
Purkinje effect, 1090. 
"Pyro-Reeb," 943. 
Pyrometry (optical), 2001. 

R 

Raehlmann, 794. 
Ratiometer, 1994. 

Raydex process, 1780, 1824, 1877, 1899, 1903-1904, 
1907, 1922-1923, 2039, 2062, 2115, 2170, 2229, 
2247, 2255, 2333. 

Rayleigh, Lord, 338, 420, 467. 

Raylo process, 2312, 2328, 2352-2353. 

Reade, Dr., 70. 

Red, 100, 433, 622, 698, 714, 729, 769, 787, 1257a, 

1534, 1858, 2127, 2282. 
Refraction compensator, 932. 
Registration, 613, 1326, 1578. 
Reichel's process, 351, 614, 686. 
Relief processes, 501, 2206, 2244, 2325. 
Research, 1995, 2124. 
Retouching stand, 2091. 
Reversal of dye images, 2188. 

Rheinberg's processes, 1485, 1491, 1709-1710, 1718- 

1719, 1728, 1808. 
Rock sections, 1024. 
Roll-holders, 1394. 
Rothe's process, 604. 

See also Author index. 
Ruth plate, 1599. 

s 

Sampolo's process. See Brasseur and Sampolo's 
process. 

Sanzol reduction process, 949. 
Scheele, Carl Wilhelm, 1753. 
Schmidt camera, 967, 980. 



Schuett, F., 467. 

Schulze, Johann Heinrich, 1753. 

Scientific requirements, 294, 448, 738, 794, 1603, 
2103, 2126. 

Screen plate processes, 1101, 1116, 1151, 1166-1169, 
1281, 1288, 1350, 1354, 1402, 1412, 1435, 1456, 
1465, 1475, 1485, 1607, 1613-1614, 1620, 1623, 
1633, 1693, 1713, 1743, 1752, 1792, 1806, 1837, 
1862, 1870, 1893, 1957, 1989, 2023, 2154, 2197, 
2205, 2292, 2305, 2315, 2321, 2338. 
See also names of plates, as: Warner-Powrie, Lu- 
miere, Paget, etc. 

Screens, 144, 233, 265, 271, 276, 314, 337, 356, 398, 
404, 479, 567, 583, 629, 664, 670, 720, 744, 818, 
922, 1004, 1013, 1525, 1566, 1648, 1656, 1664, 
1755, 1766, 2094. 

Screens (celluloid), 1546. 

Seebeck, Johann Thomas, 267. 

Seebeck's process, 1385. 

Selle, Gustav, 816. 

Selle's process, 286, 435. 

Sensitol dyes, 2048. 

Shepherd, E. S., 946. 

Shepherd, E. Sanger, process, 374, 378, 460-461, 541, 
544-546, 551-552, 581, 627-628, 746, 752, 785, 
843, 1040. 

Silver salts, 607, 1839, 1946, 2108. 

Sinop process, 805-806. 

Slavik's process, 623, 637. 

Smith-Merckens process, 771, 774. 

Smith's (J. H. & Co.), process. See Bleachout proc- 
ess. 

Smith's screen plate, 958. 
Soap bubbles, 2015. 

Society of Colour Photographers, 705, 711, 976, 1195, 
1965. 

Solgram, 611, 638, 775, 2119. 
Sparkle, avoidance of, 1803. 
Spectrotelescope, 273. 

Spectrum, 13-14, 97, 107, 110, 135, 143, 488, 605, 
631, 699-700, 878, 921, 1483, 1927, 2057, 2076, 
2116. 

Stage plays, 2287. 

Stained glass windows,- 463, 2147. 

Stereochromoscope, 244. 

Stereoscopic photography, 933, 1067, 1103, 1254, 1329, 
1404, 1433, 1464, 1481, 1522, 1530, 2176, 2182, 
2331. 

Stripping films, 1119. 
Studios, 651, 759. 

Subtractive process, 900, 1949, 2066, 2073. 
Sunrise and sunset effects, 1871. 

Szczepanik's process, 482, 572, 771, 774, 776, 779, 
959, 1208, 1293, 1295, 1298. 



T 

Tauleigne-Mazo process, 1464, 1487, 1507. 
Technicolor process, 2064. 
Telephotography, 1875, 1896. 

Thames process, 523, 1027, 1035, 1056, 1104, 1176- 
1177, 1212, 1216-1217, 1229-1230, 1269, 1371- 
1376, 1381, 1383, 1387, 1395, 1418, 1423, 1510, 
1744. 

Thermometers, 1390. 
Thin membranes, 300. 
Thorpe's process, 435, 509. 
Three-color back, 855-856. 

Three-color printing, 325, 333, 349, 359, 363, 432, 
473, 521, 524, 650, 748, 778, 783, 806, 832, 956, 
1833, 1848, 1936, 1985-1986, 1998, 2084-2085, 
2128, 2185, 2341, 2345, 2347. 

Three-color prism process, 98, 112. 

Three-plate processes (early), 63-64, 228, 292. 

Thwing, C. B., 467. 

Tissue process, 874. 



COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY 



123 



Transmission, electric, 1701. 

Transparencies, 416, 752, 784-785, 863, 1026, 1169, 
1291, 1481, 1654, 1690, 1736, 1778, 1864, 1973, 
2091, 2200, 2302, 2323, 2347. 

Traube's process, 748, 798, 971-972, 1031, 1716, 1984. 

Triadochrome process, 2237, 2298-2299. 

Tripak process, 1528, 1567-1571, 1683. 

Triple projection process, 1867. 

Trist's camera, 2202, 2301. 

Two-color process, 786, 1387, 1470, 1524, 1967, 1977, 
1979, 1987, 2064, 2073, 2173, 2238, 2283, 2303. 



u 

Uto process. See Bleachout process. 
Uva-chrom process, 2239, 2258, 2297. 



V 

Valenta, Edouard, 527. 
Valenta's process, 236, 467. 

See also Author index. 
Vallot process, 493. 
Varnish, 1188, 1370. 
Vaucamps, 565. 

Verachromoscope, 1676, 1700, 1727. 
Veracolor plate, 1295. 
Verak's process, 198. 

Veress's process, 168, 170-171, 173, 183. 

Verrill's process, 511. 

Vidal, Leon, 755, 790-791. 

Vidal's process, 89-90, 92, 106. 

Views, books of, 1320, 1582, 1720, 1739, 1782. 

Vogel, H. W., 368, 372. 

Vogel's process, 99, 104, 126, 134, 147, 188, 2026. 
Vollenbruch's theory, 1574. 



w 

Wall, E. J., 328, 620. 

War time developments, 2122. 

Warner-Powrie process, 679, 814, 818, 867, 873, 883, 
896-897, 913, 917, 926, 928, 954, 982, 986, 1122, 
1127, 1140, 1191, 1201, 1356, 1381, 1395. 

Warner's (Miss), process, 2305. 

Warnerke, Leon, 131. 

Weather conditions, 831. 

Whites, 941, 1682. 

Wiener, Otto, 181. 

Wiener's theory, 348, 461, 467. 

Wolf-Czapek, Karl Wilhelm, 1856. 

Wood's process, 390, 405, 425, 477, 673, 731. 

Worel's process, 493, 508, 517, 600. 

Wothly's process, 185. 

Wratten and Wainwright, 697, 1013, 1222, 1742. 



X 

X-rays, 135. 



Y 

Yellow, 863, 2111. 

Young-Helmholtz theory, 727, 756, 1461, 1517, 2057. 



z 

Zander's process, 696, 721, 807-810. 

Zenker's theory, 262, 338, 345, 347, 420, 451, 461, 

467, 506, 599, 676. 
Zink's photo-polychromoscope, 266. 



